Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M98-0043 - STANFORDS RESTAURANT
5+4q•noRC 3 ReNnetilleit[f rY)c)iga-- City of Tukwila Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 Permit No: M98 -0043 Type: B -MECH Category: NRES Address: 17380 SOUTHCENTER PY Location: Parcel #: 262304 -9079 Contractor License No: DEVCOI*158K4 TENANT STANFORDS RESTAURANT 17380 SOUTHCENTER PY, TUKWILA WA 98188 OWNER MBK NORTHWEST Phone: 206 575 -8090 C/O TRAMMEL CROW COMPANY, 17560 SOUTHCENTER PY, TUKWILA WA 98188 CONTACT JEFF HAMMOND Phone: 503- 226 -0590 34 NW FIRST AV, #309, PORTLAND OR 98209 CONTRACTOR DEVCON INC Phone: 425 - 252 -1444 1616 E MARINE VIEW DR, EVERETT WA 98201 ********************************************* * * * * * * * * *:r * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: UMC Edition: 1994 * / *** V ROOF -TOP MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR RESTAURANT. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Per:11 — Z ter Authorized Signature Date I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the perfor ce'-of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this building pe Signatur . C.14' a Date: MECHANICAL PERMIT Valuation: 50,000.00 Total Permit Fee: 183.75 ****** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Status: ISSUED Issued: 07/21/1998 Expires: 01/17/1999 7 2 - / Print Nam C C. g /SQt.11` Title: " 1 j d iped et_ a?'" (206) 431 -3670 This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days.from the,last inspection. Project Namefrenant: ST; b. • ;, ' ; , ; ;;, Description of work to be done: MECHANICAL FOR NEW RESTAURANT L Value of Construction: $50,000.00 Site ddress: City State /Zip: Tax Parcel Number: 262304 -9079 ') SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY, TUKWILA, WA Property Owner: PACIFIC COAST RESTAURANTS, INC. Phone: 503 - 684 -2803 Street Address: 7165 SW FIR LOOP, #200 PORTLAND, OREGON City State /Zip: 97223 Fax #: 503 -620-6149 Phone: 503-226 7_090 Contact Person: JEFF W. HAMMOND Street Address: 34 NW FIRST AVENUE #309 PORTLAND, OREGON City State /Zip: 97209 Fax #: ,03- 273 -8649 Contractor: Phone: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: Arch aSHITECTS VAN LOM /EDWARDS Phone: 503- 226 -0590 Street Address: _ 34 NW FIRST AVENTIF #309 PORTLAND, OREGON City State /Zip: 97209 Fax #: 503 -273 -8649 Phone: 503 - 659 -6394 Engineer: INTERFACE ENGINEERING Street Address: . 6542 SE LAKE ROAD MILWAUKIE. OREGON 97227 City State /Zip: Fax #: 503 - 659 -9029 -:;' IUII CW.:0 t_0118 ilMi `titE1/1EW!ANt),,! i 0,0611A0itetvIrSTED %(TO;BEALE ;6(1,T11Y' ifiep • LICANr) Description of work to be done: MECHANICAL FOR NEW RESTAURANT L _ Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material In the building? ❑ yes ® no Attach list of materials and storage location on separate 8 1/2 X 11 paper lndicatinlquantltles & Material Safety Data Sheets ❑ Above Ground Tanks ❑ Antennas /Satellite Dishes ❑ Bulkhead /Docks ❑ Commercial Reroof ❑ Demolition ❑ Fence ® Mechanical ❑ Manufactured Housing- Replacement only ❑ Parking Lots ❑ Retaining Wails ❑ Tomporary Pedestrian Protection /Exit Systems ❑ Temporary Facilities ❑ Tree Cutting t i .? Cfi.; :j�:, i , MONT:HL�Y.SER. VIGE �, �,..:a,•:., , t. , � �. f; .��N� M. i�? `:.i.,'T . ''..' . . .....� • � {i•. i ' i! ., : ,1 �f �>9: �I '':� ' i:; ., ....: ,i�����s..i y , ,.a;,4 ,,� , ;' , . 7 M) �.,,..., h , << . .° ' ., ,::• Name: PACIFIC COAST RESTAURANTS, INC. Phone: 503-_6.84-23Q3_ Addre SW FIR LOOP, #200 City /State /Zip: PORTLAND, OR 97223 0 Water 0 Sewer 0 Metro 0 Standhy 1///e3 Miscellaneous Permit Application Application and plans must be complete In order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. ': X :; . ;AFPLICANT.fREQUEST;F.OR MISCELLANEOUS.PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS..:':',;:::'': ',: ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Landscape Irrigation ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Water Meter /Exempt # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est, quantity: gal Schedule: CI Miscellaneous ❑ Moving Oversized Load/Hauling WATER. M E7 ERT) EP ,.Q51T /REFUND'B1hL`INGr;i)i'.•t `. ,: ...:..... Name: PAC..TFIC •* :e Address: 7165 SW FIR LOOP, #200 Date application accepted: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. MISCPMT.DOC 7/11/96 CITY O'' TUKWILA Permit Cerns:er 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk i Fire Loop /Hydrant (maln to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Land Altering: 0 Cut cubic yards 0 Fill cubic yards 0 sq. ft.grading /clearing ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer #: ❑ Sewer Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public 0 Deduct 0 Water Only Date application expires: Phone: [CItYIStatefZlP: PORTLAND. OR 97223 Applicatl ken by: (Initials) BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT :.: '' " ' Signature: I Date: Print name: Phone: Fax #: Address: City /State /Zip: ALL MISCELLANEOUS PERMIT APPLICATIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH THE FOLLOWING: ➢ ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN ➢ BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED ➢ ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED ARCHITECT ➢ STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ➢ CIVIL/SITE PLAN DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED CIVIL ENGINEER (P.E.) SUBMIT APPLICATION AND REQUIRED CHECKLISTS FOR PERMIT REVIEW ❑ Awnings /Canopies. • No signage, Bulkhead /Dock Commercial,Reroof;, .. Fences - Over 6 feet.in Height ❑ ❑ Above Ground Tanks/Water.Tanks = Suppoiled directlyupbn`grade exceeding 5,000 gallons and a ratio of height to diarneter'orrWidth which exceeds 2 :1 Antennas /Satellite Demolition Land Altering /Grading /Preloads Loading Docks;. Mechanical (Residential &'Commercial Miscellaneous; PublicWorks Manufactured Hausing'(REDINSIGNIAONLI() Moving Oversized: Load /Hauling- Parking Lots .. Residential Reroof - •Exempt'with exception;;Jr,roof,structure; to be.repairedor replaced Retaining :Walls`- Oyer 4 feet'IIn height Temporary; Facilities Tree Cutting MISCPMT.DOC 7/11/96 Temporary Pedestrian Protection/Exit'Systems Submit checklist. :No M - Submit checklist:' . No: Commercial Improvement Permit':. . Stibmit.checklist .• No M -10':: Submit•checklist :. No:. M-6 • , 'Submit checklist: No: • M-9 : No:: M - Submlt Commercial•,Tenant Improvement Pef'niit;'; Sub'niit'ctiecklist No: H -17 '':SUbmit'checklist' `,No.::. M - 8, . ::•. Residential only, Submit cbeckli .No, H =9 Submit;checklist i,No: M -5: Submft'checklist No: 'M-4 Residential.Building Permit '. . 'Submit.checicllst ubTpit:ohecklist, <'::No; ;M -3; ; M Sa • utimit checlilist�`::i No:. M - �� Subftircheckiist .Subrnit:checklist V o M -7 Si4bpnit.checkiist iNo :. M -4 Siibmit checklist :: No ❑ Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If not available at the time of application, a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued, unless the homeowner will be the builder OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building .Owner /Authorized.Agent, .If the applicant is othel;thantiie owner,: registered "arcllltect/englneer, • or c ontractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from.tlie property ow,ior authorizing the agent to submit this "permit application and obtain the permit will be required •as part of this submittal. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. •. �^r' r s. Y / A * *C r py '• A6 � { 'A a M i' � G!'t‘ Address: 17380 SOUTHCENTER PY Suite: Tenant: STANFORTS RESTAURANT ype: 8-MECH Parcel #: 262304-9079 4****14********k**W*kk*****4****k*A********Oek****A****kick******-****.4*k**** Permit Conditions: 1. No chan9es will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect or Engineer and the Division. 2. All permits, inspectiptyii*Opd4Artvod plans shall be available at the jWsj.tel3rior to the :-:`,tarW:of any con struction. TheOcAcieuments=,'Iaqe tObe maintaf,01and avail- able until IPLpt?LtlOfl is 'ranted 3. All constru4Ori to ',be Id)3We 1r C 6 nf Ormano*rth WO);!0,ved plans and/KAOuiremetts,ot the UniforM BuT1 Otng4ode-sZ4994 EditionVamended'UniforM'MeChanical,c.ode'14994,Edleion), and Waslhin9ton State Energy 'Code (1994 Edition).:- 4. Validity:of The 1 sii.4:4nilof a permit,or plans;:,Spe,cifications, and :computations shall cnot,b6 strue00 be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of an'y of the p of the code or :of%anY other ordinance of the jurisdiction No permit phesumT,ng to gfiie to vib'late'ori'cancel'the provisionsoof thi codeshall i 5. MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION ;INSTRUCTIONS REOUIRED ON, FOa REVIEQ'. P , , f;,.:; tilf 'y 4:..., / It? ■ i ''''- ';,'.., ■ ■ ■ , .... . 4 ) ; , •-.1 ,,l` i A ,, a' CITY OF TUKWILA Permit No: .M98-0043 Status: ISSUED Applied: 03/06/.19913 Issued: 07/21/1998 ACTIVITY NUMBER: PROJECT NAME: DEPARTMENT: ;Pi) ing Division Pu +;c or s c ?eut' Coovtt. co.i PLAN REVIEW /ROUTINE SLIP M98 -0043 STANFORDS RESTAURANT AVSI ire P eve tion ru v iral II DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues, Thurs) Complete E Incomplete Comments. TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route El No further Review Required E Routed by Staff ❑ (if routed by staff, make copy to master file and enter into Sierra) REVIEWERS INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved E Approved with Conditions El REVIEWERS INITIALS. CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved 111 Approved with Conditions El \PR•ROUTE,DOC 1/98 DATE: 3 -6 -98 AOra- Kanning Division e rm i t oordina or DUE DATE: 3 - 10 - 98 a R Not Applicable El DATE. DUE DATE: 3 Not Approved (attach comments) El DATE: DUE DATE: Not Approved (attach comments) Ei REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE. Pro -c : AL gruA ' ■ 5 Typpspactlp . tti ll,„ Adviress: nel(:).- P ate called: ---- Special instructions: Dale wa ed: 11/ q 9' _ a.m. P.m. Rep ...: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECKO Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 )& PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 [Receipt No: ApprovecJpepp.JicabIe.codes.. El Corrections required prior to approval. CO MEKITS:at_ 4.11111111111WinWild .40-1rel Insp $4 .00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspe ion, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Dat Date: Pr 'e+ t: ( Ty of Inspe Pn Ovi1 stg) S( ' I N( I P Da ca led. I\ 1 2 1 A 1 1 Special instructions: ) Date wante a. ! .. ‘ � p Request r. it Phone. — S 3IS INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Inspector: INSPECTION RECttD Retain a copy with permit MQ6 00 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. 0 ce r 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: • i ject: 1Wi1 lalIVA Type of specti. n: i/ i/ 1 :"mil; , .:- .._• .. . . • d. 3 4E(b -Vl L ' j / i r' ' �►' U Date called: )tom Date wanted. / , J � x. 41 .. .'" Special instructions: Requeste Phone No. COMMENTS: a /e -.e44 p /4 emoil_ __ :"mil; , .:- .._• .. . . /.1 / 7 ,; ..-5d - wee / S7 (G, 120i{1 sP � 45 codiize G (577.ii, / 0 4 0 3/. ( P t/ z -b /rCtDt/S7 �rt ^.Tfi r 1 !'� � ��Ag' s" M' ai. �r, 1' �;; +S.apuvr�,n�.�.w�"�•St':'ia`.�i INSPECTION RERD Retain a copy with. INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. Receipt No,: Date: �r Wilc3 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Date: $42.00 • EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Pro T,•• of I .•IW I Address: Da e ca es: / / 6 Special instructions: / : a (1 A M y� I L 1— t " Da : . • „ . anted: , o, a.m. R ester: G LM Phone s11 — ore , INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3620 Averoved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: • 4c- Qom.. Receipt No: Date: Corrections required prior to approval. AIM/ I InspectoA rr 47.01 I NSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspec on, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Proj t j ({.rj,'1 !Z.f c -('1 i ' , Type of in pectiop: v , Illy D ate called: ' i' i / 4 G i t 1 ,1 .VVL a.ml C Am: Ad re , t � ::� 6 (� 6'i R -I- i. Special instructions: LI ' t .1 r 1 I (Date want d. � Request Phone No.: • ES C'o"l�"i .' i vic.r:.v�r'1. cM:':;i?br!"Vmr, iw>- ,1' w�`.•!�'try7+•�,t;rstK CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPE TION NO. INSPECTION RECIFID , Retain a copy wit ermit M4 . - 00 1 6 PERMIT NOS (206) 431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. I, F Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: .iv� Inspe ; ., Art / $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to Inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Call to schedule reinspection, ;Accept No Date: P e : Type o r pooh. : di ■ (I/97a 697(t ?4 • /4— AUf7 s343 J Date c . lied:( ( / Special instructions: ..>" Date wanted: 0 r ____ a Reque er: Phone 5 - 1s — _ 6 6 cs COMMENTS: .•-• f 4 . /fl7 f 2 47- _ /3 orc_se,c, di ■ (I/97a 697(t ?4 Z.7.--__01../2 147 e /7/ c" 4 la 0 , 0 ( Ar, Icapfr_ z A A _ 401 Wofrri--3> Pt,e)-)tf d 4 _CI At g -i ..,-,...,- Ot? ..0 ,s _...0175 qs ___V:: 7244 ie-t44- Retain a'copy with-Oermit 4'3 INSPECTION Rlf"'?RD A / d INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 _Approved per applicable codes. . 01-Corrections required prior to approval. Inspe [Receipt No.: Date (206) 431-3670 1 $42.0f REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspect on, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Project: �1 �Q �` K� • ..j�, ,(6( ," a.� TYP ...�wr�.rr% - '»� � ��j GtDV. -1' A� f 'S :Le.i ii,i,.- am , T�'+I`` - '��' r Date called: 1 _, 0_( ( Special instructs. s : lam Its 0- - w , -le C hc^^"" 6v - uf GQOt @ ! � u Date wanted: G a•m• �- � Requester: j i r ' from Phone N - 9 14i le '.INSPECTION RRD Retain a copy wit ermit INS CITYPF TUKWIA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 ,Southcenter B d., #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 COMMENTS: 0. (L -2 6'4, r PERMIT NO. ,(20f 431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes, 40orrections required prior to approval. Inspector* 4' ni $42. ION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to Inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. [Receipt No.: Date: Date: Project: Si ctek y r 5 r Type of inspection: 0 t'.. Address: n .s5:-) 1. N A ate called: t y fi t Special instructions: ate wanted: k' . .m. Requester: ill 01 A10/1 Phone No.: zap. 5 ys 0 Lis. r r vN••S:1"�s�f INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes, I Receipt No.: INSr"CTION RECORD Retan r a copy with permit I COMMENTS: �� #) a /75 Aze fir" M i''4 - Datp: Date: (206) 431 - 3670 Corrections required prior to approval. ..c or: F $ , 2.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior o Inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ro ect: '� l exi • •� Type s( e4 n: W C 'c i � Ad rIssyo 3 Cr,-'11-e-r 1.0 Date called : � want 1 i C1 Special instructions: +,Date S m: Requ: ter: 14 b. Phone : " 2O` (435) .;,i'; 7 i, .n ',. T -' F2Vit.'i� %r- °$' -...w«rs, � t �',.s :...: , R Y.,.�.r.e : r ..M.,. �k a a /• 1 INSCTION RECORD ' i • Retai copy with permit � - Q Receipt No.: INSP'E'CTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (Approved per applicable codes. I Date: PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 • Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: • $42.00 , EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection, Project: cJ c ra j ^ v^ J � �q�rt,Y \tom JJ Type of inspection: a N i C a 1 � Addr Date called: Lt \ 6/ s.- Special instructions: Date wanted: t \ am. Itt7� re, p..m. DD Requester: k_ t e Phone 1 J No.. � r . Z f �,. nom".+ .,e"� `.'.` w zp,T -4157 _ I .''ter. INSTION RECORD Reta&vicopy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 COMMENTS: (54i..4726 — 21-25-Zr -2- r 1.A) Q �- - O--- I� FP,is s A407 c e,-t 'Z-TZ .,Approved per applicable codes. L_ Corrections required prior to approval. n $ - EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, CaII to schedule reinspection, Receipt No.: Date: rev Project: d e sc ita4 o.„,.. Type ofA pal Crver)3 P.m. Address: i7 0 SO - val`C c " -- (ed it Date call& Date wlrit Special instructions: Requests . ' GC..i&a..... Phone Nz.: 8 ti COMMENTS: vatarftl,Ny 'WV' Tirtrzrorme"erTivAttr,'Mtir 47;« INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. INSOTION RECORD Retal copy with permit Dater,/ , 110;: PERMIT NO. fak oc7 (206) 431-3670 orrections required prior to approval. $42.00 R SPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to j spection, tee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection, I Receipt No.: 1 Date: COMMENTS',,,r r, :...- . no r 4to ar '.f 7a - :. ' . i -411111' J Imo! /. - � c �lev7 G 5 f. 44/05)z:::. le c)62c..7 pe i 17-r pze v/A-� Special instructions: ' 6i�' e.c. /66 ,-€._ t- --u-S. _ 6776►,./ ei/F` i t (7 GitTr4,c.,.i �= P h44 5 N• ) . ; . _ — no-- 5,c2i1.- F7 46 s,e, s .10 ?cC P6-404(r <0 > . ,ill' «S6 7-70 i Project /Type Insp foA g G[ : 6.04.. Atc..4 � c �lev7 G 5 f. Addr7, yj Date called/ r p, Special instructions: ' Date want dd•.-- p � cx— �0 p .m. Requues end n / _/ P h44 5 N• ) . ; . _ — no-- 5,c2i1.- IN ECTION NO. ; INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with perm CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 Date: "vFF'�4TtT:�F - T'g MFs PERMIT4NO. (206) 431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. (corrections required prior to approval. $42. 0 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED, Prior o inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule relnspection. Receipt No.: is \'i � '151 .. RECEIVED ti j4 L 2 2" 1999 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT -.4* *Ahhk *:4** **+k*k:1•'kk* ?4k *•k *•A••.hA'k•kA*** * 4' h: k** •k.4* *A * *4•k ***4+1r0:* * CITY or TUKWI:LA. WA - TRANSMIT k•A•.4:1•k;ti 74A k•kfiil *A4t^, A'A**A***A* h7t• **4. h*A k*4 **AAvl•*.1k:1 k**4.h* A'.kOr: *A TRANSMIT. Number: R9700798 Amount: 183.75 07/2 13:0 Pavmen 1. Method: 15869 Notation: MERIT ME CH11N ICta1_ [nit» FICF • Permit Nov 1498.0043 Tvpe: 13-MI CH MECHANICAL PERMIT Pacrrel . No: 262304 - 9079 Site AddreSs: .17380 St3U1HCENTEU PY Total Fee!;: This Payment 18375 Total ALL Pint: t3a1 ande: A1,i r***; *OA *A *A **11 *k * *A * * *** ** 1*.1**A.**4t#,1. *Ak k i*A•k*•.A*14****** Account.Code Deiuription Amount 000/345..030 PLE CHECK - NONR{wfi 36.75. 000/322.100 MECHANICAL_ ._ Nt3NRt:S 137.00. 1x33.'75 .00•. Balance Due: $ 1 S . 16 Need Current Contractor Registration Card: Yes Need to Enter Contractor Information in Sierra: Yes ( � - 1.111? Balance Due: $ 1 S . 16 Need Current Contractor Registration Card: Yes Need to Enter Contractor Information in Sierra: Yes Fr25.052.000 (8/97) • DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS CONST CONT GENERAL REGIST ::.# EXP . DATE CCO1 ;•,DEVCOI *158K4 "'03/30/1999 EFFECTIVE. DATE 05/24/1985 DEVCON INC 1616 E MARINE VIEW DR EVERETT WA 98201 u." STATE OF WASHINGTON DEVCON, INC. 1616 E MARINE VIEW DR EVERETT WA 98201 —"TAX REGISTRATION MINOR"' WORK PERMIT CITY OF BELLEVUE: GENERAL BUSINESS REGISTRATION MASTER LICENSE SERVICE REGISTRATIONS AND LICENSES ORGANIZATION TYPE DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION UNIFIED BUSINESS ID #: BUSINESS ID #: LOCATION: EXPIRES : INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE DUTIES OF MINORS: CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP * *MINORS MUST BE 16 YRS OLD TO WORK IN CONSTRUCTION NO POWER SAWS /NAIL GUNS /STAPLE GUNS ** LICENSING RESTRICTIONS: MINORS EMPLOYED IN CONSTRUCTION MUST BE AT LEAST 16 YEARS OF AGE. WAC 296-125-033 (4) _i The above entity has been issued the business registrations or licenses listed DEPARTMENT OF UCENSING, BUSINESS & PROFESSIONS DIVISION, P.O. BOX 9034 OLYMPIA, WA 96507.9034 (360) 564 -1400 ,Lit" T : :1 ]i4='r c �,J�I`�.imrr '•2!y.. .ia�=.. _,�►. Irv: __�•_ =�' _'i^�...�m... _ 1„t.�i;u;; '!'�..T..i�'" _.. `�.•'".. 600 577 564 001 0001 05 -31 -1999 C Project Name City of Tukwila Fire Department DTA Nlcor � ►� s Address /7380 .</e._ p TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Retain current inspection schedule _X Needs shift inspection X Approved without correction notice ?e Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: roll /t /v/4 ` Nv Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: ___ _ Pre -Fire: At Permits: Authorized Signature FINALAPP.FRM r-/ 0 b John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Are Chief Permit No. -X9 06)6 /11,e - «9 '3 Suite # DO 7C19 ate Rev. 2/19/98 T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (2O6) 52 4439 • Project Info Project Address s tanford'a Restaurant Date 2/27/98 Total Glazing Area Electronic version: these values are automatically taken from ENV -UA -1. (rough opening) Gross Exterior (vertical & overhd) divided by Wall Area times 100 equals % Glazing For Building Department Use Concrete /Masonry Option Q yes Check here if using this option and if project meets all requirements for the Concrete /Masonry Option. See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Enter requirements for each qualifying * no assembly below. Applicant Name: Interface Engineering Applicant Address: 6542 SE Lake Road Applicant Phone: (503) 659 - 6394 Space Heat Type 0 Electric resistance t) All other (see over for definitions) If project qualifies for Concrete /Masonry Option, list walls with HC a 9.0 Btu /f1 below (other walls must meet Opaque Wall requirements). Use descriptions and values from Table 20-5b in the Code. Glazing Area Calculation Note: Below grade walls may be included in the Gross Exterior Wall Area if they are Insulated to the level required for opaque walls. Total Glazing Area Electronic version: these values are automatically taken from ENV -UA -1. (rough opening) Gross Exterior (vertical & overhd) divided by Wall Area times 100 equals % Glazing 698.0 6111.0 X 100 = 11.4% Concrete /Masonry Option Q yes Check here if using this option and if project meets all requirements for the Concrete /Masonry Option. See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Enter requirements for each qualifying * no assembly below. Opaque Concrote /Masonry Wall Requirements Insulation on Interior - maximum U- factor is 0.19 Insulation on exterior or Integral • maximum U- factor is 0.25 If project qualifies for Concrete /Masonry Option, list walls with HC a 9.0 Btu /f1 below (other walls must meet Opaque Wall requirements). Use descriptions and values from Table 20-5b in the Code. Wall Description (including insulation R -value & position) U- factor CITV ECEVED F T 1994 Was. 'ngton State Nonresidential Energy Code Compll. •, e Form Envelope Summary Climate Zone ''`' ENV -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Description New Building ❑ Addition ❑ Alteration ❑ Change of Use Compliance Option El Envelope Requiroments (enter values as applicable) Fully heated/cooled space Minimum Insulation R- values Roofs Over Attic All Other Roofs Opaque Walls Below Grade Walls Floors Over Unconditioned Space Slabs -on -Grade Radiant Floors Opaque Doors Vertical Glazing Overhead Glazing Maximum U- factors Maximum SHGC (or SC) Vertical /Overhead Glazing Semi- heated space' Minimum Insulation R- values Roofs Over Semi- Heated Spaces' 'Refer to Section 1310 for qualifications and requirements Notes: Prescriptive ❑ Component Performance (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications) ❑ ENVSTD ❑ Systems Analysis Juno, 1995 J ILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER ?R1- 0 'r► M9s.00q3 1 Envelope Summary ack) Climate Zone ENV -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Decision Flowchart for Proscriptive Option 1302 Space Heat Type: For the purposo of determining building envelope requirements, the following Iwo categories comprise all space heating typos: Other: All other space heating systems Including gas, solid fuel, oil, and propane space heating systems and those systems listed In the exception to electric resistance. (continued at right) AI Inslatlm Irldalled7 B3IoNgradevdis od) RIO Ddory grade vttlls(dh) R-11 Rtofs au attics R30 AI dher rods R21 Ra3sa,ert.nud.,y3. R•19 Sabsongade R•10 Padart flogs R10 q3x a Boas U0.60 Dazing Oiterla M?!? agi - dal Ara % U U S-t3C 00.15% 0,90 1,45 1.00 15.20% 0.75 1.40 1.00 2030% 0.03 1.30 0.65 3040% 0.50 1.25 0.45 no 1 Yes 1994 Wasa'ngton State Nonresidential Energy Code Compli e Form Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for the optional Prescriptive Option. If not, either the Component Performance or Systems Analysis Options must be used. AI iraltilat ir>dalled7 - TAgs R-11 lrt) U0.19 tvtturyvalIs(cllxs) U0.25 Beiovgadevalls ed) R•10 Belay g vel Is c tr) R-11 Rxfscoattics R30 AI other rais R21 Rarsaertrtomd.T. R19 Sabscngrade RIO Rtdart fleas R10 g>ofue dais UO.fo C7aarg Oitala tvti t? aatrr�g Vat. 04 /Yea % U U S-I2C CO-15% 0.93 1.45 1.03 15.20% 0.75 1.40 1,03 2030% 0.60 1.30 0.65 3040% 0.50 1.25 0.45 no •Cla2ing?% no PS Y Y Sat ) fxsdate r10 ,., Fbet7 -'yes PathAloned ie ,. ` Gazing?, - n o Yes' Y AI halation Irrialled? �yvdls SIrt) U0.19 Maxry veilstothe) U0.25 &Icwgra rMisted) RIO Icw grade veils dh) R19 F cfst>.erattics R38 AI dherroofs R30 9 d. oascher%mat Radantfloss R10 Craw doors U0.60 C2rrpcnert i edam orre sydarsionalyssR4ifed Electric Resistance: Space heating systems which use electric resistance elements as the primary healing system Including baseboard. radiant, and forced air units where the total electric resistance heat capaclty exceeds 1.0 W/It of the gross conditioned floor area. Exception: Heal pumps and terminal electric resistance healing In variable air volume distribution systems. aazir9 Oiteria M? aaong Skii70 -f Aea % U U S-t3 00.20% 0.40 0.110 1.00 Yes no • Mousy V411 C)iteriaCKZ; vdIsR49 yes., (beim) ; " rto'-iraiaflai / Concrete /Masonry Option* Assembly Description Wall Heat Capacity (HC) Assy.Tag HC" Area (sf) Totals Area weighted HC: divide total of (HC x area) by Total Area HC x Area June, 1995 AI halation !related? ire - G�1Ts - RTC erlav gale vells (cod) R•10 Wonrgradevelis (o8T) R-19 Rxrfs aer attics R38 AI cther=Is R30 Roasaer taxi d. R30 Sabsatgade R40 Rxiart floors R•10 gxaque dogs U0.60 Going Oitrxia M? Aea % U u Sit 00.20% 0.40 0.80 1.00 Y no *If the area weighted heat capacity (HC) of the total above grade wall is a minimum of 9,0, the Concrete Masonry Option may be used. "For framed walls, assume HC =1.0 unless calculations are provided; for all other walls, use Section gpogREC TY OF E IVED TUMILA ► u 6 1998 IERMrr Project Address Stanford' a Restaurant Date 2/27/98 Space Heat Type 0 Electric resistance Q All other For Building Department Use Glazing Area as % gross exterior wall area 11.4% Prop. 40.0% Max.Target Concrete /Masonry Option Q Yes ® No Notes: If glazing area exceeds maximum allowed in Table, then calculate adjusted areas on back (over). If Concrete /Masonry Option is used, Target U- factors, SHGC and Glazing % will be different than shown below. Refer to Table 13 -1 for correct values. Building Component List components by assembly ID & page # Proposed UA U- factor x Area (A) = UA (U x A) Target UA U- factor x Area (A) = UA (U x A) Vertical Glazing U =1.100 Plan ID:Giazing 1 U=0.600 Plan ID:Glazing 2 U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: 1.100 175.0 192.5 0.600 523.0 313.8 0.900 698.0 628.2 Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -15% 0.40 0.90 >15 -20% 0,40 0.75 >20 -30% not allowed 0.60 >30-40% not allowed 0.50 (see Table 13 -1 for Conc./Masonry values) Overhead Glazing Over AttlCS I U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: Glazing % Electric Resist, Other Heating 0 -15% 0.80 1.45 >15 -20% 0.80 1.40 >20 -30% not allowed 1.30 >30 -40% not allowed 1,25 (see Table 13 -1 for Conc./Masonry values) Oth.Roofs U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: siooa anbedO U =0.400 PIanID :opaquo Door U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: 0.400 105.0 42.0 0.600 105.0 63.0 Electric Resist. Other Heating 0,60 0.60 Roofs Over R =18.9 Plan ID:Roof 1 R =18.5 Plan ID:Roof 2 R =17 . 9 Plan ID:Roof 3 0.053 4816.0 255.2 0.054 3035.0 163.9 0.056 640.0 35.8 0.036 8491.0 305.7 Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.031 0.036 • Other Roofs R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.034 0.050 .spell anbedo R =17.5 PlanlD:wall 1 R =32.3 PIanID:waii 2 R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: "Note: sum of Target Areas here should equal 0.057 2725.0 155.7 0.031 2583.0 80.0 Target Opaque Wall Area (see back) 0.140 2725.0 381.5 0.140 2583.0 361.6 ** Electric Resist; Other Heating Ordinary 0.062 0.14 Metal stud 0.11 0.14 Conc(int) 0.19 0.19 Conc(oth) 0,25 0.25 Below Grade Walls R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Note: if insulated to levels required for opaque walls, list above with opaque walls Electric Resist. Other Heating Ordinary 0.062 0.14 Metal stud 0.11 0.14 Floors Over I Uncond. Sp. + I R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.029 0.056 apei6 -uo -gels R =4.2 PIanID:slab Edgo R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: 0.580 442.0 256.4 _ 0.540 442.0 238.7 Electric Resist. Other Heating F =0,54 F =0.54 (see Table 13 -1 for radiant floor values) 'For CMU walls, indicate core insulation material. For compliance: Totals 15044.0 1495.3 Totals' 15044.0 NI V CITY il'1 Envelope UA Calculati • ns Climate Zonel ENV -UA 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compli Forms Juno, 1995 iLA 1) Proposed Total Area shall equal Target Total Area, and 2) Proposed Total UA shall not exceed Target 1J•2O 6 1998 PERMIT' CENTER OG= Proposed SHGC SHGC' x Area (A) = SHGC x A OG. VG= 698.0 0.900 175.0 157.5 0.300 523.0 156.9 0491,0 Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -20% 1.00 1.00 >20 -30% not allowed 0.65 >30 -40% not allowed 0.45 (see Table 13 -1 for Conc/Masonry values) 'Note: Manufacturer's SC may be used in lieu of SHGC. Totals For compliance: 5308.0 Vertical Glazing List components by assembly ID & page # Proposed SHGC SHGC' x Area (A) = SHGC x A Target SHGC SHGC x Area (A) = SHGC x A 6u!zei0 le�ivan ID:Glazing 1 ID: Glazing 2 ID: ID: ID: ID: 0.900 175.0 157.5 0.300 523.0 156.9 1.000 698.0 698.0 Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -20% 1.00 1.00 >20 -30% not allowed 0.65 >30 -40% not allowed 0.45 (see Table 13 -1 for Conc/Masonry values) 'Note: Manufacturer's SC may be used in lieu of SHGC. Totals For compliance: 698.0 314.4 Totals 698.0 698.0 Overhead Glazing List components by assembly ID & page # Proposed SHGC SHGC' x Area (A) = SHGC x A Target SHGC SHGC x Area (A) = SHGC x A Overhead Glazing I ID: ID: ID: ID: ID: ID: Glazing % Electric Resist, Other Heating 0 -20% 1.00 1.00 >20 -30% not allowed 0.65 >30 -40% not allowed 0.45 (see Table 13 -1 for Conc./Masonry values) *Note: Manufacturer's SC may be used in lieu of SHGC. Totals For compliance: Totals 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code CompliS. corms Target Area Adjustment Calculations If the total amount of glazing area as a % of gross exterior wall area (calculated on ENV -SUM1) exceeds the maximum allowed in Table 13 -1, then this calculation must be submitted Use the resulting areas in the Target UA and SHGC calculations above. Glazing Area Opaque Area Gross Exterior Wall Area I 6111.0 1 I 2444.4 I Roofs over Attics Other Roofs WallsI 1) Proposed total area shall equal Target Total Area, and 2) Proposed Total SHGC shall not exceed Target Total SHGC. 1) Proposed total area shall equal Target Total Area, and 2) Proposed Total SHGC shall not exceed Target Total SHGC. Proposed Areas: Numbered values aro used In calculations below. Roofs over Attics Other Roofs Walls X Max Glazing Area (Table 13.1) 40.0% Target OG Area In Roots over Attics 1j 8 lesser 2444.4 Proposed Opaque Area 8491.0 I 5308.0 I -i- 100 Max OG Remaining I 2444.4 I Proposed OG Area 698.0 Climate Zc- - 1 ENV -SHGC Juno, 1995 Maximum Target Glazing Area 2444.4 Target OG Area In Other Roofs n lesser 2444.4 Target OG Area'' ( 1 Target VG Area 698.0 Target Opaque Area 8491.0 Target Opaque Area Proposed Opaque Area Proposed VG Area Target VG Area -1- I - 698.0 = Note: If there is more than one type of wall, the Target VG Area may be distributed among them, and separate Target Opaque Areas found. If the Target Areas for Opaque Walls listed on the front must equal the total calculated here. 5308.0 I Target values In shaded boxes are used in the applicable Target UA calculations on the front. Target VG Area and Total Target OG Area are also used in tho applicable Target SHGC calculations above. Note: OG = overhead glazing VG = vertical glazing For Target OG's, tho lesser values are used both here and below. I Target Areas OK I c ITY ECED TU MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Building Permit Plan: checklist ENV -CHK 1994 Washington State Energy Coda Compliance Forms Juno, 1995 Project Address Stanford's Restaurant (Date 2/27/98 The following information is necessary to check a building permit application for compliance with the building envelope requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component p 1 Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1301 -1314) 1301 Scope Unconditioned spaces identified on plans if allowed YES 1302 Space heat type: GAS If "Other", indicate on plans that electric resistance heat is not allowed DWGS 1310.2 Semi - heated spaces Semi - heated spaces identified on plans if allowed 1311 Insulation YES 1311.1 Insul. installation Indicate densities and clearances SPEC YES 1311.2 Roof /ceiling insul. Indicate R -value on roof sections for attics and other roofs; Indicate clearances for attic insulation; Indicate baffles if cave vents Installed; Indicate face stapling of faced balls SPEC 07510 YES 1311.3 Wall insulation Indicate R -value on wall sections; Indicate lace stapling of faced balls; Indicate above grade exterior Insulation is protected: Indicate loose -fill core insulation for masonry walls as necess; Indicate heat capacity of masonry walls If masonry option Is used or if credit taken in ENVSTD; SPEC 07210 N.A. 1311.4 Floor insulation Indicate R -value on floor sections; Indicate substantial contact with surface; Indicate supports not more Than 24" o.c.; Indicate that insulation does not block airflow through foundation vents YES 1311.5 Slab -on -grade floor Indicate R -value on wall section or foundation detail; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 24" from top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected SPEC/ DWGS N.A. 1311.6 Radiant floor Indicate R•value on wall section or foundation detail; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 36" from the top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected; Indicate insulation also under entire slab where req'd. by Official YES 1312 Glazing and doors Provide calculation of glazing area (including both vertical vertical and overhead) as percent of gross wall area ENV — SU t1t tiaah •d YES 1312.1 U- factors Indicate glazing and door U- factors on glazing and door schedule (provide area - weighted calculations as necessary): Indicate if values are NFRC or default, if values are default then specify frame type, glazing layers, gapwidlh, low -e coatings, gas fillings SPECS DWGS YES 1312.2 SHGC & SC Indicate glazing solar heat gain coefficient or shading coefficient on glazing schedule (provide area. weighted calculations as necessary) SPEC 1313 Moisture control YES 1313.1 Vapor retarders Indicate vapor retarders on warm side SPEC/ RWGS YES 1313.2 Roof /ceiling vap,ret. Indicate vapor retarder on root section; Indicate vap. retard. with sealed seams for non -wood struc. DWGS YES 1313.3 Wail vapor retarder Indicate vapor retarder on wall section DWGS YES 1313.4 Floor vapor retarder Indicate vapor retarder on floor section DWGS N A. 1313.5 Crawl space vap, ret. Indicate six mil black polyethylene overlapped 12" on ground 1314 Air leakage YES 1314.1 Bldg. envel. sealing Indicate sealing, caulking, gasketing, and weatherstripping SPEC/ DWGS 1314.2 Glazing/door sealing Indicate weatherstripping DWGS YES 1314.3 Assernb. as ducts Indicate sealing, caulking and gasketing SPEC PRESCRIPTIVE /COMPONENT PERFORMANCE (Sections 1320 -23 or 1330 -34) YES Envelope Sum. Form Completed and attached. Provide component performance worksheet If necessary Provide ENVSTD screen 1 output if necessary attach 3d If "no" is shown for any quos ion, provide explanation; 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Y OF CITY TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compli. ce Form Building Permit Plank ' hecklist z' N_ ENV -CHK 1994 Washington Slate Energy Codo Compliance Forms June, 1995 Envelope - General Requirements 1311 Insulation 1311.1 Installation Requirements: All insulation materials shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions to achieve proper densities, maintain clearances, and maintain uniform R- values. To the maximum extent possible, insulation shall extend over the full component area to the intended R- value. 1311.2 Roof /Ceiling Insulation: Open -blown or poured loose-fill insulation may be used in attic spaces where the slope of the ceiling is not more than 3/12 and there is at least thirty inches of clear distance from the top of the bottom chord of the truss or ceiling joist to the underside of the sheathing at the roof ridge. When eave vents are installed, baffling of the vent openings shall be provided so as to deflect the incoming air above the surface of the insulation. Where lighting fixtures are recessed into a suspended or exposed grid ceiling, the roof /ceiling assembly shall be insulated in a location other than directly on the suspended ceiling. Exception: Type IC rated recessed lighting fixtures. Where installed in wood framing, faced batt insulation shall be face stapled. 1311.3 Wall Insulation: Exterior wall cavities isolated during framing shall be fully insulated to the levels of the surrounding walls. When installed in wood framing, faced batt insulation shall be face stapled. Above grade exterior insulation shall be protected. 1311.4 Floor Insulation: Floor insulation shall be installed in a permanent manner in substantial contact with the surface being insulated. Insulation supports shall be installed so spacing is not more than twenty- four inches on center. Installed insulation shall not block the airflow through foundation vents. 1311.5 Slab -On -Grade Floor: Slab -on -grade insulation installed inside the foundation wall shall extend downward from the top of the slab a minimum distance of twenty-four Inches or to the top of the footing, whichever is less. Insulation installed outside the foundation shall extend downward a minimum of twenty-four inches or to the frostline, whichever is greater. Above grade insulation shall be protected. Exception: For monolithic slabs, the insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab to the bottom of the footing. 1311.6 Radiant Floors (on or below grade): Slab -on -grade insulation shall extend downward Fran the top of the slab a minimum distance of thirty -six inches or downward to the top of the footing and horizontal for an aggregate of not less than thirty -six inches. If required by the building official where soil conditions warrant such insulation, the entire area of a radiant floor shall be thermally isolated from the soil. Where a soil gas control system is provided below the radiant floor, which results in increased convective flow below the radiant floor, the radiant floor shall be thermally isolated from the sub floor gravel layer. 1312 Glazing and Doors 1312.1 Standard Procedure for Detemiination of Glazing and Door U- Factors: U- factors for glazing and doors shall be determined, certified and labeled in accordance with Standard RS -31 by a certified independent agency licensed by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Compliance shall be based on Model Size AA or BB. Product samples used for U -factor determinations shall be production line units or representative of units as purchased by the consumer or contractor. Unlabeled glazing and doors shall be assigned the default U- factor in Section 2006. 1312.2 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Shading Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), shall be determined, certified and labeled in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Standard by a certified, independent agency, licensed by the NFRC. Exception: Shading coefficients (SC) shall be an acceptable alternate for compliance with solar heat gain coefficient requirements. Shading coefficients for glazing shall be taken from Chapter 27 of Standard RS -27 or from the manufacturer's test data. 1313 Moisture Control 1313.1 Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarders shall be installed on the warm side (in winter) of insulation as required by this section. Exception: Vapor retarder installed with not rnore than 1/3 of the nominal R -value between it and the conditioned space. 1313.2 Roof /Ceiling Assemblies: Roof /ceiling assemblies where the ventilation space above the insulation is less than an average of twelve inches shall be provided with a vapor retarder. Roof /ceiling assemblies without a vented airspace, where neither the roof deck nor the roof structure are made of wood, shall provide a continuous vapor retarder with taped seams. Exception: Vapor retarders need not be provided where all of the insulation is installed between the roof membrane and the structural roof deck. 1313.3 Walls: Walls separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder. 1313.4 Floors: Floors separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder. 1313.5 Crawl Spaces: A ground cover of six mil (0.006 inch thick) black polyethylene or approved equal shall be laid over the ground within crawl spaces. The ground cover shall be overlapped twelve inches minimum at the joints and shall extend to the foundation wall. Exception: The ground cover may be omitted in crawl spaces if the crawl space has a concrete slab floor with a minimum thickness of three and one -half inches. 1314 Air Leakage 1314.1 Building Envelope: The requirements of this section shall apply to building elements separating conditioned from unconditioned spaces. Exterior joints around windows and door frames, openings between walls and foundation, between walls and roof and wall panels; openings at penetrations of utility services through walls, floors, and roofs; and all other openings in the building envelope shall be sealed, caulked, gasketed, or weatherstripped to limit air leakage. 1314.2 Glazing and Doors: Doors and operable glazing separating conditioned from unconditioned space shall be weatherstripped. Fixed windows shall be tight fitting with glass retained by stops with sealant or caulking all around. Exception: Openings that are required to be fire resistant. 1314.3 Building Assemblies Used as Ducts or Plenums: Building assemblies used as ducts a plenums shall be sealed, caulked, and gasketed to limit air leakage. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No, Capacityz Btu /h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficlency AC -1 Lennox LGA 150 139500 4000 Econ 235000 188000 80.000 AC -2 Lennox LGA 150 139500 4000 Econ 235000 188000 80.000 AC -3 Lonnox LGA 150 127000 3600 Econ 235000 188000 80.000 MAU Modinw 4RG 400 400000 6500 6500 400000 400000 100.000 Project Info Project Address Stanford's Restaurant Date 2/27/98 Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM For Building Dept. Use SEER or EER IPLV3 Applicant Name: Interface Engineering Applicant Address: 6542 SE Lake Road Applicant Phone: (503) 659 -6394 Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV3 Location AC -1 Lennox LGA 150 139500 4000 Econ 9.00 9.50 Roof AC -2 Lennox LGA 150 139500 4000 Econ 9.00 9.50 Roof AC -3 Lennox LGA 120 12700 3600 Econ 11 .00 11. BO Roof Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. CFM SW HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 1994 Washington Stale Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compli ce Form Juno, 1995 Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features, Compliance Option Simple System 0 Complex System 0 Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. 1 1f available. 2 As tested accord ng to Table 14.1, 14-2 or 14 -3. ' If equired. 4 COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. If Heating/Cooling or Cooling Only: 4 Constant vol? Q1 Air cooled? ./ Packaged sys? E <54,000 Btuh Split system? VEconomizer included? or 1900 cfm? If Heating Only: <5000 cfm? E <70% outside air? Mechanical Summa i (back) MECH-SUM Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. ( Sat 1-bating cfn n5'i no.. 1994 Was ' gton State Nonresidential Energy Code Compl',•ce Form , ,Heating/a:ng < 9/dem T ' di city Fefelence Sea 1421 z ' ,64,000 [Ruh\ or drr9,/ </?ir no yeso qolit en , v no Yes '1 ( Feference ..<54,000 Btuliss. Se 1423 ) ns or 1900 cfrrf?,1 . yes Y s licard em Pefecence Sea 1420 4 UB SA C l ex Tea Complex Systems Refer to MECH-COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance In determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. • RECEIVED CITY OF. TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 'PERMIT CENTER Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Nam& Model No.1 CFM SP 1 HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service EF -1 Cook CPV210 6000 Applicant Phone: 3.00 cv Roof EF -2 Cook 195R6B 3400 1.00 cv Roof EF -3 Cook 195V9511 4625 2.00 cv Roof EF -4 Cook 135R3B 1200 0.25 cv Roof EF -5 Cook 120V2B 600 0.17 cv Roof EF -6 Cook Little Gem 100 0.25 60 W CV Ceiling EF -7 Cook 100C20 600 0.38 0.17 CV Roof Project info Project Address Stanford's Restaurant Dale 2/27/98 Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM For Building Dept. Use SEER or EER IPLV3 Applicant Name: interface Engineering Applicant Address: 6542 SE Lake Road Applicant Phone: (503) 659 -6394 Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV3 Location AC -4 Lennox cCSi6 -60 -75 49400 1585 Econ 10.00 58000 Roof DH -1 DH -2 Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No) Capacity2 Btu /h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency" AC -4 Lennox GCS16 -60 -75 49400 1585 Econ 78000 58000 80.000 DH -1 DH -2 Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form June, 1995 Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features, Compliance Option Qi Simple System O Complex System O Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be Incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. 1 If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14 -1, 14 -2 or 14 -3. 3 If equired. " COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS). RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. If Heating/Cooling or Cooling Only: a Constant vol? 4 Air cooled? 4 Packaged sys? 4 <54,000 Btuh J Split system? E Economizer included? or 1900 cfm? If Heating Only: a <5000 cfm? a <70% outside air? ( Start j .Hmting/Ocoling Syqem Type • Cooling Only 1-bating OnlYy Nyes no cfnl? ' nay 1994 Was gton State Nonresidential Energy Code Comp, ce Form Mechanical Summa (back) MECH-SUM Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine If project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. 1 1 1421 1. .11nciudes1 nbl v r ,. <54,000 Stuh'. — • or 1900 drrf?,./ no ' Yes Yes y F a f c. 1423 ,54,000 Stull \ of 1900 cirri? no t>1 Sni FtfetEnce Sec 1420 Siderrf? - yes )0- 4 Um OccrpleThir ) Feference Sydem Sm 1430 Complex Systems Refer to MECH-COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance In determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Mechanical - Complex' Systems 1994 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms Checklist MECH -COMP Juno, 1995 Project Address Stanford's Restaurant Date 2/27/98 The following additional information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for a complex mechanical system for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code, Use the checklist as a reference for notes added to the mechanical drawings (see the MECH- CHK checklist for additional system requirements). This information must be on the plans since this is the official record of the permit. Having this information in separate specifications alone is NOT an acceptable alternative. For Building Department Use Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required location on Plans Building Department Notes ADDITIONAL CHECKLIST ITEMS FOR COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY a ' 1431.1 Field assem. sys. 'Provide calculations I I 1432 Controls yes 1432.1 Setback & shut -off Indicate separate systems or show isolation devices on plans Spec 1432.2 Temp. reset control yes 1432.2,1 Air systems Indicate automatic reset Spec n.a. 1432.2.2 Hydronic systems Indicate automatic reset yes 1433 Economizers Indicate economizer on equipment schedule or provide calculations to justify exemption spec n.a. 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans n.a. 1435 Simul. htg. & clg, Indicate that simultaneous heating and cooling is prohibited, unless use of exception is justified Other n.a. 1436 Heat recovery Indicate heat recovery on plans; complete and attach heat recovery calculations n.a. 1437 Elec. motor effic. MECH -MOT or Equip. Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency n.a. 1438 Variable flow sys. Indicate variable flow on fan and pump schedules 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form s circtea Tor any question, prow ae explanation: Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine how the requirements of the Complex Systems Option apply to the project. Refer to the indicated Code sections for more complete information on the requirements, Sullen 1432.2 I lot water alma Temperature Rese Controls Reggircd, / ,\ Yus /Capacity No Heating Syacm Cruller Than \\ 400,000 01 % \� No Seaton 1411.1 Equipment I'erf. Shall Meet Tables 1.4.1 through 14.1 Serllon 1431.1 1 i Fuld. Yes Calcul at Ions of i Assembled :. —► Total On.site Enerl Equipment7% Input & output No I , Required y S •, Yes Serving —s► Multiple i Zones / Seaton 1432.2.1, Supply Air Reset Controls Required (continued on back) RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR Q 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Mechanical - Complex. ' ystems (back) MECH -COMP 1994 Washington Slate Enorgy Codo Compliance Forms �j � l \ "` / Cooling j g N. Yes / Capacity > \ > Yes % Ileming& ',Electric H ew i ng `" 20,000 ' Cooling in one ,:� —; �. Ot i67 • N , Package? / /' ', 1r�21 \ No No Scctlon 14I 1,4' Must be (lent Pump f 1412,5 provide Micro! rocessor Ileat Pump Controls 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compli -.ce Form / Application Yes Involves — Variable nova?, No 1 Done (continued from front) Non - Electric Electric ,; Motor Efficiency No / ncludcd in Iiquipmen —►� Performance Rating? Yes 0 > 225,000' ., Yes Utah — - Capacity?/. No No Multi- speed \ No Motor in a >-n► Multi -speed // " System? / \ Section 1435 Pan Powered Terminal Units Required Ycs Section 1412.6 Modutnling or Staged Combustion Controls Required t i / • . /Supply Air >,‘,„ y 5000 CPM & \ '' Outside Air > / 70 %? / , i` ", ., j / / \ / \ Cooling ' Yes / Pnckagcd \ No . , -- .,,--• Cooling \ No Total Bldg � l �., No / Capacity > iii —< Rooftop ;.---11.-K Capacity > >'—►-( Capacity > i 54,000 Ultdt jam' \ Unit? /� \.,84,000 Utuhii • .. 240,000 Utuly N '\ No Yes ( Yes I Ycs Y Section 1433 Air-Side Economizer Required Svelton 1435 Smolt enema llenting& . Cooling I'rohibite PERMIT: DENTE Pans or pumps" Y > 10 Section 1436 so%. Effective Iieal Recovery Syslem Required Section 1438 Vnrinble Flow Devices Required Section 1437 Motors Most Mee Efficiencies in Table 14 -4 June, 1995 Mechanical Permit Pt Os Checklist 1994 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms MECH -CHK Juno, 1995 Project Address Stanford's Restaurant Date 2/27/98 The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424) 1411 Equipment performance .a. 1411.4 Pkg. elec. hlg.& clg. List heat pumps on schedule yes 1411.1 Minimum efficiency Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency Spec 1412 HVAC controls yes 1412.1 Temperature zones Indicate locations on plans spec yes 1412.2 Deadband control Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum spec . a . 1412.3 Humidity control indicate humidistat yes 1412.4 Automatic setback Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types spec yes 1412.4.1 Dampers Indicate damper location and automatic controls Spec . a. 1412.5 Heat pump control Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule . a. 1412.6 Combustion htg. Indicate modulating or staged control yes 1412.7 Balancing Indicate balancing features on plans Spec yes 1422 Thermostat interlock Indicate thermostat interlock on plans Spec yes 1423 Economizers Equipment schedule spec 1413 Air economizers yes 1413,1 Operation Indicate 100% capability on schedule Spec yes 1413.2 Control Indicate controls able to evaluate outside air Spec yes 1413,3 Integrated operation Indicate capability for partial cooling Spec 1414 Ducting systems yes 1414.1 Duct sealing Indicate sealing necessary Spec yes 1414.2 Duct insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on duct spec 1415.1 Piping insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping .a. 1424 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans yes Mech. Sum. Form Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer spec SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454) 1440 Service water htg. . a . 1441 Elec. water heater Indicate R -10 insulation under tank yes 1442 Shut -off controls Indicate automatic shut -off spec 1450 Heated pools .a. 1452 Pool water heaters Indicate not electric resistance . a. 1453 Pool heater controls Indicate switch and 65 degree control . a. 1454 Pool covers Indicate vapor retardant cover .a. 1454 Pools 90+ degrees Indicate R -12 pool cover 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form no " is circled for any ques provi exp CITYOF�TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 1994 Was 'sgton State Nonresidential Energy Code Comp''.. Form r Mechanical Permit PIS- s Checklist 1994 Washington Stale Energy Code Compliance Forms MECH -CHK June, 1995 Mechanical - General Requirements 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Doadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone Is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4 if in the proposed building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpolnt. 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off - hour controls. 1412.4,1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system Is off or upon power failure, Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open dampers. These dampers shall remain closed In normal operation until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which requ're continuous operation, 2. Combustion air Intakes. 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall Include microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set -up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall Indicate when supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g., LED indicators), 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion control, Exceptions: 1. Boilers. 2. Radiant Heaters. 1412,7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers, temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. 1413,2 Control: Air economizers shall be controlled by a control system capable of determining if outside air can meet part or all of the building's cooling loads. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Building Heating Energy:Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Controls shall not preclude the economizer operation when mechanical cooling is required simultaneously. Exception: Economizers on Individual, direct expansion, cooling systems with capacities not greater than 75,000 Btu/h may include controls that limit simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling for the purpose of preventing ice formation on cooling coils. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which Is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 Inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 1. Static pressure: 1/2 Inch to 2 Inches; seal transverse joints. 2. Static pressure: 2 Inches to 3 Inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Static pressure: above 3 Inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed as part of the building envelope shall meet the requirements of Chapter 13. Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14-5. Exceptions: 1. Within the HVAC equipment. 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. 3. Exposed ductwork within a space that serves that space only. 1416 Piping Systems 1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally Insulated in accordance with Table 14-6. Exception: Piping Installed within unitary HVAC equipment. Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -26) 1420 SIMPLE SYSTEMS (PACKAGED UNITARY EQUIPMENT) 1421 Systom Typo: To qualify as a simple system, systems shall be ono of the following: a. Air cooled, constant volume packaged equipment, which provide heating, cooling or both, and require only external connection to duct work and energy services. b. Air cooled, constant volume split systems, which provide heating, cooling or both, with cooling capacity of 54,000 Btu/h or less. c. Heating only systems which have a capacity of less than 5,000 cfm or which have a minimum outside alr supply of less than 70 percent of the total air circulation, All other systems shall comply with Sections 1430 through 1438, 1422 Controls: In addition to the control requirements in Section 1412, where separate heating and cooling equipment serve the same temperature zone, thermostats shall be Interlocked to prevent slmultaneous heating and cooling. 1423 Economizers: Economizers meeting the requirements of Section 1413 shall be Installed on packaged roof top fan - cooling units having a supply capacity of greater than 1,900 cfm or a total cooling capacity greater than 54,000 Btu/h. The total capacity of all units without economizers shall not exceed 240,000 Btu/h per building, 1424 Separate AIr Distribution Systems:Zones with special process temperature requirements and /or humidity requirements shall be served by separate air distribution systems from those serving zones requiring only comfort conditions. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Dear Sir: City of Tukwila Fire Department Fire Department Review Control #M98 -0043 (512) March 16, 1998 Re: Stanfords Restaurant - 17380 Southcenter Parkway The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. A sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate dry - chemical -type portable fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 40 -B shall be installed within 30 feet (9144 mm) of commercial food heat - processing equipment, as measured along an unobstructed path of travel. (UFC 1006.2.7) Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher ", with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC Standard 10 -1) 2. H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1742) H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air - moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main supply -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 City of Tukwila Fire Department instructions..' (UMC 608) Duct smoke detectors shall be capable of being reset from the alarm panel. (City Ordinance #1742) Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #1742) All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #1742) (UFC 1001.3) Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4407 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 3. All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 4. Required fire resistive construction, including occupancy separations, area separation walls, exterior walls due to location on property, fire resistive requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 701) This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) 57544139 Yours truly, cc: TFD file ncd The Tukwila Fire Preve ion Bureau John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone. (206) s75-4404 ' Fax: (206) s7s -44.34 AlluirrE(Ts VAN 4i Ma E141Vs,111)S ENTRANSMITTALOMEMO To: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Ph: (206) 431-3672 Fax: (206) 431-3665 A ttn: Kelcie Peterson (permit coordinator) Enclosed I am submitting the following construction documents for Mechanical plan review: ge43 ery Truly Yours, Completed permit application. Full blueline sets of construction documents. Full project manuals (specifications). Full sets of State of Washington Energy Calcs. Full sets of Structural Ca lcs. If you have any questions or need additional information please give me a call, Jeff W. Hammond Project Manager ARCHITECTS VAN LOM/EDWARDS AIA, P.C. By: Architects Van Loin Etlwards, Al A, PC 31 NW First, Soho 309 Portland, 011 97209 503.226.0590 fisx 503.273.8649 Date Re: Via: 3/5/98 Job No. 9742 Stanford's Restaurant & Bar Parkway Supercenter Tukwila, Washington Total Pages: pEqi Ms- pogo • .t* Wood-Fired Oven 44/ Co '` 9 499 Stone 4 0p4",,,./ii- v ir "u 9 _ Installation and Operation Manual Additional Copies AvailtellOpon Request sTONE-FIRED COOKING EQUIPMENT 530 West Front Street Sumas, WA 98295 Toll-Free 800-988-8103 Tel. 360468-8000 •Fx. 360-988-4302 ■ ;* INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR WOOD -FIRED OVENS READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING AND USING THIS APPLIANCE IF THIS OVEN IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED, A FIRE MAY RESULT. TO REDUCE RISK OF FIRE, FOLLOW THE INSTALLATION MANUAL PLEASE READ THIS ENTIRE MANUAL BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE OVEN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, BODILY INJURY OR EVEN DEATH A MAJOR CAUSE OF OVEN RELATED FIRES IS FAILURE TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED CLEARANCES (AIR SPACES) TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS. IT IS OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT THIS OVEN BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Contact local building or fire officials about restrictions and installation inspection in your area. The Wood Stone Mt. Chuckanut, Mt. Adams, Mt. Baker and Mt. Rainier model wood -fired ovens are (per U.L. Listing) approved for 1" clearance to combustibles on the sides and back of the unit. 1" clearance (side and back) must be maintained between the oven and any combustible building materials. 19" clearance is required between the top of the unit and any combustibles. WARNING: DO NOT PACK REQUIRED AIR SPACE WITH INSULATION OR OTHER MATERIALS. The oven is fully insulated at the factory and requires no additional insulation. Wood -Fired Oven Installn and Operation Manual Table of Contents UNLOADING AND MOVING THE OVEN INSTALLATION CLEARANCES INSTALLATION CLEARANCE FIGURES FACADE DETAILS MORE INSTALLATION DETAILS OVEN VENTING OVEN VENTING. (CONTINUED) DIGITAL THERMOMETER READOUT INSTALLATION MANTLE MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS OVEN START-UP INFORMATION DAILY OVEN OPERATION FUELWOOD FACTS STUCCO OVEN INSTALLATION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Questions? CaII us Toll Free 800 - 988 -8103 1 Model # Oven Approx. Weight Req'd Forklift 5,000 Ib. WS -MS -4 Mt. Chuckanut 2,200 lbs. WS -MS -5 Mt. Adams 3,300 lbs. 6,000 Ib. WS -MS -6 Mt. Baker 4,200 lbs. 6,000 Ib. WS -MS -7 Mt. Rainier 5,300 lbs. 9,000 Ib. 2 S t o 1'1 el Wood -Fired Oven InstallaticOnd Operation Manual Unloading and Moving a Wood Stone Oven LIFTING THE OVEN 1. USING A CRANE The oven arrives with four lifting eyes attached. When craning a Wood Stone oven, use a spreader bar with a two - legged sling rigged on each end. The spreader bar should be of a sufficient length to keep the sling from contacting the oven. NOTE: Once lifting eyes are no longer needed, remove the lifting eyes one at a time AND BE SURE TO REPLACE THE BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE OVEN TO THE STAND. 2. USING A FORKLIFT Be sure to use a forklift rated to lift more than the oven weighs. Fork length must be at least 6 feet, if not, fork extensions should be used. The oven stand is equipped with fork pockets just above the angle iron base. The oven is very top heavy so spread the forks as far apart as possible. USING A PALLET JACK TO MOVE A WOOD STONE OVEN Once the oven has been removed from the delivery vehicle, it can easily be moved on flat surfaces using a pallet jack. To lift the oven with a pallet jack, remove the front and rear angle iron stabilizers from the base of the oven stand and place two or three stout 4x4s through the fork pockets. THE OVEN IS VERY TOP - HEAVY, MOVING THE OVEN UP OR DOWN A RAMP ON A PALLET JACK IS NOT SAFE! Make fast (straps or chains should not be allowed to slip) LIFTING EYES DO NOT TURN THE OVEN ON ITS SIDE! Moving a Wood Stone oven can present interesting challenges to even the most experienced riggers. Take your time, use your head, secure the proper equipment and make safety your first priority. Please don't hesitate to call the factory for technical support (1 -800- 988 - 8103). DELIVERY NOTE: The customer will receive an Oven Shipping Notification when the oven leaves the Wood Stone factory. This will include a PRO# and a trucking company contact number. Wood Stone recommends that you confirm the delivery date /time with the trucking company before committing to heavy equipment and/or labor. Our goal is smooth and safe delivery. Thank you. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 - 988 -8103 IF THIS OVEN IS NOT PR FOLLOW THESE INSTAL IS FAILURE TO MAINT MATERIALS. IT IS OF ACCORDANCE WITH TH Contact your local buildin Please read this entire resu The Wood Stone over approved for 1" (one i combustibles on the s unit. Any combustibl installed around the o 1" air space between of the oven. (See installation diag page 4) An air space of 19" required between the combustibles. (See i and lb. on page 4) WARNING: DO NO AIR SPACE WITH OTHER MATERIAL insulated at the fac additional insulation. NOTICE: FOR STU NO.S ENDING IN ' (SIDES, TOP A COMBUSTIBLES IS Any facade above th must be constructe building materials. A 2" (two inch) clear the door opening fr be maintained. To se the facade and the ov wide strip of ceramic side of the oven door the surround facade combustible material tile, etc. Wood -Fired Oven Installanan and Operation Manual stone] Installation Clearances IF THIS OVEN IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED A FIRE MAY RESULT. TO REDUCE RISK OF FIRE, FOLLOW THESE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. A MAJOR CAUSE OF OVEN RELATED FIRES IS FAILURE TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED CLEARANCES (AIR SPACES) TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS. IT IS OF UTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT THIS OVEN BE INSTALLED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Contact your local building and fire officials about restrictions and installation inspection in your area. Please read this entire manual before you install the oven. Failure to follow instructions may result in property damage, bodily injury or even death. The Wood Stone ovens are (per UL listings) approved for 1" (one inch) clearance from combustibles on the sides and back of the unit. Any combustible facade or surround installed around the oven must maintain a 1" air space between it and the outer shell of the oven. (See installation diagrams 1 a and 1 b. on page 4) An air space of 19" (nineteen inches) is required between the top of the unit and any combustibles. (See installation diagram 1a and 1 b. on page 4) WARNING: DO NOT PACK REQUIRED AIR SPACE WITH INSULATION OR OTHER MATERIALS. The oven is fully insulated at the factory and requires no additional insulation. NOTICE: FOR STUCCO OVENS (MODEL NO.S ENDING IN 'S') 36" CLEARANCE (SIDES, TOP AND BACK) FROM COMBUSTIBLES IS REQUIRED! Any facade above the doorway of the oven must be constructed of non - combustible building materials. A 2" (two inch) clearance on either side of the door opening from combustibles must be maintained. To seal the opening between the facade and the oven, use a 3" (three inch) wide strip of ceramic fiber insulation on each side of the oven door between the oven and the surround facade, and cover with a non- combustible material such as metal, plaster, tile, etc. The facade directly above the doorway must be a non - combustible material such as metal, plaster, tile, etc. When utilizing a combustible material to construct the enclosure, all openings within 30" (thirty inches) of either side of the door opening, floor to ceiling, must be sealed to prevent the entry of sparks or embers. Wood -fired ovens must be installed on non - combustible floors or provided with a non - combustible floor covering at least 30" to each side of door opening and 36" in front of the door opening. (See installation diagram 1 c. on page 4) If the oven has a decorative shell, such as copper or stainless steel, it can not be enclosed by a facade but can be placed up to one inch from a combustible on the sides and back and nineteen inches from a combustible on the top. If the space between the legs of the stand is used for wood storage, it is recommended that it be a covered container or box to prevent the possibility of sparks or embers from making contact with the stored wood. An 8 -1/2" (eight and one -half inch) air space clearance is required between the bottom of the oven and any wood storage container. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Do not cover the listing label located on the front face of the oven directly below the door. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 - 988 -8103 3 4 Wood -Fired Oven InstallatiL . , and Operation Manual Stone Installation Clearances Figure 1 a. This side view illustrates minimum clearances to combustible construction. Also illustrated are the minimum clearances required for the installation of an NFPA 96 listed 26" MAXIMUM exhaust hood. OVER D00R Figure 1 b. This front view illustrates minimum clearances to combustible construction. Also illustrated are the minimum clearances required for the installation of an NFPA 96 listed exhaust hood. 1" AIR SPACE FACADE EXHAUST FLUE 3" CERAMIC FIBER INSULATION OPTIONAL MANTLE INSTALL ON A NON - COMBUSTIBLE FLOOR OR PROVIDE A NON- COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE 30' EACH SIDE OF DOOR OPENING AND 36" IN FRONT OF DOOR 8" MINIMUM OVERHANG MINIMUM 19" CLEARANCE TO OVERHEAD COMBUSTIBLES MINIMUM 1" AIR SPACE 1"1 MINIMUM 19' CLEARANCE TO OVERHEAD COMBUSTIBLES MINIMUM 1" AIR SPACE Figure 1 c. This top view illustrates minimum clearance to combustible construction as well as minimum non - combustible floor covering required if installing on a combus- tible floor. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 - 9884603 Wood Stone, wood -fired ov means that the surfaces of th been put in place, have bee and complies with NSF/AN ANSI Standard 4, it is only t Shaded areas shall n of facade. Any facade above an doorway must be c building materials. Wood -Fired Oven InstallE.n and Operation Manual Facade Details Wood Stone, wood -fired ovens carry an NSF /ANSI Standard 4 component listing. This means that the surfaces of the oven which are meant to be left exposed after the facade has been put in place, have been evaluated from the standpoint of sanitation and food safety and complies with NSF /ANSI Standard 4. To operate the oven in accordance with NSF/ ANSI Standard 4, it is only to be used for the cooking of pizza and bread products. V4 V Shaded areas shall not be exposed after installation of facade. Any facade above and/or within 2" to the side of the doorway must be constructed of non - combustible building materials. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 -988 -8103 ;, 6 If using an optional exhaust hood, a listed exhaust hood or one that is constructed in accordance with NFPA 96 is required to ven- tilate this oven. The dimensions and clear- ances of the hood from the oven are as fol- lows: Minimum side -hood- overhang to oven door is 2 -1/2" (See Figure 1b. on page 4) Maximum height of the front lower edge of the hood above the top of the oven door opening is 26" (See Figure 1 a. on page 4) Minimum front - hood - overhang to point of oven door opening is 8 ". (See Figure 1 a. on page 4) Minimum hood clearance from outside diameter of oven exhaust flue is 6 ". A minimum exhaust volume of 175 CFM per lineal foot of hood is required. Air flow rates were established under draft-free laboratory conditions. Greater exhaust airflow rates may be required for each specific installation to obtain complete vapor and smoke removal. Removal of creosote and soot As with all commercial cooking equipment exhaust systems, a regular inspection and cleaning schedule is needed to prevent the possibility of a hood or duct fire. The frequency of inspection and cleaning will depend on hours of use and type and quality of wood used as fuel. Only use hardwood species dried to a moisture content of 20% or less. See Wood Stone's Fuel Wood Facts Sheet. When wood is burned slowly, it produces tar and other organic vapors, which combine with expelled moisture to form creosote. The creosote vapors condense in the relatively cool oven flue of a slow- burning fire. As a result, creosote residue Wood -Fired Oven lnstallat'- and Operation Manual More Installation Details accumulates in the duct. When ignited, this creosote makes an extremely hot fire. The duct serving this oven should be inspected at least twice a month during the first two months of operation,. to establish rate of creosote buildup and necessary cleaning schedule. If creosote or soot has accumulated, it should be removed to reduce the risk of a flue fire. The interior floor and dome of the oven do not require creosote or soot removal. The oven flue and exhaust system will require inspection and cleaning. The exhaust sytem should be inspected and cleaned per the manufacturer's and or local code official's recommendations. Dispose of ash per the following: Place ashes into a metal container with a tight fitting lid. The closed container of ashes should be placed on a non - combustible floor or on the ground well away from all combustible materials, pending final disposal. They should be retained in the closed container until all the cinders have thoroughly cooled. Ashes can then be disposed of safely. Wood Stone's stainless steel ash shovel and, double compartment ash disposal system is a safe and convenient way to dispose of ash. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 - 988 -8103 The following are the ma It is never appropriate to Wood Stone oven. All d a grease duct. Exhaust with exhaust systems s 1. A Listed building heatin to the oven flue collar an exhaust. A single wall chim heating appliance chimney minimum of 0.044" stainless clearance to combustibles A static pressure of -0.1 flue gas temperatures do no pressure will depend on the 400 and 500 CFM). Wood Magnehelic Gauge so the i system. W Ex Oven Model Seri Mt. Chuckanut WS Mt. Adams WS- Mt. Baker WS Mt Rainier WS Sin (mi mil joi General Notes: 1. Install venting syst all local codes. 2. If a non - combustib 3. Install Part "D" with Q A #10 IPS-C2 IVSI -2" B 10IPS- OCB -C2 CB1 -10" C 10P -VB C82 -10" D P -TSU 10 -ISJ E #6 ceramic fiber blanket insulation (2 ") tight to top of oven. Wood Stone part #WS -CF -6 .... In Oven Model Series Flue Collar Mt. Chuckanut WS -MS -4 8 inch I.D. Mt. Adams WS -MS -5 10 inch I.D. Mt. Baker WS -MS -6 10 inch 1.D. Mt Rainier WS -MS -7 10 inch I.D. The following are the manufacturer's recommendations for venting Wood Stone ovens. It is never appropriate to use "B vent" in any part of an exhaust system connected to a Wood Stone oven. All ducting material must be manufactured to the specifications of a grease duct. Exhaust systems serving solid -fuel equipment MAY NOT be combined with exhaust systems serving other (non -solid -fuel) cooking equipment. 1. A Listed building heating appliance chimney, also listed as a grease duct connected directly to the oven flue collar and provided with a power ventilator listed for restaurant appliance exhaust. A single wall chimney /duct connector may be used to connect the oven to a listed building heating appliance chimney also listed as a grease duct. The chimney /duct connector should be a minimum of 0.044" stainless steel or 16 ga. mild steel (0.055 ") and must maintain a minimum of 18" clearance to combustibles. A static pressure of -0.1 inches water column is necessary at the oven flue collar to ensure that flue gas temperatures do not exceed 300 degrees Fahrenheit (The CFM required to attain this static pressure will depend on the configuration of your particular installation but will probably be between 400 and 500 CFM). Wood Stone provides a port in the flue collar of the oven for insertion of a Magnehelic Gauge so the installer can monitor the draft to ensure proper operation of the venting system. M I WGSV -012 WGSV -012 Exhaust Fan Exhaust Fan Non - combustible, fire -rated chase. Insulated chimney /grease duct. Maintain 18" minimum clearance to combustibles per NFPA 211. Single -wall chlmney /grease duct (min. 0.044" stainless steel or min. 0.055" mild steel recommended, all seams and joints 100% welded). / Top of NPT fitting / Oven Oven for draft gauge flue outlet Examples of two common duct manufacturers model numbers Selkirk AMPCO General Notes: 1. Install venting system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with all local codes. 2. If a non - combustible chase is used, it must be left open at the bottom to allow air flow. 3. Install Part "D" with a full perimeter weld to oven flue collar. S CO rel ----- Wood en Installation and Operation Manual t Oven Venting -Fired Oven Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 -988 -8103 Wood -Fired Oven Installatio]l�nd Operation Manual Stone] . Oven Venting (cont.) 2. A listed Exhaust Hood or one that is constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 96. 0 0 Wood Stone offers oven mounted, eyebrow -type hoods designed specifically for Wood Stone ovens. See specification sheet on ventilators for Wood Stone ovens. Manufactured by Gaylord Industries. 3. Exhaust from Wood Stone dual- temperature, gas -fired ovens (Model numbers ending with GG) can be vented using one of the previously mentioned methods OR can be combined with exhaust from other equipment, assuming the common duct meets the construction requirements listed in #1. IMPORTANT SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Solid -fuel exhaust contains creosote and other substances that accumu- late in ducting, creating a risk of fire. The rate of accumulation will vary with respect to flue gas temperature, wood type and moisture content. Frequent, regularly scheduled, thorough flue cleaning is the best way to minimize the risk of flue fires. It is never appropriate to use "B vent" in any part of an exhaust system connected to a Wood Stone oven. All ducting material must be manufactured to the specifications of a Listed grease duct. Exhaust systems serving solid -fuel equipment MAY NOT be combined with exhaust systems serving other (non - solid -fuel) equipment. VERY IMPORTANT! WOOD STONE RECOMMENDS THAT YOU SUBMIT VENTING PLANS TO LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION. 8 Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 -988 -8103 Stone Location of digital read Wood Stone does not s connection is to be sup To make the e Remove the four screws hol back the faceplate. A 120 in the back of the stainless is the readout and a 120V/1 transformer black and the i incomming power supply us NOTES: -Be sure that the face plate is replaced right- side -up. -There is no need to disconnect the conduit when relocating the digital readout. -The mounting brackets for the stainless steel digital readout enclosure can be removed and remounte to accomodate the needs of various installations. -Take care not to pull on th conduit or thermocouple wires. Stone Wood -Fired Oven Installation and Operation Manual Digital Temperature Readout • Location of digital readout NOTES: -Be sure that the face plate is replaced right- side -up. -There is no need to disconnect the conduit when relocating the digital readout. -The mounting brackets for the stainless steel digital readout enclosure can be removed and remounted to accomodate the needs of various installations. -Take care not to pull on the conduit or thermocouple wires. The Type 'K' thermocouple is already factory mounted in the ceramic floor of the oven. The thermocouple cable runs through flexible conduit and is factory connected to the thermometer readout which is mounted to the stand of the oven. Extra conduit is provided to allow the thermometer box to be mounted to the oven facade instead of to the oven if so desired. IMPORTANT NOTE: If enclosing the oven in a facade, you must leave an access panel in the event of thermocouple failure. Wood Stone's oven mounted wood box has an access panel built in. Questions? Call 1- 800 - 988 -8103 Wood Stone does not supply an electrical power cord. The power cord or direct connection is to be supplied by others and connected by a licensed electrician. To make the electrical connection to the thermometer readout: Remove the four screws holding the stainless steel faceplate to the readout box and gently pull back the faceplate. A 120 VAC line should be professionally installed through the vacant hole in the back of the stainless steel readout enclosure. Attached to the backside of the faceplate, is the readout and a 120V/12V step down transformer. Connect the incoming black wire to the transformer black and the incomming white wire to the transformer white wire. Ground the incomming power supply using the green screw on the rear inner wall of the stainless enclosure. Thermocouple wires (factory installed) Incoming 120VAC line attaches here. Ground to the green screw in the rear inside wall of the stainless steel enclosure. 120V/12V Step down transformer Digital Readout Questions? CaII us Toll Free 800 - 988 - 8103 9 VERY IMPORTANT, THE TOP SURFACE OF THE MANTLE SHOULD BE FLUSH WITH THE FLOOR OF THE OVEN!! MANTLE SS CARRIAGE BOLTS Figure 3b. This figure shows the mounting of a granite slab on a mild steel mantle bracket. The space between the mounted mantle and the oven floor is to be filled with high temperature grout (provided). Note: Grout is heat setting, apply heat lamp or work Tamp overnight to insure proper hardened strength. Wood -Fired Oven Installation and Operation Manual Mantle Mounting Instructions SS SELF - DRIWNG SCREWS Figure 3a. This figure illustrates the mounting of a stainless steel mantle or a bracket for a granite mantle. When mounting a bracket for granite, leave enough space that the top of the granite will be flush with the floor. The space be- tween the mounted mantle and the oven floor is to be filled with high tem- perature grout (provided). Work the grout down into the space with a putty knife, then lay another bead of grout and smooth so it is flush with the mantle and the floor. 10 Questions? CaII us Toll Fero 8004884103 APPLY ADHESIVE HERE STONE MANTLE THIS OVEN HAS BEEN NECESSARY TO AVOID WHICH CAN CAUSE EX DAY ONE 1. Build a small kindli on the floor of the fire in the center o at the center of the the fire is placed o (2" to 3" in diamete fire period the ove maximum of 250 d 2. At the end of the fi install the d DAY TWO Stone REA 1. Rekindle fire and c average cooking t cooking and practi for you. During the first few dripping from the o NOTE: If at anytime the period of time (tw repeated to avoid t excessive crackin NOTE: Small "crazing cooling. They oven. If cracks for evaluation. Quest Wood -Fired Oven Installation and Operation Manual Oven Start -u • Instructions THIS OVEN HAS BEEN FACTORY-CURED, HOWEVER SLOW WARMING IS STILL NECESSARY TO AVOID THERMAL SHOCKING OF THE REFRACTORY STONE, WHICH CAN CAUSE EXCESSIVE CRACKING. DAY ONE READ BEFORE BUILDING FIRST FIRE 1. Build a small kindling fire of newspaper and ruler sized pieces of wood directly on the floor of the oven against the side or back of the dome. Do not build the fire in the center of the oven. The temperature sensor (thermocouple) is located at the center of the floor one inch under the surface and will give false readings if the fire is placed on top of it. As the fire gets established, increase size of wood (2" to 3" in diameter) and maintain constantly for 7 to 9 hours. During this first fire period the oven should raise no more than 50 degrees F. per hour until a maximum of 250 degrees F is reached. 2. At the end of the first day, put a fireplace sized piece of wood on the fire and install the doors to retain the heat for the night. DAY TWO 1. Rekindle fire and continue to raise temperature 100 degrees per hour to an average cooking temperature of 500 degrees F. At this point you can start cooking and practicing with your product to determine what temperature is best for you. NOTE: NOTE: During the first few days of operation, small amounts of water may appear dripping from the oven. This is normal and will stop within a few days. If at anytime the oven is allowed to cool to room temperature for an extended period of time (two weeks or more) this heat -up procedure will need to be repeated to avoid thermal shocking of the refractory stone which can cause excessive cracking. Small "crazing" cracks will occur with normal heating and cooling. They will not effect the performance or durability of the oven. If cracks of 1/32" or more develop, contact Wood Stone for evaluation. Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 -988 -8103 11 Species Alder Apple H Ash Beech Birch (White) Cherry Elm Hickory V Ironwood V Locust (Black) Madrone Maple (Red) Maple (Sugar) Mesquite V Oak (Live) Oak (Red) Oak (White) Pecan Walnut • i Wood -Fired Oven Installatio and Operation Manual' Daily Oven Operation_ THE FIRE Use only, seasoned hardwoods with a moisture content of'20% or less. Use of soft woods, such as pine, cedar, hemlock etc., and wet or 'green' wood, will cause a build -up of residue throughout the exhaust system. (See Wood Stone's Fuel Wood Facts, or consult factory for information on what types of wood can be used for oven fuel.). The fire should be ignited a couple of hours before the oven needs to be at cooking temperature, and can be located practically anywhere in the oven. Once the oven is being used daily, the fire can be ignited using still glowing coals from the previous day's fire. The oven is heated more evenly and effectively by the fire positioned on the side rather than in the rear of the oven. Adding about 25 pounds of wood per-hour should bring the oven temperature up about 100 degrees per_ hour. (this will vary slightly de- pending on the type and moisture content of the wood and the size of the oven). The floor temperature is indicated by the digital thermometer and should not exceed 650 degrees. Once the desired temperature is reached, maintain it by addition of wood as needed. Don't fling wood against back or side walls of oven. At the end of the work day, put removable stainless steel door(s) into door opening to hold heat in the oven overnight. Do not over -fire this. oven. If flames are spilling:out.of the door opening, or if oven floor temperature exceeds 650 degrees F., you are over - firing the oven. At the start of the following work day, push glowing coals out of the ash pile with 8" utility peel. Remove ash with ash shovel, leaving live coals to start the day's fire. Place ashes into metal container with a tight - fitting lid. The closed container of ashes should be placed on a non - combustible floor or on the ground, a safe distance from all combustible materials pending final disposal. They should be retained in the closed container until all cinders have thoroughly cooled. Check with your dealer about Wood Stone's Ash Dolly. CAUTION: Never use gasoline, gasoline -type lantern fuel, kerosene, charcoal lighter fluid, or similar liquids to start or freshen a fire in this oven. Keep all such liquids away from the oven while it is in use. CARE AND CLEANING OVEN FLOOR- As needed, brush food particles and stray fire debris from the oven floor using a long- handled floor brush. If something spills on the floor of the oven, wait for it to burn and /or dry up and then clean the residue off with the floor brush. This process can be sped up by moving a small portion of coals onto the spill causing it to bake off quickly. For removal of fine particles (burned flour or ash), wrap a warm, damp cloth around the brush head and use it to briskly wipe the floor. Do not scrape the oven floor with metal tools having sharp edges or corners!! STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES- The oven tools, the mantle, the night doors and the oven doorway should be cleaned, as needed, using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive metal scouring pads as they will scratch the stainless steel. Avoid the use of excess water when cleaning the face of the digital readout or oven controller. DUCT- As with all commercial cooking equipment, regular cleaning and maintenance of exhaust system is necessary to prevent the possibility of a hood and/or duct fire. The frequency of inspection and cleaning will depend upon hours of use and type and moisture content of the wood used for fuel. AVOID FLUE FIRES; BURN GOOD QUALITY WOOD AND ESTABLISH A REGULAR CLEANING SCHEDULE !! 12 Questions? CaII us Toll Free 800 - 988 -8103 Stone What type of wood sho this question depends on sever various fuelwood species and types. There are a wide variety wood has different characterist types of wood. Wood from coni teristics (low weight, low -med h Whichever type of woo Properly seasoned wood cont it should not be accepted for u environment that allows good Do not use pressed men Wet wood is the most cooking equipment Wo water when you thou Questi Species Heat Pounds per Cord Ease of Lighting Coaling Qualities Sparks Fragrance Alder Med -Low 2540 Fair Good Moderate Slight Apple High -Med 4400 Difficult Excellent Few Excellent Ash High 3440 Fairly diff. Good -Exc. Few Slight Beech High 3760 Difficult Excellent Few Good Birch (White) Med 3040 Easy Good Moderate Slight Cherry Med 2060 Difficult Excellent Few Excellent Elm High 2260 Very diff. Good Very Few Fair Hickory Very High 4240 Fairly diff. Excellent Moderate Excellent Ironwood Very High 4000 Very dill. Excellent Few Slight Locust (Black) Very High 3840 Difficult Excellent Very Few Slight Madrone High 4320 Difficult Excellent Very few Slight Maple (Red) High -Med 3200 Fairly diff. Excellent Few Good Maple (Sugar) High 3680 Difficult Excellent Few Good Mesquite Very High _ Very diff. Excellent Few Excellent Oak (Live) Very High 4600 Very dill. Excellent Few Fair Oak (Red) High 3680 Difficult Excellent Few Fair Oak (White) Very High 4200 Difficult Excellent Few Fair Pecan High Fairly diff. Good Few Good Walnut High -Med Fairly diff. Good Few Fair f Wood -Fired Oven Installation and Operation Manual Fuelwood Facts What type of wood should you use to fire your solid -fuel cooking equipment? The answer to this question depends on several considerations; geographical location, availability and relative cost of various fuelwood species and individual preferences regarding the flavor qualities of various wood types. There are a wide variety of good fuelwood species in all geographic locations. Each species of wood has different characteristics, the table below should help weigh the pros and cons of various types of wood. Wood from conifers (pine trees) is not recommended due to its poor fuelwood charac- teristics (low weight, low -med heat, poor coaling, high sparking and high residual creosote). Whichever type of wood you use, the most important consideration is the moisture content. Properly seasoned wood contains 20% moisture or less. If wood contains more than 20% moisture, it should not be accepted for use. Wood should be stored off the ground and out of the rain in an environment that allows good air circulation so that the drying process can continue. Do not use pressed wood products in Wood Stone foodservice equip- ment, they may damage the ceramics. Wet wood is the most common operational difficulty associated with wood -fired cooking equipment. Wood Stone's moisture meter can prevent you from paying for water when you thought you were paying for wood (see optional accessories). Questions? Call us Toll Free 800 -988 -8103 13 1 Wood-Fired Oven Installation and Operation Manual Stucco Finish Installation INSTALLING THE WOOD STONE "S" MODEL STUCCO FINISHED WOOD FIRE OVEN 1. Once the oven has been set in place, cover wire mesh with no less than 1" (one inch) of stucco. 2. Maintain a minimum 36" (thirty-six inch) clearance from top and sides of oven to all combustible surfaces. Front View NOT TO SCALE Side View NOT TO SCALE TRADITIONAL STUCCO MIX 1 part masonry cement 1 part regular cement 5 parts sand STUCCO PREMIX IS PROBABLY AVAILABLE AT YOUR LOCAL LUMBER YARD OR BUILDING SUPPLY 1 part premix 2 parts sand 14 Questions? Call us Toll Free 800-988-8103 RESTA URANT BAR PARKWAY SUPERCENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON RESTAURANT PAD, PARCEL 'A' PARCEL NUMBER 262304-9079 02-28-98 PROJECT PROJECT NO. 9 AROUTECIS \ 0 , I , IN I I A\ \ By 341'firTkattyras,1 ' " Ittrisial,011172CO • • 4.2thwtt.:nd thczt tho Plan Check , approvals are . sub;.n't to cm. and omissions and approval of piano doos not authorize the violation Of any ad code or ordinan004 pt of contractor's copy of approved plans RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA . ' • • .• MAR 06 1998 • • . •• • •-• , • • „ „ „ • „ • REFiNlIT CENTER .„. DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01014 Owner Furnished Items 01030 Field Engineering 01050 Coordination and Contractors Requirements 01051 Project Manual 01052 Additional Architectural Services 01070 Cutting and Patching 01085 Applicable Codes, Standards and Abbreviations 01091 Definitions 01180 Changes to the Construction 01300 Submittals 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01630 Material & Equipment Storage and Protection 01640 Product Options & Substitutions 01700 Project Closeout DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02010 Soils Investigation 02200 Excavating, Grading, and Filling 02510 Asphalt Paving 02750 Irrigation System 02800 Landscaping DIVISION 3 CONCRETE - TABLE OP CONTENTS Cover Page Table of Contents General Conditions Supplemental Conditions 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03345 Concrete Finishing CITY OFETUKWILA MAR 0.6 1998 PERMIT CENTER DIVISION 5 METALS DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04252 Mechanically Attached Masonry Veneer 05120 Structural Steel 05400 Light Gauge Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06020 Prefabricated Wood and Metal Joists 06030 Glue Laminated Beams 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06410 Custom Cabinetwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07175 Dampproofing 07190 Vapor Barriers /Retardants 07210 Building Insulation 07240 Exterior Insulation and Wall Finish System 07460 Wood Siding 07510 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07920 Sealants and Caulking DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08200 Wood Doors 08300 Access Doors 08600 Wood Windows 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing CITY OFE UKwliA MAR p 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard 09310 Ceramic Tile 09330 Quarry Tile 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09680 Carpeting 09900 Painting 09970 Prefinished Panels DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers & Vents 10521 Portable Fire Extinguishers 10530 Exterior Fabric Canopies 10800 Toilet, Bath and Miscellaneous Accessories 10900 Miscellaneous DIVISION 11 NOT USED DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12600 Furniture DIVISION 13 NOT USED DIVISION 14 NOT USED DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15250 Insulation 15300 Fire Protection 15350 Natural Gas Piping Systems 15400 Plumbing 15650 HVAC 15950 Controls 15990 System Balancing DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 16400 Service and Distribution 16500 Lighting 16721 Fire Alarm System 16740 Telephone System General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201 - 1997 1997 Edition - Electronic Format This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 01997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. TABLE OF ARTICLES I. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 3. CONTRACTOR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA DOCUMENT A201•GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N,W„ WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic F9mnat A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires o14rIThi AS4 age #1 LA MAR 6 7998 INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 4.2.3, 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.18, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9,5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4,2, 13.7, 14.1 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11 Additional Costs, Claims for 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3,6, 6.1.1, 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Time, Claims for 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 8.3.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9,5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13, 4.5.1 Allowances 3.8 All -risk Insurance 11.4.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9,4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12, 4.2.7, 9,3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Arbitration 4.3.3, 4.4, 4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4,6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1, 11.4.9, 11.4.10 Architect 4.1 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2, 4.3.6, 4,4, 5.2, 6,3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8,3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5,2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2,1.1, 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4,1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4,2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4. 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9,6.4, 9.6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2,4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4, 9.4, 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.6 Architect's Decisions 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2,13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect's Inspections 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Instructions 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2,7, 4.2.8, 7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2,11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 Architect's Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3,2.3, 3,3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3,12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8,3.1, 9,2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3. 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.4.7 Architect's Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2,9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9,9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys' Fees 3,18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6,1,1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11,5.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11.4.2 Bonds, Lien 9..10.2 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7,3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10,3, 11,4.9, 11.5 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #2 AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. C 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 7.ertificates for Payment 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1. 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 9,10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2,4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3,12,8, 4.2.8, 4.3,4, 4.3.9, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.4.1,2, 11.4.4, 11.4, 9, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Claim, Definition of 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes 3,23, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1,1, 6.3, 7.3.8, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.6.5 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3,6, 6.1.1, 7,3.8, 10,3,2 Claims for Additional Time 3,2,3, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 6,1.1, 8,3.2, 10.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1,1, 8.3,3, 9,5,1, 9.6.7, 10,3,3, 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Claims Subject to Arbitration 4.4,1, 4.5.1, 4.6.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10,1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11,1, 11.4.1, 11,4.6, 11.5.1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4,2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9,10, 12.2, 13,7, 14.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6.4, 4.6.6, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1,1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3,14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3,12.8, 4,2.8, 4.3,9, 7.1, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3,12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 4.3.3 Contract, Definition of 1,1,2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 11.4,9, Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11,4.6, 11.5.1 Contract Documents, The 1.1, 1.2 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.6, 2.2,5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1,1 Contract Sum 3.8, 4,3.4. 4.3.5, 4,4.5. 5.2.3, 7,2, 7.3, 7.4, 9,1, 9.4.2. 9.5,1.4, 9,6.7, 9.7, 10,3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14,3.2 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4,5, 5.2,3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10,3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Form A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10)0141∎0! ge #3 Al? M 0 ����ccWWli a, 6 1998 3.1, 6.1.2 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 7.3.3.3, 7,3.6, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 11.4, 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 12.1, 12.2.1. 12.2.4, 13.5. 14 Contractor's Employees Cutting and Patching 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2,5, 3.14 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors Contractor's Liability Insurance 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 11.4, 11.1 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Damage to the Work Owner's Forces 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10,6, 11.4, 12.2.4 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 11.4.7, 11.4.8 Damages for Delay Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 8.1.2 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2,2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, .5, 9.7, 9.8, Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.9, 10.2,6, 10.3, 11,3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3 Contractor's Representations Day, Definition of 1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8,2.1, 9,3.3, 9.8.2 8.1.4 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Decisions of the Architect 3.3.2,3.18,4,2.3,4 .3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6,2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 4.2.6, 4.2.7. 4.2.11. 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4,1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 4.5, 6.3, 7.3,6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7,3 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.7 9.4.1, 9.5, 9,7. 14.1.1.3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and 4.3.10, 14.1 Correction of Contractor's Submittals 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9,5.1, 9.5,2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9,10.3, 11.1,3, 11.5,2 Defective Work, Definition of Contractor's Superintendent 3.5,1 3.9, 10.2.6 Definitions Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12,1, 3.12.2, 3.12,3, 4,1.1, 4,3.1, 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4,2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7,2,1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9,8.1 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 Delays and Extensions of Time Contractual Liability Insurance 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4,5, 5.2,3, 7.2,1, 7.3,1, 7,4.1, 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11,3 7.5.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6,1, 14.3.2 Coordination and Correlation Disputes 1.2, 1.5.2, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 4.1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.3, 7,3.8 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Documents and Samples at the Site 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.11 3.11 Copyrights Drawings, Definition of 1.6, 3.17 1.1.5 Correction of Work Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 2,3, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 1.1.1, 1.3, 2.2.5, 3.11, 5.3 13.7.1.3 Effective Date of Insurance Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 8.2.2, 11.1.2 1.2 Emergencies Cost, Definition of 4.3.5, 10.6, 14.1.1.2 7.3.6 Employees, Contractor's Costs 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8,1, 3.9, 3.18,2, 4.2.3, 4.2,6, 10,2, 10.3, MA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #4 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10,2.4, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7, 3.10, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 Extensions of Time 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Failure of Payment 4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, 12,3.1, 13,7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Identification of Contract Documents 1.5.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9,10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4,1.2. 11.4.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3,12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13,5,1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.3.8, 10,2, 10,6 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4,2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9,8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3,8.1, 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12, 8.2.2, 13.5,2 Insurance 3.18.1, 6,1.1, 7.3.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9,1, 9.10,2, 9.10,5, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11.4.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11.4.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Project Management Protective Liability 11.3 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.4 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 Insurance Companies, Settlement with 11.4.10 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1. 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7,4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required 4.6.4 Judgment on Final Award 4.6.6 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1,3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8,3, 3.12, 3.13, 3,15.1, 42.6, 4.2.7, 5.2,1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9,3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3,13, 4.1,1, 4,4.8, 4,6, 9.6,4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13,5,1, 13.5,2, 13.6, 14 Liens 2,1.2, 4,4.8, 8,2.2, 9.3.3, 9.10 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.6.4 Limitations, Statutes of 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Limitations of Liability 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7,3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4,2,7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 10,2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration us noted below. Electronic Form A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 104m #5 MAR ILA 1998 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 Loss of Use Insurance 11.4.3 Material Suppliers 1.6, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10,5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5,1,3, 9.10.2,10.2.1.,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic's Lien 4.4.8 Mediation 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8, 4.5, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.6, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1,1.1, 1.1,2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1,2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3. 7, 8.3.1. 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Notice 2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3,2.3, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 17.4, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1,3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 Notice, Written 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5,2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5,2 Notice to Proceed 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Observations, Contractor's 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 4.3.4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6. 9.8, 11.4.1.5 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.4J- 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, .12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.1.4, 6,2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 Owner's Authority 1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4,2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8,3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.9,1, 9.10.2, 10,3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4 Owner's Financial Capability 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 11.4.3 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1,1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2,2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14,2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.2.1, 3.11,1, 3,17.1, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.4.1.5 Patching, Cutting and 3,14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 9.10,3, 9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CON'T'RACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDI'T'ION - AIA - COPYRIO1 1997. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the A1A and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201 -1997 ' User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #6 C Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2,4 'ayment, Failure of 43.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11,1.2, 11.1.3, 11,4.1, 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Payments, Progress 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 11.4.8, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Permits, Fees and Notices 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 4.3.3, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1,4 Progress Payments 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8,5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the 1.1.4 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance 11.3 Project Manual, Definition of the 1.1.7 Project Manuals 2.2.5 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11,4 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4,6, 9.6,4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Rejection of Work 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.10,2 Representations 1.5,2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10,3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7, 6.1,3 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4,2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3,12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8,3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 4.6.2 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.6 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7. 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Samples. Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1,3 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3,14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3,1, 11.4,7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2,1 MA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - MA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10(7.�198SEr a #7 OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 Site Inspections 4.4.7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2 1.2.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4,2, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.10.1. 13.5 Surety, Consent of Site Visits, Architect's 9.10.2, 9,10.3 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9,10.1, 13.5 Surveys Special Inspections and Testing 2.2.3 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Specifications, Definition of the 14.4 1.1.6 Suspension of the Work Specifications, The 5.4,2, 14.3 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17 Suspension or Termination of the Contract Statute of Limitations 4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Taxes Stopping the Work 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4 2.3, 4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Termination by the Contractor Stored Materials 4.3.10, 14.1 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1,4 Termination by the Owner for Cause Subcontractor, Definition of 4.3.10, 5,4.1.1, 14.2 5.1.1 Termination of the Architect SUBCONTRACTORS 4.1.3 5 Termination of the Contractor Subcontractors, Work by 14.2.2 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Subcontractual Relations 14 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1, Tests and Inspections 14.2.1, 14.3.2 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2,6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10,1, Submittals 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 1.6, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, TIME 9.9,1, 9.10,2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 8 Subrogation, Waivers of Time, Delays and Extensions of 6.1.1, 11,4.5, 11.4,7 3.2.3, 4.3,1, 4.3,4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7,4,1 Substantial Completion 7.5.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10,3.2, 10.6,1, 14,3.2 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9,4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, Time Limits 12.2, 13.7 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3,11, 3.12,5, 3.15.1, 4.2, Substantial Completion, Definition of 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.8.1 9.3.1, 9.3.3 , 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, Substitution of Subcontractors 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Time Limits on Claims Substitution of Architect 4.3.2, 4.3.4. 4.3,8, 4,4. 4.5, 4.6 4.1.3 Title to Work Substitutions of Materials 9.3.2, 9.3.3 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3,7 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Sub - subcontractor, Definition of 12 5.1.2 Uncovering of Work Subsurface Conditions 12.1 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.,3.9, 7.3.3,2 3.9, 10.2.6 Use of Documents Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1,6, 2,2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, Use of Site 7.1.3, 7.3,6, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Surety Values, Schedule of Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #8 AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NE1V YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates 1/11 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the A1A and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 4.3.10, 9.10,5, 11.4.7, 13.4,2 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4 Waiver of Consequential Damages 4.3.10, 14.2.4 Waiver of Liens 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 Warranty 3.5, 4,2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Weather Delays 4.3.7.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11,4.1, 13,2, 13.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1,3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8,2.2, 9,7, 9.10, 10,2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12,2.4, 13.3, 14 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1997 EDITION • AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292, WARNING: Unlicensed : photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, • Electronic Font 1 -1997 t�/7 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 1 9 MAR 061996 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions c the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements) . 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections. details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements. sample forms. Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. AIA DOCUMENT A20I•GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AMA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U °. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho4, violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #10 1.3 CAPITALIZATION 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents. including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants arc Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings; Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. AlA DOCUMENT A201. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AlA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W,, WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduce with out violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7 �- Page #11 CITY OF TUKWILq MAR 0 6 1998 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After suer' . evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to thtid Contractor. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3, 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven -day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three -day period. If the Contractor within such three -day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure, Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. It' payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERIC i INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 'lima document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho • violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #12 C 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2,3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect. but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3,2.1 and 3.2,2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques. sequences or procedures may not be safe. the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques. sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201 -1997 � User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1gg a #13 CITY OF TUKWIj MAR 0 6 1998 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persoies. carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids arc received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful order T of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U s copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced with violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #14 allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11,1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents, Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION • AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic ' �; - 9 7 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998, AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- 'ag 5 MAR061998 PERMIT CENTER Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the ,respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services irvf? violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, material;;, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A201.GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TILE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.glik copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced withot. violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #16 C Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However. if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner. Architect. Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim. damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner. Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be .AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION . 1997 EDITION - AIA- COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W,, WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with percussion of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Fo t -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 1 i ' ' 17 MAR 0 6 1998 unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one -year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's verations (I) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion o.' the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in ;eneral if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance wi:h the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.1. 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized. the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate witl�r,. each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5,2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner. Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION • MA . COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates l '.'� copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the MA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #18 C unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect. of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. if no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the forth of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDi'I'IONS OF Ti IE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA . COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN `NSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., N'AS1-iINGTON, Q.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with percussion of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic For ,(4 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10 - 169 MAR 0 6 1998 conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitabl... adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustme._ -� shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given, The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. ,. . 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation. and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998, AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #20 AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. r copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4,3.10. 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period AlA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. 'copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201,CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on_ #21 MAR 0 6 1998 of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable arm settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARBITRATION 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall he made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6,1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving at t additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entit:;;, not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub- subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub - subcontractor. AIA DOCUMENT A201•GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGiON. D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AM and can be reproduced witholk violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #22 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor. by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS MA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - MA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Form 4201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 1e!49 -r g #23 MAR a 6 1998 pro..._ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner'"' the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner - Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor( completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then— reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERIC INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U r' copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #24 Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order, 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TI IE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK: AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of' the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. ElectronicoriAt�,dk201 -1997 Th1 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 1 9A$ e #25 MA C' D r, � c� pea..._ 1998 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as th— Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in th;, ,, Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: . 1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance; . 2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; . 3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect, When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjuFn the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim is accordance with Article 4. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work, 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF T11E CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. r ;, copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution, This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #26 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments. is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment. the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION . 1997 EDITION - MA. COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Forwat 43.9I-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 10 /7 /l '.O_,0aF 7 p�A a 6 � 99R 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipmet,., . delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, tc.q. correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by th. Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2, because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AlA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho, violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #28 C to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub - subcontractors in a similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if' practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law, 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL. CONDITIONS 01: 'DIE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, U.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission ot'the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic For � at A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 1g/ - ;4 : <b�p6ge #29 MAR n °kW /LA P&p.. 1 998 of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut - down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION "^ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof t3'� sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat. utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that* is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION . 1997 EDITION . AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced withou violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #30 Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: MA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N, W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. • copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic ormat A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires ogirnyittike Page #31 R n 6 1998 pa,,. . 1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; . 2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards. promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub- subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect, 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut -down, delay and start -up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982. which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #32 MA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION • AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERIC INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced withou violation until the date of expiration as noted below. C 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, Ioss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or Ioss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7, ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; . 3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; . 4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TIIE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with pennission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic ForW A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on l rtl it a #33 MAR n 7 zi w 4 998 claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work : — These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages affordet:._.. under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph 11.1. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all- risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles, Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all- risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAI` INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, U.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced withot: violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #34 notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such, waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AlA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. A1A License Number 100982, which expires on 100/ i gage #35 MqR T`' kw�� 6 199,9 Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9,1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AlA . COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U., copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #36 found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one -year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. 12.2.2.2 The one -year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3 The one -year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one -year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected %%tether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves. their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. .AIA DOCUMENT A201.GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION . 1997 EDITION . AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Fon t A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on IOPITI�Fi e #37 /1 0 444114 6 19,9,9 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids arc received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.53, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing. inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, b,? secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures.to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TI ll: CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced witho violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #38 Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents: or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less. 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; AlA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/17 F o e #39 An— U NOD .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; ; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1. the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION • AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U t copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced withu violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AIA License Number 100982, which expires on 10/7/1998 -- Page #40 all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. C • AlA DOCUMENT A201.GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1997 EDITION • AIA- .COPYRIGHT 1997 -THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the•AIA and can be reproduced without . violation until the date of expiration as noted below. ElectroniFo: :t A201 -1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/27/1998. AlA License Number 100982, which expires on I15rn ; ` ; fr #41 i a bk wr� The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. ' ARTICLE 2 - OWNER SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER A. In the second line of Subparagraph 2.2.3, change to read as follows: 1. "responsibility of the Contractor under Section 01010 of the Contract Documents, ..." B. Add to the end of 2.2.3 the following: 1. "The owner shall obtain and pay for the general building permit under Section 01010 of the Contract Documents." B. Delete 2.2.5 entirely and replace it with: 1. "The Contractor will be furnished free of charge three (3) copies of Drawings, Project Manuals, and Addenda. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction and shipping. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.3: 1. 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 01630, "Product Substitutions ". 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Revise the first line of Paragraph 3,7.1 to read as follows: 1. "The owner shall in accordance with the provisions of Section 01010, obtain and pay for the general building permit. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations are concluded. B. Add to Paragraph 3.7.1, the following Subparagraph 3.7.1.1. 1. 3.7.1.1 Contractor shall secure all certificates of inspection and of occupancy as required by the public authority. Each Subcontractor shall secure and pay for all special permits, fees and licenses for his work. Deliver all permits and certificates to Owner at completion. SECTION 00800 -1 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT A. Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 3.9.1: 1. "The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Architect, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ." 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A. 3.10.1: Revise to read as follows: 1. In the first line, replace the word "promptly" to "...within ten (10) working days..." B. Add to Paragraph 3.10, the following Subparagraphs 3.10.4 and 3.10.5: 1. 3.10.4 The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers shall schedule materials, deliveries and installations to conform with the Contractor's progress schedule, and provisions to this effect shall be included in all subcontracts. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work of all Contractors on the project through the use of a bar graph or CPM schedule, under the conditions set forth in Section 01310 "Construction Schedules and Reports ". 2. 3.10.5 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for preparation of the CPM schedule, based on Contractor input as set forth hereinabove including monthly updating thereof, and include costs for same in the Base Bid. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Add the following Subparagraph 3.12.12: 1 3.12.12 The method, type, and number of shop drawings and samples are to be submitted as set forth in the Project Manual, Section 01300; conform thereto. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION A. Add to paragraph 3.18 the following subparagraph 3.18.4: 1. 3.18.4 The Contractor's obligation(s) to indemnify and /or hold harmless the Owner for liens created under ORS 87.010 and perfected under ORS 87.035 shall not in any way be altered, amended, eliminated or otherwise conditioned by 1987 OR Laws Chapter 662, Section 1, ORS 87.021 (4). The Owner shall have no obligation to deliver a copy of any notice of right to lien to the Contractor or any other person or entity. SECTION 00800 -2 C ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT A. Add to Paragraph 4.1, the following Subparagraph 4.1.5: 1. 4.1.5 The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontract, and will not enter into disputes between the Contractor and his employees, including subcontractors. Notwithstanding any provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, all decisions, orders and certificates of Architect are advisory only and not binding upon the Owner until approved by the Owner's Representative. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add to Subparagraph 4.2.7, the following Clause 4.2.7.1: 1. 4.2.7.1 Review of submittals is only for general conformance with the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The review does not affect the Contractor's responsibility to perform all Construction Contract requirements with no change in contract price or time. Any action shown by the Architect is subject to the requirements of the plans, specifications and other Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to confirm and correlate dimensions at the site, for information that pertains to the fabrication processes, for the means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences and quantities necessary to complete the Construction Contract and for coordination of the work of all trades and satisfactory performance of its work. The review by the Architect is undertaken solely to satisfy Architect's obligations, if any, to the Owner and shall not give rise to any claim by the Contractor or other parties against the Architect or Owner. A. 4.2.8 In the first line:, delete the words "...change orders and... ". See also paragraph 7.2 for additional information on the preparation of change orders. B. Add the following sentence to subparagraph 4.3.7: 1. No claim shall be valid unless so made. ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Subparagraph 5.2.1 in the third line after the word "practicable ", add the words "but in no case later than seven days ". SECTION 00800 -3 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLE 6- CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY A. Delete paragraph 6.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following: 1. 6.2.5 Should claims, other disputes and /or matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor arise the Contractor shall resolve such matters with the separate contractor by agreement or otherwise. If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner and /or the Architect on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner and /or Architect shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense. If any judgment or award of any kind results against the Owner or Architect, whether or not the Contractor, having been notified, defends the proceedings, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner and /or Architect for all expenses, attorney's fees, court or arbitration costs which the Owner and /or Architect incurred, including actual cost expenditures in defense which may not be costs allowed in court or arbitration. 7.2 CHANGE ORDER A. 7.2.1 In the second line, change the word "Architect" to "Contractor ". B. Add to Paragraph 7.2 the following Subparagraphs 7.2.3, 7.2.4, and 7.2.5: 1. 7.2.3 The Contractor shall submit contract sum adjustment quotations, along with an itemized description of costs and credits, with change order proposal within 14 days after date of such request. 2. 7.2.4 Contractor, and subcontractors through the Contractor, shall set forth documentation in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 8.3 covering disruptions or delays, if any, to be caused in the Work due to change orders. 3. 3.7.2.5 Change orders shall be prepared on AIA form G701. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. 7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words: 1. "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6 below." B. Add to Paragraph 7.3 the following Subparagraph 7.3.10: '1. 7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: SECTION 00800 -4 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS a. .1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's or Sub - subcontractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub - subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the Sub - subcontractor. .5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. .6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500.00 be approved without such itemization. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Add to Subparagraph 9.3.1 the following Clauses 9.3.1.3 and 9.3.1.4: 1. 9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety five percent (95 %) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time of Substantial Completion, the Owner has the option to reduce the retainage to twice the value of the uncompleted work or retain the full five percent (5 %). 2. 9.3.1.4 The retainage (either the full 5% or twice the value of the uncompleted work) will be held for 30 days after the posting of the completion notice by the governing jurisdiction, and will be paid when satisfactory evidence has been submitted that all bills, claims and labor payments have been completed and deliveries required thereby have been made to the Owner. SECTION 00800 -5 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT A. Add the following to Paragraph 9.4: 1. 9.4.3 The Owner will make payments to the Contractor on account of the contract as follows: a. .1 Monthly in accordance with the General Conditions. .2 Thirty days after completion and final acceptance by the Owner, the balance due under the Contract, provided the work be then fully completed and the Contract fully performed. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION A. Add the following items to Subparagraph 9.5.1: 1. .8 Failure to present affidavit pertaining to wages paid as required by the Contract Documents. 2. .9 Delay by the Contractor. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Subparagraph 9.8.2 in the twentieth (20) line after the word "complete ", insert the following: 1. "... and the Contractor has met all prerequisite items specified in Section 01700 and has provided to Owner an occupancy permit issued by the Building Department having jurisdiction, so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the work for its intended use,..." B. Add to Paragraph 9.8 the following Subparagraph 9.8.4: 1. 9.8.4 Should reinspections be required because of failure of the Work to comply with claims of status of completion made by the Contractor, then the Owner will incur costs for these unexpected additional services. It is agreed that the Owner shall have the right to deduct the cost for such services from the final payment due the Contractor, subject to the following limitations: a. .1 That the Owner's claims for unnecessary reinspections apply only to the period beginning with the Contractor's notice of substantial completion, and ending on the date of final acceptance; .2 That the definition of unnecessary inspections, and the cost for same shall be as set forth in Division 1 of this Project Manual, Section 01700, entitled "Contract Closeout ". 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT ' A. Add the following to end of Subparagraph 9.10.2: 1. Additional provisions pertaining to final acceptance of the Project and release of retainage are specified in Section 01700 of this Project Manual; conform thereto. SECTION 00800 -6 ( ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Add the following Subparagraphs, 11.1.4, 11.1.5, and 11.1.6: 1. 11.1.4 The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all the insurance required herein and such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor herein. 2. 11.1.5 The insurance coverage shall be "Builders All Risk" type with not less than the following limits: .1 Worker's Compensation: Statutory Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 .2 Comprehensive General Liability: a. Combined Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $1,000,000.00 Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 aggregate b. Products and completed operations hazard: $1,000,000.00 c. Comprehensive Auto Liability: 1) Combined Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $1,000,000.00 Each Occurrence d. Excess Liability: 1) Combined Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $1,000,000.00 3. 11.1.6 Liability insurance must be on an occurance basis, Owner will not accept the "Claims made" policy. 4. 11.1.7 Contractor's General Liability insurance shall name as Additional Insureds the Owner, it's Officers and employees, the Architect and his consultants. 5. 11.1.8 General Liability Insurance may be arranged under a single policy for the full limits required or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an excess or umbrella liability policy. 6. 11.1.9 Certificates of Insurance shall be submitted on ACORD form 25s. SECTION 00800 -7 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES A. Add the following to Subparagraph 13.4.1: 1. If either party institutes any suit, action, arbitration or other proceeding, to enforce any covenant or agreement hereof, or to obtain any of the remedies herein provided, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover such sum of money as the court /arbitrators may adjudge reasonable as attorney's fees in such suit, action, arbitration or other proceeding, including any appeals taken by either party in such suit, action, arbitration or proceeding. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Add to Paragraph 13.5 the following Clause 13.5.1.1: 1. 13.5.1.1 Independent laboratory or Special Inspector's tests for certain items of work will be paid for by the Owner as set forth under Section 01400. END OF SECTION 0 DIVISION I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS 01030 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 COORDINATION AND CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS 01051 JOB MANUAL 01052 ADDITIONAL ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES 01070 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01085 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS 01091 DEFINITIONS 01180 CHANGES TO THE CONSTRUCTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01630 MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01640 PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.01 Work covered by Contract Documents: The Work for this project includes the furnishing of labor, materials, and equipment for the construction of all site and building improvements for the Stanford's Restaurant as outlined in the Project Documents, including, but not limited to sitework, foundation systems, general construction, HVAC, plumbing, electrical, fire protection systems, installation of all owner furnished items and final connection of all food service equipment. 1.02 The Contractor's scope of work shall include all permits, licenses, labor, materials, and expenses necessary to complete the Project to the satisfaction of the Owner, the City, State, local Health Department, Utility Companies and all authorities. 1.03 The Owner or his representative will file the General Building Construction Documents with the required building departments and pay fees for their plans review. 01014 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS 1.01 GENERAL: Owner will supply the following items to the extent indicated: 1.02 TABLES, CHAIRS & STOOLS: Supplied and installed by Owner. Backing and blocking by Contractor. 1.03 BOOTHS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.04 PUBLIC PAY PHONES: Furnished and installed by Owner except conduit rough -in by Contractor. 1.05 HOUSE PHONES: Supplied and installed by Owner, except conduit rough -in by contractor. 1.06 ELECTRONIC CASHIER SYSTEM: Supplied and installed by Owner except conduit rough -in by Contractor. Conductors supplied by Owner, pulled by Contractor. Dedicated and isolated circuits as shown by Contractor. 1.07 MUSIC SYSTEM: Supplied and installed by Owner, except conduitrough -in by Contractor. 1.08 CARPET RUNNERS: Supplied and installed by Owner. Carpet furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor. Division al A 1 Mq� F � r�k w pF A R 0G 1,q 1/44 CE,,,, 1.09 ARTWORK AND PLANTS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.10 HOSTESS STAND AND SERVICE STAND ANTIQUES: Supplied and installed by Owner. Power as shown on Drawings by Contractor. 1.11 SAFE: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.12 WINDOW COVERINGS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.13 SIGNAGE: Supplied and installed by Owner, utilities by Contractor, including exterior neon lighting /signage, contractor to provide all conduit, J- boxes, and conductors to appropriate circuit breakers. 1.14 PARK BENCHES: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.15 SOAP & TOWEL DISPENSERS: (restrooms) Supplied by owner, installed by Contractor. 1.16 CARPET: Supplied by Owner, installed by Contractor. 1.17 TV's & STANDS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.18 EMPLOYEE LOCKERS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 1.19 FILE CABINETS: Supplied and installed by Owner. 01030 FIELD ENGINEERING 1.01 The work under each Section of the Job Notebook shall include providing, installing and maintaining all scaffold, staging, planking, temporary shoring and /or bracing barricades and other protection devices necessary for safety and in strict conformity with applicable laws and ordinances. Maintain so as not to interfere with or obstruct the work of other trades. 1.02 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all necessary temporary or construction bracing, shoring or support for walls, floors or roof construction prior to completion of vertical and lateral load bearing systems. 1.03 The work under each Section of this Project Manual shall include providing all forms of protection as necessary to preserve the work of other trades and the public free from damage. These provisions shall be considered as though repeated under each separate Section of the Project Manual. 1.04 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of and observe all safety requirements. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall be liable for the failure of the Division 1 - 2 Contractor to observe and comply with required safety requirements. 01050 COORDINATION & CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS 1.01 The Contractor is responsible for the coordination for all phases of the work under this Contract. 1.02 Each Subcontractor shall consult all other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their work. If any work must be altered due to lack of proper cooperation or proper provision in time, then the Subcontractor at fault shall bear all expenses of required changes and the repairing thereof. 1.03 Subcontractor is responsible to determine that the surface to receive his work is satisfactory for proper application of material, accessories and finishing. Do not proceed until discovered defects are corrected. 1.04 The General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating orders for material which are not immediately available in such time so as not to delay the work of this project. Resulting unnecessary delays will not give cause for extensions in construction time. 1.05 Coordinate Project Manual with Drawings to insure all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for the project completion are included. Failure of the Contractor or Subcontractor to fully acquaint themselves with both the Drawings and Project Manual requirements shall not relieve them from performing the work required by the Contract Documents. 1.06 All materials to be new, free from defects in bearing strength, durability, or appearance, of best commercial quality for purpose specified. 1.07 Adequately protect active utilities from damage and remove or relocate as indicated or specified. Remove and plug or cap inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during the work. If not specified or otherwise provided, cap such utility lines at least three feet outside of new buildings or as required by local regulations. Division 1c 9M /T c4? 998 01051 PROJECT MANUAL 1.01 The Project Manual has been made to segregate the various branches of the work under headings, by trades. This is done for convenience and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing every item indicated or specified whether properly segregated or not. No responsibility will be assumed by the Owner or the Architect for omission or duplications by the Contractor in the completion of the contract due to any arrangement of the material in the Job Notebook. 1.02 In conflicts between the Drawings and the Project Manual, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Architect. The Contractor should be aware that there may be items called for on the Drawings which are not in the Project Manual and vise-versa. 01052 ADDITIONAL ARCHITECTURAL OR ENGINEERING SERVICES 1.01 It is understood that normal Architectural and Engineering liaison for the purpose of interpretation of the Drawings and Project Manual is provided under this Contract. Should additional services of the Architect be required to assist in the correction of incorrect construction by the Contractor, or because of changes in structure or equipment where the Contractor has requested approval of substitute methods or materials, the Contractor shall reimburse the Architect at his standard hourly rate for the time expended. 01070 CUTTING i PATCHING 1.01 Provide all required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the work. 1.02 Perform all required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent Sections of these Specifications. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. Perform fitting and adjustment of products to insure finished installation will comply with the specified tolerances and finishes. Division 1 - 4 01085 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard. 3. It is also the Contractor's responsibility, when so required by the Contract Documents or by written request from the Architect, to deliver to the Architect all required proof that the materials or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard. Such proof shall be in the form requested in writing by the Architect, and generally will be required to be copies of a certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency established for that purpose. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the Drawings and in other Sections of this Job Notebook. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards: In procuring all items used in this work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the detailed requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that the items procured for use in this work meet or exceed the specified requirements. B. Rejection of Non - Complying Items: The Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the work which fail to meet the specified minimum requirements. The Owner reserves the right, and without prejudice to other recourse the Owner may take, to accept non - complying items subject to an adjustment in the Contract amount as approved by the Architect and Owner. C. Applicable Standards listed in this Job Notebook include but are not necessarily limited to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations: Divi.ionc SS FAM�T cFNr 9.98 1. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2700 River Road, Des Plains I1. 60018 2. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 341 National Press Building, Washington, D.C. 20004. 3. ACI American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219. 4. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York 10020. 5. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction, 333 West Hampden Ave., Englewood, Colorado, 80110 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute (successor to USASI and ASA), 1430 Broadway, New York, New York 10018. 7. APA American Plywood Association, P.O. Box 2277, Tacoma, Washington 98401. 8. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103. 9. AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute, 1651 Old Meadow Road, McLean, Virginia 22101. 10. AWS American Welding Society, Inc., 2501 N.W. 7th Street, Miami, Florida 33125. 11. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute, 2310 S. Walter Reed Drive, Arlington, VA. 22206. 12. CRA California Redwood Association, One Lombard Street, San Francisco, California 94111. 13. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North LaSalle Street, Chicago, Illinois 60610. 14. CS Commercial Standard of NBS, U.S. Department of Commerce, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. 15. FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, Kansas 66611. 16. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials, 5360 South Workmen Rd., Whittier, CA 90601. Division 1 - 6 17. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 1033 South Boulevard, Oak Park, Illinois 60302. 18. NEC National Electrical Code (See NFPA). 19. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New York, New York 10017. 20. NFPA National Fire Protection Association, 470 Atlantic Avenue, Boston, Masachusetts 02210. 21. SDI Steel Deck Institute, 135 Addison Avenue, Elmhurst, Illinois 60125. 22. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Counci1,4400 5th Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15213. 23. TCA Tile Council of America, Inc., P.O. Box 326, Princeton, New Jersey 08540. 24. UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, Illinois 60611. 25. Fed Specs and Fed Standards: Specifications Sales (3FRI), Bldg. 197, Washington Navy Yard, General Services Administration, Washington, D.C. 20407. 26. UBC Uniform Building Code, International Conference of Building Officials, 5360 South Workman Mill Road, Whittier, California 90601. 27. WCLIB West Coast Lumberman's Inspection Bureau, 6980 S.W. Yarns Rd., Tigard, Oregon 97223. 28. WMMP Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers, 1730 S.W. Skyline, Portland, Oregon 97225. 29. WTCA Wood Truss Council of America, 111 E. Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL., 60601 30. WWPA Western Wood Products Association, Yeon Building, Portland, Oregon 97204. D. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly and successfully engaged in manufacture of similiar items. E. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. F. Where specific instructions in this Job Notebook require that a particular product and /or material be installed and /or applied by an "approved "," certified" or "licensed" applicator of the manufacturer, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that any subcontractors used for such work be 'approved applicators' by the product manufacturer. G. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall properly coordinate with all trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. 1.03 MINIMUM CODE STANDARDS A. All work shall conform to the prevailing local building code of the area in which the Project is located, as well as all other applicable codes and ordinances. In the absence of any specified local code, all work shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Building Code, 1991 Edition. B. All Contractors /Subcontractors shall comply with the provisions of tax laws of the State in which work is being performed. C. The Contractor shall conform to all requirements of the local Health Department having jurisdiction, and shall contact its agents for review and approval during construction. D. The Contractor shall comply with, and require all subcontractors to comply with all applicable City, County and State Contractors License Laws, and be duly registered and licensed thereunder. 01091 DEFINITIONS 1.01 "Reviewed" as used herein means reviewed by Architect for general compliance with the intent of the Drawings and Project Manual and not approval. 1.02 "Selected" as used herein means selected by Architect. 1.03 "Provide" as used herein means furnished and installed. 1.04 Where words "Accepted or acceptable" are used, Architect is the sole judge of quality and suitability or proposed Division 1 - 8 e substitution; taking no exception. Terms do not constitute approval, but only general conformance to the design intent. 1.05 "Supply" as used herein means the Owner's furnishings or equipment delivered F.O.B. to the Site. 1.06 "Furnish" as used herein means furnishings and equipment provided, to the extent indicated, by a Specialty Contractor, engaged by the Owner. 01180 CHANGES TO THE CONSTRUCTION 1.01 No changes to the construction as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be made without the expressed written approval of the Architect through addendum or properly executed Change Order. 1.02 The Contractor shall not scale the Drawings for construction purposes. The Contractor shall verify all existing conditions prior to construction. the Contractor shall verify conditions including dimensions on the Drawings, and report any discrepancies to the Architect. 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples required by specific sections of these specifications. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet, detail, schedule or room names shown on Drawings. 2. Drawings shall be on maximum 30 X 42 inch sheets and drawn to an appropriate scale. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams. 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to this work. 2. Supplement standard drawings and diagrams as required information to provide complete information applicable to the Work. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submitted samples shall be of sufficient size to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. 3. Samples will not be returned unless requested. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission. Stamp and date, verifying review. B. Determine and verify for accuracy. 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with specifications and local authorities and jurisdictions. C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Notify Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviation in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents, identifying such deviation clearly on the submittals. Division 1 - 10 E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect's stamp indicating 'No Exceptions Taken' or "Make Corrections Noted. 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. B. Minimum number of submittals required: 1. Four copies in addition to contractor's distribution. C. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of submission and dates of previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of Contractor, supplier and manufacturer. 5. Identification of product, with the specification Section Number. 6. Field dimensions clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards such as ASTM, ANSI or Federal Specifications. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. A 4 -inch by 4 -inch blank space for Architect's stamps. 12. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying verification of field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. 1.07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Shop drawings and product data. Make corrections and changes in the submittal as required by the Architect and resubmit in same quantities and format. 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.01 Testing and inspecting services are to be furnished as specified in this Section and /or elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.02 The following testing and inspecting is required: a. Concrete compression and slump tests - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE b. Subgrade and fill compaction /density tests EXCAVATION and BACKFILLING Section 03300 - Section 02200 c. Required special inspections shall be performed by an independent special inspector per Section 306 (a) of the Uniform Building Code (UBC) for the following: 1. CONCRETE: During the taking of concrete test specimens and placing of reinforcing and concrete in footings and walls: Verify reinforcing size, placement, and grade. 2. BOLTS AND ANCHORS IN CONCRETE: During the installation of holdown anchor bolts: Inspect size, length, hook and tie to reinforcing. 3. WELDING: Visual inspection of all structural welding, except welding done in an approved fabricator's shop. 4. DRILLED PIERS: Verify pier depth and diameter during drilling. Verify tip penetration into sandstone, siltstone for each pier while drilling. Verify reinforcing prior to placing concrete. Observe concrete placement. Make concrete tests for each pier pour. d. Structural observations by the engineer of record or his representative shall be required at the following times during construction: 1. After stem walls are formed with rebar and anchor bolts in place but just prior to pouring concrete. 2. As soon as shear walls and roof sheathing are in place, prior to covering with any architectural finishes. The contractor shall notify the engineer of record four (4) calendar days in advance of completion point requiring site observation. Division 1 - 12 e. Truss designer /manufacturer's engineer to observe truss installation - Section 06020. 1.03 Related Work Specified Elsewhere a. Requirements for testing may be described in various other sections of the Project Manual. 1.04 Selection and Payment for testing listed in 1.02 above: a. Selection of testing laboratory: The Owner will select a prequalified independent testing laboratory. b. payment for testing: The Owner will pay for laboratory testing and inspection services except as provided in paragraph 1.06 of this Section. c. Selection and payment of testing agency for other tests required in other sections of this Project Manual will be by Contractor, unless otherwise specified. 1.05 Co- ordination of Tests and Inspections: a. Contractor shall initiate and co- ordinate testing and inspections required by the Contract Documents and Public Authorities having jurisdiction of the work. b. Notification: The Contractor shall Notify the Owner sufficiently in advance of the manufacture of materials or products to be supplied by him which, by requirements of the Contract Documents, must be tested at the source of supply in order that the Owner may arrange for the testing. 1.06 The Architect shall have the right to require alternative inspection procedure other than as specified, when, in the Architect's judgment, other inspections are required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract requirements. Costs of such alternative inspections will be borne by the Owner if products are found to comply; otherwise, costs shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.07 Provide copies of each test result report, signed and certified by the testing firm's supervising engineer. Copies shall be provided as follows: Owner - 1 copy Architect - 1 copy Structural Engineer (structural tests only) - 1 copy Contractor - 2 copies Building Department - 1 copy Division 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary facilities and controls required for this work including but not limited to: a. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity, and telephone. b. Field offices and sheds. c. Sanitary facilities. d. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and canopies. e. Fencing of the construction area. f. Haul roads. g. Temporary bracing and shoring. h. All weather protection. i. Fire protection equipment 1.02 Allow no signs or advertising of any kind on the job site except as specifically approved in advance by the Owner. 01630 MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT STORAGE & PROTECTION 1.01 Provide and maintain weatherproof storage sheds on premises for materials which might be damaged by the weather. 1.02 Provide storage platforms raised 6 inches off the ground for sand used in masonry, cement, lime and other materials affected by moisture. 1.03 If any room in the building is used as a store room or shop, etc., the one making use of such room will be held responsible for repairing any damage resulting from such use. The General Contractor shall see that all damage is repaired without cost to the Owner. 1.04 Deliver all materials in their unopened packages and store in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged and deteriorated materials from the premises. 01640 PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS 1.01 No specified product shall be substituted without prior submission to and review by Architect and the Owner. 1.02 Submit requests for substitution on Standard Construction Specification Institute (CSI) form. Division 1 - 14 1.03 Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.04 Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product (or that the cost reduction offered is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution) and that each item conforms in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.05 Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 1.06 Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 1.07 Substitution requests will be considered only within 30 days after date of Contract. 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.01 Detailed instructions elsewhere in this Job Notebook may require that certain items listed herein be submitted prior to substantial completion of the Project. This Section is complimentary to the General Conditions and shall not be considered to waive any requirements listed therein. 1.02 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees, or work, or subcontractors. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from and about the buildings and site and all his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the Work "vacuumed" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. 1.03 Contractor shall clean all glass; replace all broken glass; remove stains, spots, marks, and dirt from decorated work; clean all hardware; remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces; clean all fixtures; and wash all concrete and tile floors. The Contractor shall also comply with all special cleaning instructions contained in these Specifications. 1.04 Submit all required guarantees to the Owner. 1.05 The General Contractor shall give to the Owner, in writing, a Division ri -•9 O /� /11 44) o ' 6 1°1941/1. CFN r1998 blanket guarantee covering all materials and workmanship used in the Project for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.06 Contractor shall maintain a set of Record Drawings at the job site. These shall be kept legible and current and show all changes in the Contract work, or work added, in a dark lead or ink medium. a. In showing changes in the work or added work, use the same legends as were used on the Contract Drawings. Indicate exact locations by dimensions and exact elevations, given in job datum, by depth. Reference dimensions from a permanent point. Indicate elevations to sewer and storm drainage lines to the invert elevation. b. Record Drawings shall indicate the exact routing of all mechanical and electrical piping, ductwork, power, and control wiring, etc., and location and function of all controls whether manual or automatic. c. Record Drawings shall contain the names, addresses, and phone numbers of the subcontractors and shall be signed by the Contractor. d. Upon Substantial Completion of the Project Work, submit the Record Drawings to the Owner for approval e. The Owner shall approve the Drawings and he shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of these Drawings. Receipt of Record Drawings is a prerequisite for Final Payment. 1.07 The Contractor will be responsible to maintain a job status report on a daily basis hereinafter called the "Daily Report". This report may be in a format designed by the Contractor, but shall show the following information: Contractor's name, date, job location and /or number, weather condition, Contractor's forces on the job by craft, description of work completed that shift by Contractor, Subcontractor's forces on the job and description of their work, list of Owner furnished and supplied items received and condition of same, and general status of job in the opinion of the Contractor's Superintendent. 1.08 Upon completion of the installation of all mechanical and electrical work, furnish three complete bound copies of operating and maintenance instructions and parts list for all material and equipment, including electrical and control items, being supplied. Division 1 - 16 END OF SECTION a. Operating instructions shall include complete operating sequence, control diagrams, description of method of operating machinery, machine serial numbers, factory order numbers, parts lists, instruction books, suppliers' phone numbers and addresses, and individual equipment guarantees. Parts lists shall be complete in every respect, showing all parts and part numbers for ready reference. b. Assemble maintenance manual and operating instructions in hard back loose -leaf binders. Suitably label and index all material contains therein for ready reference. 1.09 If required by the Owner, submit signed Waiver of Lien, or other suitable evidence of payment, for each and every subcontractor and supplier who has furnished labor and /or materials for the Projects, stating that all bills have been paid. 1.10 Receipt and approval of all items specified in this Section is a prerequisite for Final Payment. DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 02010 SOILS INVESTIGATION 02200 EXCAVATING, GRADING, AND FILLING 02510 ASPHALT PAVING 02750 IRRIGATION SYSTEM. 02800 LANDSCAPING 02010 SOILS INVESTIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Geotechnical Investigation (Sub- surface Soils Testing) for the overall shopping center site has been performed and a report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the report is available from the landlord: MBK Northwest, Ltd. (503) 691 -9500. 1.02 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. The Owner and or Architect assume no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor related to information included in the Report. Should the Contractor require additional information concerning subsurface conditions, he may, without cost to the Owner, make additional investigations. Should additional investigations produce information different from that in Soils Report, notify Owner in writing. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soils Report, including but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub -bases and fill and construction of building foundations and parking surfaces. Provide building foundations and parking surfaces in compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be found between the requirements of Soils Report and the Drawings and or Specifications, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. END OF SECTION C 02200 EXCAVATING, GRADING AND FILLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Clearing, excavating, grading and filling for this Work includes but is not limited to: 1. Excavating for footings and foundations. 2. Filling and backfilling to attain indicated grades. 3. Trenching and trench backfilling. 4. Finish grading of the site. 5. Furnishing and installing granular base under all interior and exterior concrete slabs on grade, and all exterior asphalt paving, and footings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Testing Laboratory Services Section 01410 Soils Report Section 02010 Asphalt Paving Section 02510 Irrigation Systems Section 02750 Landscaping Section 02800 Concrete Slabs Section 03300 Mechanical Trenching Division 15 Electrical Trenching Division 16 1.03 TESTING A. Coordinate the following required tests per Section 01410. 1. Compaction and density for soil subgrade under structural footings. Refer to Strutural Plans and Project Manual. 2. Compaction and density for soil subgrade at exterior asphalt paving. (One test per each 2,000 s.f. max.) 3. Refer to Soils Report for test methods. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS AND PROTECTION A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Protect existing utility lines and equipment, structures and roads while performing work specified in this Section. C. Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. D. Protect existing trees to remain by barricading around tree at the drip line prior to starting work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Trench fill material shall be clean, well graded granular pit or bank -run sand and gravel containing small cobbles up to 1 -1/2" maximum size and not more than 5% fines passing a No. 200 sieve. B. Fill material under slabs shall be clean, crushed rock graded 3/4 " -0" with not more than 5 per cent passing a No. 200 wet sieve. C. Fill under exterior walks shall be clean crushed rock graded 3/4 " -0 ". D. Fill and subgrade material for parking and driving areas shall consist of crushed rock fine grade from 1 -1/2" minus with no greater clay or loam content than 10 %. Leveling course for same shall consist of crushed rock fine graded from 3/4" minus with no greater clay or loam content than 10 %. E. Top soil per Landscape Contract. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GRADING A. Rough grade site to within 0.10 foot of subgrade to produce finish elevations shown on Drawings. Dispose of excess material off -site. Landscape areas shall be graded to 6" below finish grades shown and lightly compacted. Where grades are not otherwise indicated, finish grades are to be same as adjacent sidewalks, curbs or the obvious grade of adjacent structures. B. Final sub - grading outside of building and paved surfaces, shall be well shaped and uniform, free of rocks, clods or debris. At completion of job and after backfilling by other crafts has been completed, refill and compact areas which have settled or eroded to bring to grades. 02200 - 2 C. Proof roll building pad with fully loaded dump truck. Remove "soft" spots and replace with engineered fill per soils report. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate as required for all structures, allowing for form clearance. Provide reasonably dry, firm bearing surfaces free from frost. If faulty bearing conditions are caused by contractor's operations, including his operations in adverse weather, corrections shall be made at Contractor's expense. Bearing surfaces damaged or softened by water or frost shall be re- excavated to solid bearing. Hand clean excavation to a neat line. B. Trenching for utilities shall be as narrow as possible but sufficiently wide to permit compaction of backfill. All shoring, underpinning, etc., to be provided as required. Sewer piping under parking lots or roads shall be excavated to 6 inches below bottom of pipe and trench bottom shall be leveled to pipe grade with sand or pea gravel. C. Excavate all footing bearing to undisturbed, natural soils, unless specifically noted otherwise. Excavate all softened and disturbed soils due to natural conditions of soil, grubbing or other operations. Contractor shall employ methods and equipment as may be necessary to minimize disturbance of the natural soils. Grade surface of subgrade to provide drainage during placement of rock fills. Notify Architect of "soft spots ", "sink holes ", or high water table problems. D. Excavation slope between adjacent bearing shall not exceed 2:1. E. Excavation includes all materials encountered regardless of their nature or the manner in which they are removed. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill as required to conform to grades, elevations and dimensions indicated on Drawings or as necessary to provide proper drainage. Provide all necessary lines and levels. B. Cover exposed subgrade with granular material as soon as possible. Keep heavy vehicular, traffic off subgrade within limits of the building. C. Base surfaces upon which fills or backfills are to be placed shall have a density of compaction equal to subsequent fills. 3.04 ROCK BASE COURSES D. Place fill in lifts not exceeding 8 ", and compact to 95% relative compaction under footings and to 95% relative compaction per ASTM D1557, all other areas. E.Fill and finish grading for landscape areas (top 6 ") shall be provided as part of landscape contract. F. Place nQ fill within the drip line of existing trees to be saved. A. Provide the following minimum "base" courses at locations shown on drawings or specified herein: 1. Under exterior slabs -on- grade; 4" thick, compacted to 95% relative compaction per ASTM D1557. 3.05 FILLING OVER - EXCAVATED AREAS A. If excavation is carried below elevation indicated, fill to proper levels at Contractor's expense as follows: 1. Fill under footings with concrete matching footing concrete strength as specified above. 2. Fill, and compact under slabs or paving with sand and /or gravel materials indicated above. 3. Test compaction to 95% relative compaction per ASTM D1557 test method. END OF SECTION 02510 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Asphalt paving for the patching of existing paving to remain, including: 1. Final preparation of base course, and patching preparation. 2. Asphalt surfacing materials. 3. Asphalt base patching compounds. 4. Parking stall stripes, traffic lines, and markings. B. Coordinate all paving and related activities with Owner, Landlord, and Utilities to assure proper patching of existing parking lot and drive areas. C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Excavating, Grading and Filling Section 02200 Cast -In -Place Concrete Section 03300 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Codes and Standards 1.03 TESTING 1. Comply with requirements of the "Design and Construction of Full- Depth Asphalt Concrete Pavements" issued by the Asphalt Institute, MS -1 -1981. A. The Contractor shall coordinate the following required tests per Sections 01410. 1. Compaction and Density for gravel base under asphalt paving compacted to 95% relative compaction per ASTM D1557. 2. Compaction and Density for asphalt surfaces and bituminous materials in compliance with AC -10 Grade and conforming to AASHTO M -226. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS AND PROTECTION A. Do not install asphaltic concrete during inclement weather, when leveling course is wet, or when temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Protect all asphaltic concrete from damage or deterioration of every kind. Leave in first class condition at completion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVING ASPHALT A. Asphalt mix design: 1. Mix Design: Provide asphalt paving system that shall comply with Class "C" specification per Oregon State Department of Transportation. 2.02 SEALER Fiber reinforced, asphalt emulsion sealer. 2.03 TRAFFIC PAINT Provide either chlorinated rubber base for cured asphalt, or water -borne type for use over emulsified coal tar type compounds sealers. Color: to match existing where applicable, white otherwise, blue at handicap symbols. Match shopping center colors per Owner Approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting of the Work will indicate acceptance of subgrade conditions. 3.02 FINAL PREPARATION OF BASE COURSE A. Bring the compacted base finish to a uniformly smooth and hard surface conforming to the lines, grades, elevations and cross sections shown on the Drawings. 02510 - 2 3.03 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT A. Receipt of Materials 1. Do not accept material unless it is covered with tarpaulins until unloaded. Temperature of mixture shall not be lower than 260 degrees F or higher than 320 degrees F. 2. Do not place asphaltic concrete when the atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F, nor during fog, rain, or other unsuitable conditions. B. Tack Coat Prior to spreading, apply a tack coat to all vertical faces of curbs, gutters, structures and existing pavement which will butt against the new pavement. C. Spreading 1. Spread each asphalt lift evenly in a single continuous operation by means of a self - propelled mechanical spreading and finishing machine. 2. Provide lifts of asphalt as required by soils report for areas shown on drawings. 3.04 ROLLING A. After the material has been spread to the proper depth, roll with the specified equipment until the surface is hard, smooth, unyielding, and true to the thickness and elevations shown on the Drawings. B. Roll the surface with a minimum 10 ton steel wheeled roller in at least two directions and until no roller marks are visible. C. Surface Smoothness 1. Finished surfaces shall be free from birdbaths, and shall show no variation from the designed elevations greater than those specified. 3.05 FLOOD TEST A. Schedule: Prior to application of seal coat, perform a floor test. 1. If a depression is found where water ponds to a depth of more than 1/8 ", fill or otherwise correct to provide proper drainage. 3.06 SEAL COAT A. Upon completion of project but no sooner than 30 days after asphalt installation provide one coat of specified sealer per manufacturer's printed directions. 3.07 FINISH TOLERANCES A. Finish all surfaces to the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: 2. Asphaltic concrete surfacing: 3.08 STRIPING A. Preparation: Thoroughly clean the areas where striping will be applied, and locate all striping where indicated on the Drawings. B. Painting: Apply the striping paint in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations, using all means necessary to protect the painted surfaces until dry. Install striping as shown on plans and as otherwise required by Building Official, Fire Department, Owner, and or Landlord to clearly identify parking stalls, crosswalks, loading zones, no- parking zones. END OF SECTION Plus 0.00' to minus 0.10' from line and grade specified. Plus or minus 0.05' at any point from line and grade specified 02750 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide complete landscape irrigation system in accordance with approved landscape plan. Coordinate this installation with existing irrigation system. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Landscaping See Section 02800 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 2. Except as modified by governing codes and by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (I.A.P.M.O.) "Uniform Plumbing Code." It shall meet all state and local codes. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. C. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. D. Workmanship: Highest quality in all respects by state licensed, competent workmen, skilled at their trade. E. Installation: Installation of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations, local and state codes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after award of the Contract, submit: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable proper coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 4. Verify the static water pressure at the point of connection. Submit results of test to architect prior to any work. 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Close -Out Submittals 1. Record Drawings a. Submit neatly drafted Record Drawings on reproducable sheets at (same scale as irrigation plan) of the installed irrigation system upon completion of the Work. b. Keep an accurate record of any changes and deviations from the Drawings, location of drain valves, and other subsurface elements as the Work progresses. c. Submission of these Drawings shall be a condition for final payment. 2. At completion of the Work, provide Owner with two keys for electric controller, two valve operating keys and three (3) copies of Maintenance Manuals to include the following information neatly bound in 3 ring notebook with project name on cover. a. Index to manual. 02750 - 2 t ( b. Blueline diazo prints of "Record Drawings ". c. Manufacturer's literature describing all components of the irrigation system. d. Operating instructions. e. Installation Instructions. f. Winterization and start up schedule. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the irrigation system work and any parts thereof, against defective material and workmanship for one year from the date of acceptance. Correct same without expense to Owner. B. Repair any settling of backfilled trenches occurring during a one year period after final acceptance without expense to the Owner. Include complete restoration of all damaged planting, paving, or other improvements of any kind. C. Provide Owner with written guarantee stating the above conditions. 1.06 WORK CONDITIONS /PROTECTION A. Provide protection at all times ample to keep rock, dirt, gravel, debris, and all other foreign materials from entering piping, valves and other equipment. Provide minimum 48 hours notice for inspection. B. Weather Conditions: in freezing weather, do not solvent weld PVC pipe. In rainy weather, do solvent welding of PVC pipe only under cover. C. Storage: Do not store PVC pipe and fittings in direct sunlight. D. Protection of Unfinished Work: Provide protection at all times to keep rock, dirt, gravel, debris and all other foreign materials from entering piping,, valves and other irrigation equipment. E. Protect Existing Underground Utilities: Repair or replace utilities damaged. F. Protect existing trees: Do not machine trench through roots, hand dig as required. 02750 - 3 C 9 ) y 971/4, Af4 0 , �kw 1 , 1998 CPA,- 1.07 IRRIGATION LAYOUT A. Design and Plan: 1. Layout of the irrigation system is schematic. Follow as closely as is practicable. Make no alterations or changes without prior Approval. Coordinate with any on -site or any adjacent irrigation. 2. The Architect may accept or direct alterations in the locations of pipe lines, valves, sprinklers heads and related equipment as may be required to obtain complete irrigation coverage. B. Verification: Before proceeding with the installation of any section or unit of the irrigation system, Contractor shall check and verify the following: 1. The correlation between ground measurements and the Drawings. Advise the Architect of any discrepancies prior to beginning Work. 2. Location and depth of existing underground utilities. 3. Location of ball valve and stub -out for irrigation (as provided by others). C. PVC Sleeves: Irrigation Contractor shall install sleeves for irrigation piping and control wire where required under walks, curbs, paving, etc. 1.08 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected and tested. B. Install all supply lines and control valves and test with at least 100 p.s.i. pressure for at least one hour prior to inspection by Architect. Provide minimum 48 hours notice for inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials and Equipment: Shall be new and of brands and types as shown herein. 02750 - 4 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sprinkler Heads: Manufacturers and catalog numbers indicated on Drawings. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. PVC Pipe (Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic): Class 200, ASTM D1784 -69, D2241, SDR 21, PVC 1120,. Type 1 normal impact, I.P.S., NFS approved: plain and /or bell end; color white. 2. PVC Pipe Fittings: PVC 1120, Schedule 40, Type I, normal impact, I.P.S., N.S.F. approved; meeting requirements of ASTM tentative specifications D- 2466 -65T. 3. PVC Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC under roads, Class 200 PVC under sidewalks. 4. Galvanized Pipe and Fittings: Standard weight pipe, hot dipped galvanized and threaded. Screwed cast iron or galvanized malleable fittings. 5. PVC Riser: PVC 1120, Type I, normal impact, I.P.S., N.S.F. approved Schedule 80 PVC, conform to PS 22 -70. Cut to required lengths, threaded both ends; color, dark gray. 6. Swing ELLS: Schedule 40 PVC threaded street ELL or TORO 850 -01 and barbed fitting. C. PVC Solvent Cement: N.S.F. approved solvent for Type I and II PVC through 4" meeting requirement of ASTM D -2564; Weld -On or Approved. D. Automatic Control Valve: Flow control adjustment with a cross type wheel for operation with a key. Refer to Drawing. E. Manual Drain Valve: Brass angel valve with cross type wheel for operation with a valve key. Brass or bronze, angle, Champion No. 200 RS or Buckner No. 80K, 3/4 inch on laterals and mainline. F. Control Wire: Type OF bearing U/L approval for direct underground burial in National Electrical Code Class II circuits. AWG sizes, minimum size #14. Conductor of electrical conductivity grade copper in accordance with ASTM B -3. G. Electrical Connectors: Scotch -Lock Connector Sealing Pack No. 3576 with Type R electrical connectors, or Rain Bird Pen -Tite Wire Connectors, No. PT 101 through 104 or equal. H. Valve Boxes: "Ametek" Economy, standard and Jumbo sized boxes, extensions and locking covers where applicable. I. Gravel: 3/4" - 1/2" clean, washed round gravel. J. Automatic Controller: As noted on Drawing. K. Valve Operating Keys: Provide 2 each, 36 " -48" long galv. manual drain keys to Owner. L. Backflow Preventer: Refer to Drawing. M. Rebar: No. 5, 30" long. N. Worm Gear Clamp: Stainless steel worm geal clamp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Do not machine trench within drip line of existing trees. Hand dig, as necessary. B. Provide pipe trenches straight or "snaked" slightly allowing for expansion and contraction of PVC pipe; bottoms on uniform slopes, 1% minimum grade except 1/2% minimum where greater slope is not practicable. C. Allow for absolute minimum cover depths of 18" for supply lines up to control valves and 12." thereafter. Maximum depth 18 ", unless existing conditions or utilities require more. D. Provide trench of sufficient width to allow for proper tamping around pipe. Bottom of trenches shall be smooth and free of sharp rocks or other objects that could damage pipe. 02750 - 6 C _ E. Backfill any excess excavation with suitable material free of rock, or other materials that may damage pipe and thoroughly compact to give full support to pipe. 1. Topsoil in planting areas shall be kept separate from subsoil and replaced as the top layer to the same depth and in a condition similar to that as existing before excavation. 2. Backfill to finish grade. Place backfill carefully around and over piping, removing rock or other material that may damage pipe; wet and tamp earth in layers not over 6" thick until thoroughly compacted and settled. 3. Fill supply lines prior to backfilling operation. F. Provide bell holes to insure support of pipe over its entire length. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations, local and state codes. B. PVC Pipe: 1. Lay pipe in accordance with standard and accepted practice, substantially supported at all points and "snaked" slightly allowing for expansion and contraction. 2. Slope piping at 1% minimum grade, except 1/2% minimum where greater slope is not practicable, to facilitate operation of drain valves and complete draining of pipe. 3. PVC pipe joints solvent welded except as indicated. Cut pipe square, deburr, wipe from the surface all saw chips, dust, dirt, moisture and any foreign matter which may contaminate the cemented joint. Apply cleaner /primer and solvent cement. Make joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide a leak resistant joint with freedom of movement at all swing and /or swivel joints. 5. Use Teflon sealant (tape or liquid) at all threaded joints from water source to control valves. C. PVC Sleeves: Size as required for pipe and control valve wire. Locate where required under paving, walks, curbs, etc. D. G.I. Piping: Clean out threads of standard lengths, not more than two threads showing at joints. Make joint up with pipe compound applied to male threads only; or use Teflon tape. E. Valves: 1. Install Automatic Control Valves in valve boxes at locations shown on Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Architect. Locate in planting beds if possible. Flush mainline before installing control valves. 2. Provide a threaded union at each automatic control valve. Install in locations as shown on Drawing or as directed. 3. nstall anual Drain Va ves e d e- at locations required to properly and completely drain all pipe lines. Install each with one cubic foot minimum of washed rock. 4. At valves and valve boxes, install each with a minimum one cubic foot gravel sump. F. Sprinkler Heads: Install Sprinkler Heads of types, sizes and coverage called for in the Sprinkler Head Legend, at locations shown on Drawings or as otherwise directed by Architect. G. Control Wiring: 1. Lay in trenches under supply or branch lines when practical, for maximum protection; minimum depth 15 ". Place in conduit and pipe sleeves under paving and where shown on Drawings. 2. Provide single wires (red) to each solenoid from control and a common neutral wire (white) to all solenoids from the control. 3. Wire sizes shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of manufacturer of automatic control valves installed, #14 minimum. 4. Make all splices moisture proof using specified electrical connectors. Splices shall occur within valve boxes. 5. Bundle wires together and wrap with electrical tape at 5 foot intervals. Provide expansion curls every 100 feet of wire length. Provide 24 inches of slack at connection to control valves. 02750 - 8 H. Automatic Controller: 1. Install Electric Controller where shown on Drawing and as directed by Owner's Representative. 2. Electrical service to location of Controller and wire chase to outside of building for control wires provided by general contractor. I. Backflow Preventer: 1. Install as per detail and as per code. 3.04 FLUSHING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING A. Flush thoroughly all piping before testing and installation of sprinkler heads. B. Test all supply piping, valves, joints, and fittings at 100 p. s. i. minimum for not less than one hour before inspection and prior to backfilling. Immediately correct any and all leaks or defects found and retest. C. Adjusting and Balancing: Adjust and Balance irrigation system to provide uniform coverage. Adjust to reduce overthrow onto paving, building surfaces and other nonlandscape areas to a minimum. Orient heads carefully to provide intended angle of throw in proper area. 3.05 CLEAN -UP A. Keep premises reasonably free from accumulation of debris. B. At completion of Work, remove all equipment, surplus materials and debris and leave the work site in a clean condition. END OF SECTION 02800 LANDSCAPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide topsoil, planting and all related materials for a complete installation in accordance with Contract Documents. Meet /Match existing landscape. Repair existing landscape damaged by construction to standards as specified herein, and in compliance with Owner /Landlord requirements. Coordinate all work with Landlord maintenance staff to assure proper care and condition of existing plants and irrigation. B. Work included: 1. Providing and placing topsoil and textural soil amendments. 2. Finish grading. 3. Soil preparation for trees, shrubs, groundcover, flowers, and sod. 4. Planting of trees, shrubs, groundcover, flowers, and sod. 5. Maintenance as specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Irrigation System Section 02750 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 2. Except as modified by governing codes and by this Specification, comply with the applicable provision of the following. a. Plant names shall conform to those given in "Standardized Plant Name,", American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. b. Specified plant sizes and conditions shall conform to ANSI S 60.1 -1980, "American Standard for Nursery Stock ". No cold storage plants allowed. B. Each portion of the Work shall be performed under the direct supervision of individuals who have had a minimum of 5 years experience with the specific type of work being accomplished. C. Herbicide spraying and soil fumigation shall be done only by approved applicator licensed under State Herbicide Law. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with the provisions of Section 01300. B. Plant Material List: Within 7 days after award of the Contract, submit for review by the Architect a list of all specified plant materials indicating source of supply, sizes, and quantities of each species and variety. C. Work Schedule: At least 14 days prior to beginning Work, submit to Architect a schedule showing dates anticipated for substantial completion of topsoil placement, soil preparation and fine grading, installation of trees and remaining work. Notify Architect whenever schedule will change. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type, weight and analysis. Store packaged materials in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Remove from job any material which becomes contaminated. B. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering balls with soil, peat moss or other acceptable material for balled stock. C. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time. 1.06 WORK CONDITIONS A. Weather: Prepare soil and procure and install each type of plant material only during periods which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions, season and accepted practice in the landscape industry. O2800 - 2 B. Protection: Provide protective cover, planking, barriers, and other devices as necessary and required to prevent damage and staining of all improvements. C. Safety: Take necessary precautions to assure the safety of workmen and of the public in all project areas. D. Coordination: The Owner may be using the paved surfaces and building during the course of landscape construction. Where it is necessary to barricade certain areas of the Work for short periods of time, coordinate efforts with the Architect. 1.07 GRADES A. Establish slopes and grades in accordance with drawings. Eighteen (18) inches of topsoil required in planting beds,, six (6) inches of topsoil required in lawn areas. It may not be necessary to remove existing soil if it meets top soil specifications. Coordinate with General Contractor. B. Where backfill for utility trenching, building foundations and other improvements is rock or other granular fill, rough grade shall allow for a minimum of 18 inches of topsoil. C. Landscape Contractor shall establish new finish grades as follows: 2" below walks, curbs, etc., in planting beds including addition of bark and 1" below curb, walks, etc., in lawn areas. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all plant material for one year or one full growing season from date of acceptance, whichever is longer. B. Plant material shall be alive and healthy as determined by the Architect at the end of the Guarantee Period. Replace plants not surviving or in poor condition except where loss or damage is due to vandalism, freezing or the acts and neglects of others. C. Replace plant material of size and condition as originally specified in accordance with these Contract Documents. 1.09 EXTRA WORK ITEMS A. Requests for extra work payments will not be recognized unless a change order has been approved in advance. All extra work requests to be in writing to the Owner. 1.10 UTILITIES A. Determine and /or confirm location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. B. Maintain any and all reference markers until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fertilizers: Approval brands meeting requirements of applicable State fertilizer laws. Uniform in composition, dry and free flowing. Deliver to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. 1. Commercial mix 15 -5 -10. 2. Organic deluxe 10N- 10P -5K. 3. Planting Tablets: Par Ex IBDU 15 & 17 gram as manufactured by Estech General Chemicals Corp., Winter Haven, Florida. 4. Amonium Nitrate: 33.5 -0 -0. B. Textural Soil Amendment: 1. Manure: Ground or shredded, particle size 1/4" maximum, well potted, unleached stable or cattle manure, reasonably free from weed seed and refuse, containing no chemicals or materials harmful to plant life; not less than 4 months nor more than 2 years old. Sawdust or shavings shall not exceed 50% content of manure. "Garden Care ", or mushroom compost are acceptable. C. Top Soil: Clean fertile, natural loam obtained from local well- drained source free of debris, roots, stones, weed seeds or other roots or grasses, or other foreign matter. Top soil on site meeting these specifications may be used. D. Herbicide: "Roundup" as manufactured by Monsanto Agricultural Products Company. E. Trees, Shrubs, Groundcover: 1. Genus, species, and variety,, quantity, size and condition as indicated on the Plant Material List (Drawings). 2. Plant material shall be healthy nursery stock, well - balanced, full - foliaged when in leaf; free of disease, injury, insects, all weeds and weed roots. 02800 - 4 C 3. Balled and burlapped (B &B) and container stock shall have sufficient root systems and be vigorous enough to insure survival and healthy growth. 4. Plants in containers shall have grown therein a minimum of six months and a maximum of two years, with roots filling the containers but not showing evidence of being or having been rootbound. 5. All trees are to be transported to the site in a covered container to prevent windburn. 6. All plant material of the same genus, species and variety, clustered, grouped or in a common planting shall be equal in size, shape, form and color. F. Mulch: Medium grind, Douglas Fir /Hemlock bark mulch or equal, +/- 0" - 3/4" grade. Free from foreign material and weed seed. G. Water: Provided by Owner. Available from irrigation system installed this contract. Additional equipment required to be supplied by Contractor. Suitable for irrigation. Free from ingredients harmful to plant life. H. Tree Staking Materials: 1. Stakes: 2 x 2 Douglas fir or equal, 30" & 8 foot lengths stained dark brown or black. 2. Ties: Use "Chainlock" System. 3. Install as per tree planting detail. I. Sod: Oregon Ryegrass Blend. 2.02 CONFORMANCE /SUBSTITUTIONS A. Materials which do not in the Architect's opinion conform to specified quality, size, condition or other requirements of the specifications will be rejected and replacement will be required whether or not installed on the job. B. If any doubt exists about Conformance of any product with requirements of the specifications, Contractor is advised to review with the Architect before, procurement. C. Substitutions of materials or plant materials can only be made upon written approval by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. Meet /Match existing landscape. Repair existing landscape damaged by construction. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. General: 1. Remove rocks, sticks, mortar, brick, concrete, rubbish, debris and other foreign material from all landscape areas as it is found during the course of work. Dispose of off site. 2. Verify locations of all underground utility improvements before proceeding. Protect from damage. D. Weed Eradication and Control: 1. Within two days of award of the Contract, spray as required to eradicate noxious weed growth and roots which may be found within project limits (Johnson Grass, Crabgrass, Morning Glory, Rushgrass, Canadian Thistle, Blackberry, etc.) with specified herbicide in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2. Respray as required to achieve complete kill. 3. Do not proceed with other operations until at least 72 hours have elapsed after spraying. E. Initial Preparation: Scarify soil in all landscape areas on site by ripping or plowing to a minimum depth of 7 to 9 inches. Do not place topsoil or soil amendments on any compacted subsoil. Avoid roots of existing trees. Compacted soil shall be recultivated into a friable condition to a minimum depth of 18" or as required. F. Topsoil Placement: Place topsoil to minimum depths of 6 inches in planting beds, 6 inches in sod areas. Do not fill over existing tree root zones. Place to a depth of 18 inches over rock or other granular subsurface material. It may not be necessary to imoort to soil if existing soil meets top 02800 - 6 I C^ soil specifications. G. Fine Grading: 1. General: Fine Grade all landscape areas to remove clods, sticks and any remaining debris from surface and grade to assure free surface drainage. 2. Planting Areas: Slope all planting beds at 1/2 inch per foot minimum. Provide grade at 3 inches below bordering walks, curbs to allow for placement of mulch as specified. 3. Approval: Obtain approval of finish grades from Architect before proceeding with installation operations of each type of work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Trees: 1. General: Plant trees upright and face to give best appearance and relationship to adjacent plants and structures. 2. Installation: a. Excavate all planting holes two times the size of the tree root ball or root spread. Verify planting pits are free - draining within 1/2 hour. If pits are not fee - draining, provide 8" round x 5' deep sump and back fill with pea gravel. Notify architect immediately. b. Prepare backfill soil mixture of 66% topsoil, 33% textural soil amendment. Thoroughly mix. c. Place 8 inch minimum lightly compacted layer of backfill soil mixture under root system of each tree. d. Loosen and fold back burlap from around top of each ball, but do not remove. Stake or guy trees immediately after this work. Cut off cleanly all broken and frayed roots. Place and compact backfill soil mixture carefully to avoid injury to roots. Fill all voids. e. When planting hole is three fourths filled, place planting tablets evenly spaced around each tree as per the manufacturer's recommendations. f. When hole is nearly filled with soil, completely soak and allow water to soak away. Complete backfilling to finish grade and prepare for other work indicated. 02 8ifeSeq, MAC 0 A l ° 44 1 AF9M� c 1 S 996 ��rFq Provide a 2" depressed water basin at each tree. 3. Wrapping: Wrap trunks of deciduous trees up to the lowest branches with tree wrap and in accordance with standard procedures. 4. Staking (trees): Refer to tree planting detail. B. Shrubs and Groundcovers and Flower Beds: 1. Excavation: Excavate all holes two times the size of the root ball. 2. Installation: a. ou Grndcover and we s Flor d A Berea Only: Rototill into top 6" layer prior to planting, 10N- 10P -5K fertilizer @ rate of 20 lbs. /1000 s.q. and 3" layer textural soil amendment. b. Locate plants accurately to positions shown on plan. Space evenly where groupings of 3 or more plants occur. c. Remove plants carefully from containers. After setting B & B plants, loosen burlap from top of ball but do not remove. d. Backfill with 66% topsoil, 33% textural soil amendment. Place and compact backfill carefully to avoid injury to roots. Fill all voids. e. When planting hole is three fourths filled, place planting tablets evenly spaced as per the manufacturer's recommendations. f. Complete filling of hole, soak thoroughly and allow water to drain away. Fill any settlement and prepare for other work indicated. C. Initial Soil Preparation - sod lawn areas only: 1. Rototill the following proportions of materials evenly mixed to a 4- 6 inch depth over each 1000 sq. ft. area after finish grades are established: A. 10 lbs. inorganic 15 -5 -10. B. 20 lbs. Dolomite lime. C. 2" layer textural soil amendment. 02800 - 8 C 2. Sodlawn: 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Immediately prior to laying sod, bring areas to an even, smooth machine grade, removing all hard or soft areas and removing irregularities that impede surface drainage or cause puddling. Lay sod as per grower's recommendations. B. Fertilize with Ammonium Nitrate (3 lb. /1000 sq. ft.) fourteen (14) days after installation and again at end of maintenance period. D. Mulching: 1. Install barkmulch in each planting bed to a uniform depth of 2" and within 2 days of planting. 2. Provide uniform, even surface just below top of adjacent walks and curbs and walls. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises reasonably free from accumulation of debris. B. As work is completed in each area, remove all debris, equipment and surplus materials and leave the premises in a neat and orderly condition. A. Begin maintenance immediately after each tree and shrub is planted. Continue maintenance as follows. B. Trees and Plantings: Protect and maintain planting until accepted. Water, weed, cultivate mulch, reset plants to proper grade or upright position, remove dead wood and do other necessary operations. Irrigate when necessary to avoid drying out of plant materials and as required to promote healthy growth. C. Maintain trees, shrubs and plants for 60 days after final acceptance. Maintenance shall include pruning, watering, cultivating and weeding as required to provide for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers and mulch. Repair stakes and tighten guy supports. Replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep plants free of insects and disease. D. Sod Lawn: 1. Irrigate as required. 2. Mow grass at 1 -1/2 inch height when any portion attains a 3 inch growth. 3. Fertilize as specified herein. 4. Continue maintenance beyond minimum period, if required to meet this specification. Sixty (60) days minimum after final acceptance. E. Turn over at end of project: Landscape Contractor to go through entire project and spray all weeds in planting beds. Notify Architect before spraying takes place. F. All plants which are dead or in an unhealthy or unsightly condition and /or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, excessive pruning, inadequate or improper maintenance or other causes (except vandalism) during the guarantee period shall be replaced during the next planting season. 3.05 INSPECTION AND A. When the work the Contract acceptability. ACCEPTANCE is thought to be completed in accordance with Documents, request an inspection for B. Continue specified maintenance until written acceptance is received. END OF SECTION DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING C 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes all formwork and associated structural systems for placement of structural and architectural cast -in- place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Excavation, Grading and Filling Section 02200 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200 Cast -in -Place Concrete Section 03300 Building Insulation Section 07210 Mechanical Division 15 Electrical Division 16 1.03 STANDARDS A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Concrete formwork to meet the requirements of ACI 347, latest edition, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." C. Meet requirements of ANSI A 10.9, latest edition, "Safety Requirements for Concrete Construction and Masonry Work." 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of all embedded accessories, that are installed in this Section of work but furnished in other Sections. B. Notify respective trades and give opportunity to place embedded items before concrete is poured. Items provided by other trades for installation shall be properly set as indicated. C. Locate sleeves, pipes and conduits to avoid impairing strength of construction per A.C.I. 318. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. At all surfaces use new plywood formboard coated with a non - corrosive chemical releasing agent which will not penetrate or stain the concrete surface or attract dirt or deleterious matter. Apply releasing agent in strict confor- mance with manufacturer's printed directions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Forms for concrete exposed to view are to produce a surface at least as smooth and free of surface irregularities as produced by face veneer of new, sanded "Plyform" with "B" veneer grade per APA product standard, latest edition. B. Forms for concrete concealed from view may have a surface with irregularities, honeycombing, bulges, depressions, not exceeding 3/16" in 12 ". C. Set and maintain screeds to insure completed top surface of floor slabs with no deviations from design surface of more than 1/8" in any ten (10) feet. 3.02 GRADES AND DIMENSIONS A. Verify all grades, lines, levels, dimensions and conditions including openings as shown on Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Report errors and /or inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work. 3.03 ERECTION A. Construct and set all forms accurately to detail, line levels and size, adequately brace to make strong and unyielding. Make tight to prevent escape of mortar and avoid formation of fins. B. Form design, engineering, strength, construction and safety are the responsibility of the Contractor. 93102 - 2 c B. Notify Architect when reinforcing is ready for inspection at least 72 hours before placing concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. All reinforcing steel shall be per ASTM A 615, Standard Specifications for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. All reinforcing steel to be welded, shall be per ASTM A706, Standard Specifications for welded deformed billet -steel bars for concrete construction. C. All reinforcing steel shall have a minimum yield stress of 60,000 P.S.I., except for ties and stirrups shall which shall be MYS of 40,000 P.S.I. Refer to Structural Drawings and Notes for additional information. D. All welded wire mesh (Symbol WWM) shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Welded -Steel Fabric, ASTM A185. E. All reinforcing steel shall be unpainted, uncoated, free from rust or loose scale that will destroy or reduce bond. F. Galvanized chairs, spacers and bolsters per ACI 315. Provide plastic dipped items or all plastic items in contact with forms. 2.02 FABRICATION A. All reinforcing steel shall be fabricated in accordance with ACI 315. All hooks and bends shall conform to ACI Standards unless otherwise shown on the drawings. B. Fabrication shall be performed accurately to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. All bars shall be bent cold in a manner that will not injure the material. C. Make bend for stirrups and ties around pins having at least twice the thickness of the bars; for other bars, six times for 1" and smaller bars, eight times for larger bars. Straightening or rebending not allowed to an extent which will injure reinforcement. 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes all reinforcement steel and welded wire fabric used in cast -in -place concrete at locations shown in Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Formwork Section 03100 Cast -in -Place Concrete Section 03300 Mechanical Division 15 Electrical Division 16 1.03 STANDARDS A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Detail and place reinforcing steel per CRSI, latest edition„ and ACI 318 and 315, latest edition. C. Refer to Structural Drawings for typical details and General Notes pertaining to Steel Reinforcement for Concrete, in addition to the standards rferenced herein. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings for review for all steel reinforcement per Section 01300. All detailing shall be done in strict accordance with procedures outlined in the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" ACI 315, latest edition. B. Shop Drawings shall show all dimensions necessary for fabrication and placing of reinforcing steel and accessories, without reference to the Project Drawings. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in rejection of Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall include schedules, bar lists, and details specifically indicated in ACI Manual 315. 1.05 INSPECTIONS A. Provide special inspections per Section 01410. 03200 - 1 C��,RF O F T� Mg 0 s-4 i99e C. Use Burke, Bowman or approved, fixed metal washer snap ties, with 1" break back and fixed washer large enough to cover drilled holes in forms. D. Reuse of badly patched or damaged form panels will not be permitted. E. Provide special forms, inserts, mouldings, plaster molds, etc., as required to produce architectural feature indicated. F. Place corner fillets at all exposed concrete corners. Use Burke 3/4" triangular PVC chamfer formers, or approved. G. Use no corner fillets where they will interfere with architectural details or where walls are partitions are built flush. H. Carefully locate and form all pits and leave all chases, openings and holes as required by mechanical and special equipment in concrete. I. Where shown and /or required, depress floor slabs. At areas of depression of slabs, provide minimum thickness or depth as noted for adjacent areas unless otherwise shown. J. Bevel or groove all wood nailing blocks to prevent loosening. All wood blocks to be pressure treated fir. K. Apply form release agents to surface of forms only. Do not contact imbedded items. L. Install plastic cone snap ties at exposed concrete in uniform, symmetrical pattern unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.04 REMOVAL A. The sole responsibility of the removal of forms and for any resulting structural damage rests with the Contractor. B. Concrete members shall attain 80 percent of required 28 day strength before forms are removed. C. When moving forms, do not pry against architecturally finished concrete surfaces. Use only wood edges or other methods which will not damage surfaces to be finished. D. Provide and apply curing compounds or systems to all concrete surfaces that are exposed prior typical curing times recommended per ACI requirements. END OF SECTION 03100 - 3 D. Reinforcement shall not be lapped at points of maximum stress. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered 4' minimum and away from areas of maximum stress. All laps shall be lapped sufficiently to transfer the full stress by bond. Laps shall be 30 diameters of larger bar with a minimum lap of 24 ". Do not carry reinforcement through expansion unless otherwise noted. J'ART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place reinforcement per ACI 318 and 315 and /or as specified herein. B. Firmly secure steel in position in the forms by suitable ties to prevent dislocation during placement of concrete; support steel securely by means of chairs or spacers. Provide inplace bar supports per ACI 315. C. Except where otherwise noted, provide a cover of concrete over reinforcing per ACI 318 and as follows: Bottom of footings and earth forms: 3" Face of walls on backfill side or exposed to weather: 2" Interior wall faces and slabs not exposed to weather: 1 -1/2" Center of slabs on grade 1 -1/2" minimum from top or bottom surface Foundation walls (not retaining): 1 -1/2" max. from center of wall. D. Clear distance between bars in no case shall be less than 1" nor less than 1 -1/2 times maximum size of course aggregate. E. Lap welded wire mesh 12" minimum at all splices (at least one mesh spacing plus 2 inches). 3.02 INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when reinforcing is ready for inspection at least 72 hours before pouring concrete. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the mixing, transportation, delivery, and placing of normal weight cast -in -place concrete along with any miscellaneous related accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Testing Laboratory Services Gravel Base Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcemnt Concrete Finishing Vapor Barriers Concrete Slab Insulation 1.03 STANDARDS Section 01410 Section 02200 Section 03100 Section 03200 Section 03345 Section 07190 Section 07210 A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. All material and workmanship per "Specification for Structural Concrete" ACI 301 -72, latest edition, and ACI 318 -71, latest edition. C. Ready mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM Spec. C -94, latest edition. 1.04 TESTING A. The Contractor shall coordinate the following required tests per Section 01410. 1. Not less than four (4) specimens shall be made by a Certified Concrete Inspector for each day's work or 50 cu. yds. Specimen shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM Spec. C -31 and tested in accordance with ASTM Spec. C -39; one test at 7 days and two at 28 days. Hold fourth cylinder in case of low test or irregularities. Break with other two at 28 days if strength within acceptable limits. 2. Slump tests shall be made when concrete is being placed. 3. If concrete test cylinders are unsatisfactory, the concrete in place shall be checked by a test method deemed appropriate by concensus of Owner and Architect. If found unsatisfactory after testing, replace all unsatisfactory concrete at no expense to Owner. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Freezing Weather: No work shall be done in weather when temperature falls below 40 degrees at any time during the 24 hours, except with Architect's approval. No accelerating or anti - freeze admixtures shall be used. Earth subgrade shall not be frozen when concrete is placed thereon. B. Hot weather: Concrete placed during periods of hot weather, low humidity, or high winds, will be protected from the sun and wind. The recommendations of the Portland Cement Association Bureau Bulletin ST -93, "Hot Weather Concreting" and ST -95, "Curing of Concrete" shall be made a part of this Contract. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Water: Shall conform to ASTM C -94. Refer to Structural Drawing Notes for maxmum water /cement ratio. B. Concrete Aggregates: Shall conform to ASTM Spec. C -33 for reinforced concrete work. Shall be well graded and maximum size of 1 -1/2 ". Size reduced to 3/4" when form is less than 4 ". C. Cements: Portland Cement shall conform to the ASTM Spec. C -150, Type I, Oregon, Ideal, Sun, Permanente, Calaveras. Refer to Structural Drawing Notes for quantity and strength requirements for particular concrete systems. D. Air Entraining Agent: Shall conform to ASTM C -260. E. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C -494. F. Preformed Control Joints: Burke , "Keyed Kold," Superior "Load Key Joint," Jahn "Screed Key Joint." G. Insulation: Rigid foam board. See Section 07210. H. Integral Waterproofing: Masterbuilders "stearox." 03300 - 2 C I. Contraction Joints: Burke "Keyed Kold" Joint, Jahn "Screed Key Joint." J. Concrete Bonding Agent: Febond PVA, Weld -Crete approved. Used as per manufacturer's instruction. K. Liquid Curing Compound: Burke Aqua Resin -cure for natural appearance surface and Burke Res -X for surfaces that receive other finishes. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES A. The proportions of aggregate to cement for concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforecment without permitting the material to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface. All concrete shall conform to ASTM Spec. C -94. Cement contents and ratios indicate a minimum only. Strength required to govern actual batch mixes. B. Mix materials in transit and up to time of discharge, a minimum of 10 minutes. No water shall be added to the concrete mix after the mix leaves the batch plant. Maximum elapsed time between adding water to mix and placing shall be one hour. C. All concrete shall have the following values: 1. Min. compressive strength at 28 days: 3000 PSI. (Allow 500 PSI additional for laboratory condition curing and testing). 2. Mixed at batch plant. 3. Min. Cement Content: 5 US bags per cu. yd. of concrete, 5 1/2 bags for slabs on grade. 4. Mix. Water- Cement Ratio: 0.58 or 6 -1/2 US GAL. per US bag of cement, for non -air entrained concrete; 0.46 or 5 -1/4 US GAL. per US bag of cement, for air entrained concrete. 5. Slump: 2 " -4 ", +1/2" to - 1" deviation. 6. Air content for concrete with 1 -1/2" Max. Size Aggregate: Not less than 3% or more than 4% (at exterior walks and slabs only). 7. The Contrctor shall be singularly responsible that such strengths are achieved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING F . G . H . A. Provide joints in on -grade slabs at 25' o/c or as indicated as construction joints on Drawings and /or as directed by the Architect, and at exterior slabs at 20' -O" o.c. each way maximum. B. Do not run reinforcement or other fixed metal items, embedded in or bonded into concrete, continuously through expansion or contraction joints, unless otherwise noted. C. Concrete shall be handled from a ready -mix truck in such a way as to prevent separation of materials. D. Electrical or gasoline driven vibrator shall be used to effectively place concrete. Care must be taken not to over vibrate the concrete so as to cause separation of materials. E. All equipment and forms shall be cleaned. Forms shall be thoroughly wetted with release agent. Excess shall be removed from all trenches and foundations. All base material for slabs on grade to be immediately before concrete is placed during Curing: Maintain slabs continuously wet for a (7) days immediately following placing. 3.02 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace concrete surfaces which show excessive shrinkage or cracks or which do not drain properly, as directed by the Architect or the Engineer, at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION thoroughly wet dry weather. period of seven 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the finishing and repairing of all cast -in- place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Excavating, Grading, and Filling Section 02200 Cast -in -Place Concrete Section 03300 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. All work by experienced and approved cement finishers. Limit amount of slab poured in any period to area which can be finished with available crew. Test all slabs for level and /or drainage by flooding after same are sufficiently set. Where slabs are rough, show trowel marks, or are out of level due to poor finishing, curing or inaccurate screeding, grind, refinish or replace same as directed by Owner or Architect. 1.04 SLOPES AND TOLERANCES A. Slope all slabs requiring drainage approximately 1/4" per ft. unless otherwise shown. B. A tolerance of 1/8" in 10 foot deviation will be permitted on concrete slabs from design surface elevation. C. All slabs and grades shall comply with limitations and requirements as provided in The American's with Disabilities Act, and Local Building Code versions of accessibility codes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical Floor Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent. "Burke -O -Lith" or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INTERIOR SLAB FINISH A. Exposed Interior Slab: Shall be floated, and steel troweled to a smooth, dense, thoroughly consolidated, architectural grade, hard finish. (The final troweling shall be done when the trowel produces a ringing sound when passing over the surface.) B. At slabs to receive quarry /ceramic tile, slate, or other bedded materials: steel trowel then finish with fine broom. 3.02 EXTERIOR SLABS AND WALKS A. Finish all exterior slabs, as shown on Drawings. B. Screed, float, and provide with initial steel troweling. Areas receiving fine broom finish shall be double steel troweled prior to brooming. Before final set, broom and texture in outward direction (generally perpendicular to that of traffic) . For fine broom finish, use a fine (light coarse) wire type broom. All textures shall be uniform. Exterior walks and areas exposed to weather shall receive a heavy broom finish to assure a slip- resistant surface. C. Finish outside edges of all slabs and walks and edges of all exposed cold joints with edging tool. Score all exterior slabs (in pattern shown on Drawings) with scoring tool having a 3/8" minimum depth of cutter. 3.03 SLAB CURING A. All floor slabs shall be covered with water retaining fabric and cured by maintaining the slab continuously wet for seven days. B. Chemical Hardener Finish 1. Apply two coats liquid chemical hardener finish to exposed dry exterior walks and slabs and to all interior slabs not receiving other finishes. 3.04 LEVELING /FILLING /PATCHING A. Slabs which exceed the stated grade tolerances must be leveled with an approved epoxy concrete floor leveling compound prior to installation of finish flooring material as part of concrete contract. B. Exposed slabs or concrete surfaces which exceed or vary from the stated grade or finish tolerances shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 03345 - 2 (7 DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04252 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER 04252 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes brick masonry units, reinforcing ties, flashing, grout and mortar required for mechanically attatched masonry veneer. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Cast -in Place Concrete Section 03300 Structural Steel Section 05120 Dampproofing Section 07175 Flashing Section 07600 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Mason contractor is responsible for moisture content of brick after delivery to job site until laid in completed assembly. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with the provision of Section 01300. B. Certification: Prior to delivery of masonry materials to the job site, deliver to the Architect a letter from the manufacturer of the proposed masonry units certifying that all such units to be delivered to the job site are in strict conformance with the provisions of this Section. C. Samples: 1. Brick: Furnish five (5) individual bricks showing maximum variations in color and texture to Owner for review. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply Portland Cement Mortar to surfaces that contain frost. Do not install work in areas where temperature is below 40 degrees F. If heating is necessary and is not provided for elsewhere in this Project Manual, provide such service. The method of heating shall be fire- safe. Maintain temperature above freezing until mortar and grout have cured. 042)2 .641/4b /7 44) 41/C PP/44 p, in,. cFNT 998 FA PART 2 PRODUCTS i a 2.01 MATERIAL A. Brick Masonry Units 1. Face brick complying with ASTM C -216, latest revision, Grade SW, Type FBX. Nominal size: 3" x 4" x 8 ". See Finish Schedule legend on drawings for manufacturer, style and color. 2. Special Shapes: a. Standard squint in size indicated on Drawings. b. Solids. c. Shapes as required at arches and curves. B. Reinforcing steel to have minimum yield stress of 60,000 psi. See Structural Drawings for requirements. C. Mortar to be type S or M with proportion by volume of one part Portland cement to one part lime to 6 parts sand (ASTM C270). 28 day compressive strength to be 2,000 psi. Minimum aggregate size 3/8", pea gravel type mix. D. Wall Anchor Ties: Refer to Structural Drawings and Notes. Anchors shall be galvanized with 1.5 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. of surface. Install per Structural Drawings. E. Flashing: Perm -A- Barrier, wall flashing by W.R. Grace. F. Attachment: (2) #10 galvanized or polymer coated screws that penetrate into studs minimum 1 -1/2" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Do not begin masonry work until the horizontal and vertical alignment of the foundations have been checked. C. Verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on Drawings. Report errors or inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work. 04252 - 2 c 3.02 COORDINATION A. Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. B. Verify all required blockouts and their locations. 3.03 LAYOUT A. Check horizontal layout of the wall by first laying out units without mortar and adjust to minimize masonry unit cutting at windows, doors, pilasters, etc. B. Notify Architect when initial layout is complete. 3.04 MIXING MORTAR A. Use a mechanical mixer of one sack minimum capacity. Mix mortar for at least three minutes after all materials have been added. Mix only as much mortar as can be used in one hour after water has been first mixed into the batch. Do not retemper mortar. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Lay up all brick walls in running bond plumb, level and true to the lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Do not use chipped or broken units. If any such units are discovered in the finished wall, the Architect will require their removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Prior to laying the first course, clean the top surface of the concrete foundation or floor of all laitance, loose aggregate and other material that would prevent the mortar or grout from achieving satisfactory bond. B. Dampening 1. Store all masonry units on the job site so that they are kept off the ground and protected from the rain. 2. Wetting the units will not be permitted, except when hot and dry weather exists causing the units to be warm to the touch, and then only the surface may be wetted with a light fog spray. 042 S*YW OF !V T ■ FO k4/? 0 6 41/Giti isse TFR C. Laying Up 1. Solidly bed each course in mortar. 2. Butter entire vertical surface of units at end joints. 3. Bond each course at corners and intersections. 4. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the horizontal and vertical face joints shall be 1/2 in. thick. Tool joints when thumbprint hard with a round bar to produce a dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block at the edges. Mortar joints in surfaces to be plastered, stuccoed, furred or covered with other masonry shall be struck flush. 5. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed with fresh mortar, and then re- tooled. 6. Prevent mortar in excess of 3/8 in from extending from the joints and falling into wall cavity. 7. For masonry to be reinforced and grouted, align all vertical cells to maintain a clear, unobstructed system of flues. 8. When work is temporarily disconnected, step back brick for joining with future work - toothing not permitted. Cover tops of all walls exposed to weather. Before renewing work, remove loose mortar and thoroughly wet exposed joints. 9. While laying, keep exposed faces of masonry units free from mortar. Clean masonry after wall is complete. D. Anchorage: Attach brick veneer to backing with metal veneer ties in the following manner: 1. Maximum space between adjacent ties - sixteen (16) inches. 2. Embed ties at least two (2) inches in horizontal joint of facing. 3. Provide additional ties at openings: a. Maximum spacing around perimeter: twenty -four inches. b. Install within twelve (12) inches of opening. 04252 - 4 c E. Flashing: Clean surfaces of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture flashing material. Place through -wall and cavity flashing on a bed of mortar then cover with mortar. F. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing. Space weep holes twenty -four (24) inches on center maximum. G. Sealant Recess: Leave joints around outside perimeter of exterior doors, window frames and other openings. Depth: Uniform 3/4 inch; width: 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch. H. Expansion Joints: Provide vertical temperature expansion joints with compressible closed cell neoprene strips adjacent inside corners and at max. 20 ft. intervals in straight walls. 3.06 CLEANING A. Promptly clean work as it progresses so as to minimize final cleaning. Do not leave mortar scum to dry on faces of material. B. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. C. Prior to sealing unglazed masonry, clean with "Thoroclean" dry acid masonry cleaner per manufacturer's printed instructions (Standard Dry Wall Products, Inc.) to remove all job dirt, stains and excess mortar. Remove any efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide spray - applied dampproofing as specified in Section 07175. END OF SECTION DIVISION 5 METALS C 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05400 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS C 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish, fabricate; mark for erection identification, pack, crate, or otherwise properly prepare for shipment, ship to the site and erect all structural steel indicated on the Drawings, described in these Specifications, or otherwise required for proper completion of the Work. 1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE: Metal Fabrications Section 05500 Rough Carppentry Section 06100 Painting Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01085 and the following standards: 1. Erection, fabrication and identification shall conform to AISC Manual, and UBC Standard No. 27 -2. 2. Welding shall conform to AWS specifications for Structural Steel Welding Spec. #D1.1, latest edition. Welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to AWS D12.1, Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. 3. Welders will be certified and certificate presented to the Architect if requested. 4. All cold- formed members, material and fabrication shall conform to UBC Standard No. 27 -9. B. Contractor shall provide special inspection of all field welding or torqueing to the satisfaction of governing authorities requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with the pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings 1. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop 0512(07)A4 T ED E9Mi� 49,98 7-FA assembly of members. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size length, and type of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail number on the Drawings. 2. Should the Contractor elect to change sequence of erection or other details of field erection, submit necessary revised Shop Drawings to the Architect for review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rolled steel sections: ASTM A36, except where ASTM A572, Grade 50 is required by the Drawings. B. Cold formed steel tubing: Comply with ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Hot- formed steel tubing: Comply with ASTM A501. D. Steel pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. E. Steel castings: Comply with ASTM A27, Grade 65 -35, medium - strength carbon steel. F. Anchor bolts: Comply with ASTM A307, nonheaded type with heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise indicated. G. Unfinished threaded fasteners: Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low- carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. H. High strength threaded fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, shall be quenched and tempered medium - carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325. I. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS Code, using ASTM A233 E60XX or E70XX series electrodes. J. Headed stud -type shear connectors: Comply with ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold- finished carbon steel, with dimensions complying with the AISC Specifications. K. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23, ASTM A386 commercial class, hot dipped. 05120 - 2 c L. No unidentified steel shall be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. General: 1. All workmanship, details of construction, etc., except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall be in conformity with all applicable articles of the AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ", AISC "Code of Standard Practice ", and the applicable Building Codes. Make connections as indicated, or detailed, on the drawings and the approved Shop and Erection Drawings. All exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trade marks, names, etc., exposed to view. Leave in condition for finish painting. 2. Gas - cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas- cutting permitted. B. Fabrication: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Make welds by the electric -arc process. 3. Where weld size is not indicated, make weld full thickness of member. No splices, other than those indicated, will be permitted on , any steel member except where written approval is obtained from the Architect. Evidence of an unauthorized splice will be cause for rejection. 4. Clean all steel work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose millscale, loose rust, accessible weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. 5. Structural Steel fabrications to receive two coats of red lead mixed pigment, rust inhibiting metal primer. 6. Galvanize all fabrications permanently exposed to exterior or embeded in brick veneer. C. Erection: 1. Erect all work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other work. Secure all parts in a rigid and substantial manner during construction. 2. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. 3. Prior to setting base plates, clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces free from bond - reducing materials, and then roughen to improve bond to surface. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Pack non - shrink grout solidly between bearing surfaces to ensure no voids remain. 4. Provide inspection per 1.03 (B) above. END OF SECTION 05400 LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION C Work included: All material labor and equipment required to provide a complete system of light gage steel framing for axially and horizontally loaded partitions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structural Steel Section 05120 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Insulation Section 07200 Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section, and as listed in Section 01085. 1. ICBO, International Conference of Building Officials, system report. 2. AISI, Design of Coldformed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. 3. AWS, D.1.3, Structural Welding Code, latest edition. 4. AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, latest edition. 5. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM. 6. All applicable Federal, State and local codes. B. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. C. Contractor shall provide special inspection of all field welding to the satisfaction of governing authorities requirements and Section 01410. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Prior to commencement of work submit: 1. Complete material lists of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section, and manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 2. Complete shop drawing for project. 3. I.C.B.O. Report. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. System shall have a current I.C.B.O. certification for intended application. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Painted sheet steel, commercial quality: Note: No painted only materials shall be installed in Kitchen areas. 1. 16 gage and heavier per ASTM A570, Grade 50,000 psi. 2. 18 gage and lighter per ASTM A611 Grade C, 33,000 psi or ASTM A570 Grade 33. B. Galvanized sheet steel, commercial quality: Note: All framing in Kitchen areas shall be galvanized. 1. 16 gage and heavier per ASTM A446, Grade D, 50,000 psi. 2. 18 gage and lighter per ASTM A446, Grade A, 33,000 psi. 3. Coating shall be G -60 per ASTM A525. 05400 - 2 C. Fabricated Framing Members: 1. Studs: Punched load- bearing steel "C" sections, manufacturer's standard. See Drawings for sizes and gauges. 2. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard steel runners, blocking. lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for the application indicated, as required to provide a complete metal framing system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems at locations shown on drawings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and current I.C.B.O. report. B. General: Install the work of this Section straight and plumb within a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically, rigidly anchoring into position for long life under hard use. Perform all drilling and cutting as required to install work. C. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required, for an angular fit against abutting members. D. Fastening of components shall be by means of self - drilling screws or welding. Screws or welds shall be of sufficient size to insure the strength of the connection. E. Temporary bracing, where required, shall be provided until erection is completed. F. Provide inspection of welding per 1.03 C above. G. Provide all bridging, blocking and fire stops required by applicable codes. • H. Backing: Provide backing and blocking in wall between studs as required for anchoring of accessory items, etc. END OF SECTION c 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide all miscellaneous metal and metal fabrications, complete, in place, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation and not specifically called for under other Sections of this Project Manual. Refer to Schedule in Sub - Section 2 Products: Section for additionally required special items. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structural Steel Section 05120 Painting Section 09900 Exterior Fabric Canopies Section 10530 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section as listed in Section 01085. 1. Erection, fabrication and identification shall conform to AISC Manual, and UBC Standard No. 27 -2. 2. Welding shall conform to AWS specifications for Structural Steel Welding Spec. D1.1, latest edition. Welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to AWS Specification AWS D12.1, Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, latest edition. 3. All cold - formed members, material and fabrication shall conform to UBC Standard No. 27 -9. B. Contractor shall provide special inspection of all field welding or torqueing to the satisfaction of governing authorities requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. The contractor shall submit prior to fabrication Shop Drawings of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. Include plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Metal surfaces, general: For fabrication of the work of this Section which will be exposed to view, use only those materials which are smooth and free from surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. B. Standards: All materials shall comply with: 1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36, Standard 27 -1. 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold formed: ASTM A283, Grade C . 3. Steel tubing, hot formed, welded, or seamless: ASTM A501. 4. Steel bars and bar -sized shapes: ASTM A306, Grade 65, or ASTM A36. 5. Cold- finished steel bars: ASTM A108, grade as selected by the fabricator. 6. Cold - rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336. 7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with ASTM A#525, G90 zinc coating. 8. Stainless steel sheets: Type 302/304 of American Iron and Steel Institute, 24 gage, with number 4 finish. 9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47, grade as selected by the fabricator. 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, type as selected, Grade A, black finish unless galvanizing is required, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 12. Electrodes for steel welding: ASTM E -70 series. 13. Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47 or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A153. 14. Aluminum, ASTM B -209. 05500 - 2 2.02 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc - coated fasteners for exterior use and where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type and grade. B. Standards: All fasteners shall comply with: 1. Bolts and nuts: Regular hexagon -head type, ASTM A307, Grade A, and ASTM A 325 N or as noted. 2. Lag bolts: Square -head type, Fed. Spec. FF -B -561. 3. Machine screws: Cadnium plated steel, Fed. Spec. FF -S -92. 4. Wood screws: Flat -head carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF -S -111. 5. Plain washers: Round, carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF -W -92. 6. Masonry anchorage devices: Expansion shields, Fed. Spec. FF -S -325. 7. Toggle bolts: Tumble -wing type, Fed. Spec. FF -B -588, type, class, and style as required. 8. Lock washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, Fed. Spec. FF -W -84. 2.03 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL ITEMS A. Roof Access Ladder: Shall be a prefabricated aluminum vertical ladder attached to wall per OSHA requirements, with a hinged security door and roof -over rail extensions, O'Keefes Inc. Model number 502, or equal. A steel ladder may be substituted provided it meets OSHA and local Building Code provisions. Provide shop drawings per Section 01300 for Architect review. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. General: 1. All workmanship, details of construction, etc., except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall be in conformity with all applicable articles of the AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ", AISC "Code of Standard Practice ", and the applicable Building Codes. Make connections as indicated, or detailed, on the drawings and the approved Shop and 0550 05 � M4R T41 411� p FA,y r 6 199 8 CFN7.0p Erection Drawings. All exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trade marks, names, etc., exposed to view. Leave in condition for finish painting. 2. Gas - cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members as authorized by the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas- cutting permitted. B. Fabrication: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work.Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Make welds by the electric -arc process. 3. Where weld size is not indicated, make weld full thickness of member. No splices, other than those indicated, will be permitted on any steel member except where written authorization is obtained from the Architect. Evidence of an unauthorized splice will be cause for rejection. 4. Clean all steel work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose millscale, loose rust, accessible weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. 5. Steel fabrications to receive one coat of shop applied zinc oxide primer. 6. Galvanize all fabrications permanently exposed to the exterior or embedded in brick veneer. C. Erection: 1. Erect all work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other work. Secure all parts in a rigid and substantial manner during construction. END OF SECTION 05500 - 4 c C_ DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06020 PREFABRICATED WOOD & METAL JOISTS 06030 GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06410 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06020 PREFABRICATED WOOD AND METAL JOISTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the furnishing and installation of prefabricated wood chord, plywood and /or metal web trusses, including all blocking and connectors. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards Section 06100 1. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 2. Trusses shall be designed for the load requirements listed on structural drawings. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers with prior approval of structural engineer and architect. C. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Prior to delivery to job site submit: a. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. b. Submit Calculations for each truss type and loading condition, truss layout, and bearing details with connectors to supports, all stamped by an engineer licensed in the State project is being constructed. c. A current ICBO Report for all types of truss being supplied. Also submit evidence of compliance with all items required by ICBO Report. d. Current periodic plant inspection reports prepared by independent testing lab showing compliance with U.B.C. Standard 25 -17 and the submitted ICBO Report. e. Temporary truss bracing and erection requirements: If temporary braces require elements outside the bracing system to support loading from the bracing; the amount, direction, and location of load shall be shown on the shop drawing. f. Jobsite handling and storage requirements: Trusses should be covered during storage and kept dry until the structure is weather - tight. g. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable proper coordination of installation of concealed items of support. Shop drawings are to be stamped by an engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed. h. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. After erection: a. Certificate of Inspection by manufacturer's Registered Engineer after truss installation. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Trusses shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather prior to installation. Set on supports a minimum of 6 inches above grade. B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. C. Replacement: Damaged trusses will be rejected. Make all replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. C PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. This specification is written based on the use of products manufactured by the Trus Joist Corporation. B. Products: As shown on structural drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's approved product data submittal. B. Provide additional trusses as necessary to support mechanical units and sprinkler lines. Coordinate all loads and locations with mechanical drawings. 3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Note: Installation of trusses shall not begin until all workers involved with the erection meet and are informed of the manufacturers' erection and bracing requirements. B. Install the work of this Section straight and plumb, rigidly anchoring into position. Perform all drilling and cutting required for anchorage. C. Truss erector shall exercise extreme care during erection of roof trusses to prevent the trusses from buckling laterally. Use spreader bars for lifting trusses and provide lateral bracing as necessary. D. Temporary construction loads beyond design limits are not permitted. E. Truss manufacturer to. inspect all trusses after they have been erected and roof sheathing, bridging, blocking, etc. has been installed. Manufacturer to submit certificate to engineer that the inspection was made and that trusses are in acceptable condition and meet with the manufacturer's design and installation requirements. END OF SECTION c c c 06030 GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the materials for and fabrication, delivery, erection, and installation of glue - laminated beams. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Structural Steel Section 05120 1.03 STANDARDS A. The glued laminated structural members shall be by a manufacturer approved and licensed by the American Institute of Timber Construction as fabricating products in conformance with ANSI /AITC A190.1, and all requirements specified herewith. B. Laminated members shall be fabricated in plant equipped and experienced in this type of work, subject to Architect's review. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Load wrap all members with protective waterproof covering prior to shipment. B. Store members delivered to job site on supports a minimum of 6 inches above grade. C. Damaged members will be rejected. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings' per Section 01300 for review prior to fabrications. B. Provide AITC Certificates of Conformance with the AITC A190.1. Standard, "Structural Glue Laminated Timber," to the Architect in triplicate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All beams Douglas Fir /Larch unless otherwise noted. B. Stress Value: 24F -V8 for cantilever or continuous spans, 24F -V4 for simple spans per AITC 117. C. Appearance grade to be "Industrial" at interior. Appearance grade to be "Architectural" at exterior arched canopies. D. All glued laminated members shall be fabricated with waterproof glue. End seal all units as soon as practical after fabrication. Surface seal prior to shipment. E. All glued laminated members shall be notched, shaped and finished in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Fabricator shall coordinate connection details with fabricated connectors. F. Camber beams to true straight lines under 1.5 times dead load, except as noted on Drawings. G. All members shall be marked with a quality mark and AITC Certification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Structure shall be adequately braced for wind loads until the roof and wall units have been permanently attached together. B. Field notching or drilling of glue -lam beams, other than as detailed on the shop drawings, is prohibited. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the erection of framework using lumber, plywood and other sheathing materials; and all blocking and supports necessary to join the members and anchor the framework to other construction. B. Work in this section also includes the providing of backing and blocking for any wall- supported equipment supplied by other trades or the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Formwork Metal Fabrications Prefabricated Joists Glue Laminated Beams Finish Carpentry 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 03100 Section 05500 Section 06020 Section 06030 Section 06200 A. Comply with the product standards specified herein, in Section 06020, 06030, and in Section 01085. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional information regarding minimum grades and bending stresses allowable for particular structural members. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GRADE STAMPS A. Framing Lumber: Identify all framing lumber by the grade stamp ofthe West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. B. Plywood: Identify all plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American Plywood Association. C. Other: Identify all other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency listed in the reference standards, or by such other means as are approved by the Archtiect. 06100 - fib aFFF Mq,, 0 T 41k w, 41 6 199 ft*? cFN TFA 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber 2" and less in thickness shall have maximum moisture content of 19 %, K.D. or equal, 15% for plates, sills and header framing. B. All lumber products provided under this section, if required, shall be fire retardant treated in accordance with U.B.C. standard No. 42 -1 and provisions of U.B.C. Section 407 (i) . C. All materials, unless otherwise specifically approved in advance by the Architect, shall meet or exceed the following: ITEM: 1. Sills (walls and windows on concrete) 2. Studs & Plates 3. Sawn Headers 4. Joists and Rafters 5. Posts, Built -up columns 6. Blocking, Bridging, Backing, etc. 7. Plywood /Particle Board: a. Wall Sheathing (Concealed) DESCRIPTION: Pressure treated Douglas Fir #2. 20 Feet and over, Douglas -fir Larch No. 1. Other bearing studs DF /L #2. Douglas- fir /Larch No. 2, free of heart center. Exposed members Woodlife treated. Beams 6" and wider DF /L No. 1 free of heart center. Douglas -fir /Larch No. 2, 4" nominal architecturally exposed beams, No. 1. Douglas -fir /Larch No. 1 Douglas -fir /Larch No. 3 or better. APA C-D grade, 06100 - 2 13. Nails c. Roof.Sheathing 8. Exterior Gypsum Wall Sheathing 9. Exterior Wood Trim 10. Steel Hardware 11. Machine Bolts 12. Lag Bolts exterior glue.. 1/2 ", I.D. 32/16. b. Wall Siding (Exposed) 1/2" APA T1 -11, Rated. Siding, no grooves, lapped edges b. Wall Sheathing (Interior) APA C -D grade, exterior glue. See D rawing for thickness. APA C -D grade, exterior glue. See D rawings for thickness. 1/2" thick, butt edge, fire resistant for 1 -hr. assembly; with asphalt treated core and water repellant face paper. 5/8" thick for 2 -hr. assembly. B & better,vertical grain, clear, smooth cedar. ASTM A7 or A36 (use galvanized at exterior locations) ASTM A307 Fed. Spec. Ff-B-561 Common (except as noted), Fed. SPec. FF -N -.11 (use galvanized at exterior locations) See . Section 06100, 06200, 14. Framing Connectors Simpson, or equal. 15. Pressure Treatment 16. End Treatment 17. Wood Preservative 18. Exterior trellis and canopy beams, posts and built -up columns, etc. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. B. C. Pressure treatment to be waterborne salts type in strict accordance with the recommended practice of the American Wood P r e s e r v e r s Association (AWPA), either ACA or CCA -C, LP -2 above grade, LP -22 in contact with ground or concrete. Zinc or copper naptheanate. Ammoniacal copper arsenite, or 5% solution of pentach- lorophenol (for cut ends of p.t. members). Douglas Fir /Larch No. 1, pressure treated. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as indicated on the Drawings, shall be new, suitable for intended use, and subject to the review of the Architect. Frame as required for the installation and support of plumbing and pipes, ducts and conduit. Only treated lumber may rest on concrete or masonry. Accurately lay out, cut, fit and erect all framing true to lines and dimensions. Erect framing plumb and level, unless otherwise shown. Do not use shims for leveling on 06100 - 4 (1. metal bearings. Adequately anchor all framing as shown or specified. D. Brace all structures adequately during erection period, as well as final in -place condition. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fitted, accurately set to required lines, level, plumb and secured rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 3.02 LAYOUT A. Coordinate all layout of all ceiling, wall and roof framing to provide for indicated placement of suspended ceilings, electrical and mechanical work. 3.03 CUTTING AND NOTCHING A. Carpenters to do all cutting of structural members for other trades. B. Cutting and notching of joists not allowed unless shown on drawings. 1" diameter hole may be drilled in the center 1/3 of the member depth. All other holes to be approved by Architect or Structural Engineer. C. Studs may be notched in the lower 1/5 of the height of stud for electric and plumbing pipes but no part of notch is to be deeper than 25% of width of stud. Holes of diameters up to 1/3 width of stud may be drilled in studs but not in center 1/3 of their height. 3. INSTALLATION A. Beams, joists and rafters set "crown" up. B. Treated lumber, cut after treatment, and the ends of all posts in concealed locations and in contact with concrete, masonry or earth, to receive two (2) coats of a concentrated solution of treating preservatives used, saturating all cut surfaces and bolt holes. C. Lumber of nominal size, unless indicated "NET ", shown on Drawings or as specified. D. Where a size is not shown on Drawings, or additional support is deemed necessary, request size from Architect. 06100 - 5 c /Pfri e / p T ' 1 '` / ' pF N10. �� 1,99,0 NrF9 E. Stud Wall Framing: 1. Bottom plate: Pressure treated 2x as shown on Drawings. Anchor with 3/4" OS x 10" anchor bolts at 48" o.c.and 12" from end of piece. For non - bearing partitions on slab, power driven ramset 7/32" x 3" drive pins at 24" on center. See Structural Drawings for more stringent shear wall anchorage. 2. Spacing: 16" on center unless shown otherwise. 3 studs minimum at corners. Double studs minimum at openings unless shown otherwise. 3. Top plates shall be double except walls under beams may be single. Lap at all intersections and splices. Provide steel straps where plates are cut for ducts or pipes. 4. Provide 2 studs minimum under beam and header ends. 5. Provide fire blocking of 2 inch nominal thick wood: G. Sheathing: a. In exterior and interior walls or partitions at ceiling, roof and floor levels but not over 10 feet on center maximum. b. In all stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces with maximum distance not over 10 feet. c. At levels of furred ceilings and floors. 6. Provide nailing blocks and strips as required by all trades. All backing for fixtures, equipment, specialties and Owner supplied items is to be provided under this Division. 7. Miscellaneous blocking required for use of electrical and mechanical trades shall be by those trades unless otherwise stipulated or arranged for. 8. Set all exterior wall plates on sill sealer insulation batt. F. Curbs or Cants: Furnish wood curbs required for mechanical equipment and wood cants at all junctures of vertical and horizontal roof surfaces and as shown or noted on Architectural Drawings. 06100 -6 1. All plywood panels shall be placed over two or more spans with face grain perpendicular to supports, all joints staggered. 2. No surface or edge shall be exposed to the weather. Piecing will not be permitted. Minimum width 2' -0 ". 3. Where called for on Drawings as "Blocked" provide nominal 2" solid blocking at all panel edges. 4. Nail and glue all floor sheathing with construction adhesive complying with ASTM 2559. H. Fastening: 1. Nailing: Provide all builders hardware required; all nails for framing of American made, common type and penny weight specified or required. box nails may be used for sheathing. Use galvanized or aluminum nails for exterior nailing. Minimum nailing requirements for standard connections unless specifically shown or otherwise noted. Framing Item fasteners No. or o/c of Fasteners Size of Sole Plate to joist or blocking 16" o.c. 16d Joist Toe nail to plates 3 8d To parallel alternate joists 3 16d At laps over bearing 3 16d Studs End nail to plates 2 16d Or toe nail 2 ea. side 2 16d Top Plates Spike together 16" o.c. 16d Laps and, intersections 4 16d Blocking To plate 2 16d or toe nail 4 8d To joist each side 2, 16d or toe nail 4 8d Bridging Toe nail to joists 2 10d Studs Corner and angles 24" o.c. ea. piece 16d Dbl. or multiple studs 24" o.c. 16d 2 "x laminated beams or lintels Spike together Stripping, 2x @ each bearing Joists or rafters at bearing or metal hanger as shown Exterior board paneling Non - staining ring shank & trim penetration to solid backing Plywood Sheathing (minimum) Single Layer Gypsum Sheathing 2 @ 16" o.c. 2 2 16d 16d 16d 1 -1/4" min. 8d 6" O.0 all edges & 8d 10" O.C. field- floors 12" O.C. field -wall & roof Unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 1 -1/4" Type W Screws 12" o.c., max. at ceilings 16" o.c., max. at walls 11 -ga. 7/16" dia. head, galv nails, 1 -3/4" long 7" o.c., max. at ceilings 8" o.c., max. at walls Double Layer Gypsum Sheathing (Base layer) Same as above screws Same as above nails Double Layer Gypsum Sheathing (Face layer) 1 -1/2" Type G Screws 36" o.c., max. at edges, w /in 2" of joint and 12" both ends 2" min. nails Spacing as required by code 2. Framing Connectors: A. Provide framing connectors where required or indicated; secure with fastenings recommended by manufacturer to develop full total load reactions. 3. Bolted connections: A. At wood bolted connections where bolts bear on wood, use malleable iron washers under bolt head and nut, and where wood bears on concrete or steel cut steel washers. All washer dimensions per Westen Wood Use Book recommendations. B. Bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16" larger than bolt diameter. C. All nuts, bolts and washer exposed on exterior to 06100 - 8 • 4. Miscellaneous Connectors: END OF SECTION be galvanized. Retighten all exposed bolts at completion of job. D. Install lag screws where required. Bore for threads as follows: 1/8" less for 1/4" to 1/2" diameter, 3/16" less for 5/8" diameter, 1/4" less for over 5/8" diameter. Counterbore for shank at nominal diameter. Seat by turning, soap threads before setting and install with wrench only. Install all miscellaneous metal items called for to be furnished under Division 5 related to carpentry. See Shop Drawings for locations and installation details. 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes installation of paneling and trim, and wood doors; manufacture and installation of wood shelves, closet poles and miscellaneous finish items, if not specified elsewhere. 1.02 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. See Section 01014 - Owner Furnished Items. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Custom Cabinetwork Section 06410 Finish Hardware Section 08710 Wood Doors Section 08200 Painting Section 09900 1.04 STANDARDS A. Soft Woods: Standard Grading and Dressing Rules of the Western Wood Products Association, and /or the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, and /or California Redwood Association (CRA) and the Redwood Inspection Services (RIS). B. Hardwoods: Latest rules of the National Hardwood Lumber Association. C. Softwood Plywood: Latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS -1 with each sheet bearing the appropriate grade - trademark of the American Plywood Association. D. Hardwood Plywood: Latest standard of Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association. All plywoods to be selected for uniformity of color, grain and pattern. E. Specified qualities of workmanship on mill items furnished to be as specified in the Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide Specifications and /or as specified herein. i 06200 - , B AR of T`'k '"�� o P ERMi b' 1998 N cF4FR PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 1. Oak Trim 2. Exposed 2x ceiling 3. Wainscot paneling 4. Standing & Running Trim 5. Wood Moldings All materials shall conform to grading and dressing rules listed. F. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. A. All materials, unless otherwise specifically approved in advance by the Architect, shall meet or exceed the following: Item: Description: AWI, Grade I, vertical grain Red Oak. 2 x 8 nominal, Douglas Fir /Larch, No. ` 2 and better grade, (Hand select, blemish free boards, removed grade marks) . 1x4 nominal, clear vertical grain hemlock T &G ceiling "bead board" paneling. WWPA standard pattern No. 5/8x4 -E CB ceiling board. AWI Grade I, clear vertical grain Douglas Fir or Hemlock. House of Mouldings, 15202 Oxnard Street, Van Nuys, Ca., 91411,, 800. 327- 4.186. Standard shapes . and ;custom, 0 c 6. Shelving 7. Countertops: Wood 8. Countertops: Solid Plastic 9. Countertops: Marble Tile 10. Plastic Laminates a. Vertical Surfaces: b. Horizontal Surfaces: c. Curved Surfaces patterns as shown on drawings. Douglas fir or Hemlock, AWI Premium grade I. AWI Grade II,Sanded A -B, Birch hardwood veneer plywood. 3/4" thick, 1" thick of over 36 "spans. Exterior glue. AWI Grade II,Sanded A -B, Birch hardwood veneer plywood. 3/4" thick, 1" thick of over 36 "spans. Exterior glue. Corian - solid plastic material as shown on drawings. Marble Tile, 12 x 12 nominal size, with tight epoxy joint, per TCA Manual C512 --94, as shown on Drawings. Decorative laminate nominal 0.035" (1/32) thickness Vertical Surface Type. Decorative laminate nominal 1 / 1 6" thickness General Purpose .Type., Post forming grade. NEMA PF -42. d. Backing Sheets e. Surface Finish 11. Closet Pole Brackets 12. Shelf brackets & standards 13. Blocking 14. Adhesives 2.02 MOISTURE CONTENT A. Lumber Multi- Purpose Backer nominal 0.030" (1/32) thickness. To be "Textured (6) nondirectional textured surface with a moderate reflective quality unless noted otherwise. f. Fire rated Where required by UBC 42 -B. Metal end sockets and Stanley No. 7045 steel brackets at center of poles 48" long or longer. K & V No. 87. heavy duty slotted standards with No. 187 heavy duty slot brackets; at shelf joints use No. 85 standards and No. 185 brackets. Provide as required for shelving. As recommended by m a t e r i a l manufacturers. 1. All finish lumber to be kiln dried as closely as practicable to the following schedule: 90% shall not exceed 10% shall not exceed Average 1 inch or less 1 -1/2 - 2 inches 12% M.C. 15% M.C. 12 -1/2% M.C. Resinous woods to be steam - treated to extract all pitch. 2.03 FIRE RETARDANT TREATING Douglas Fir Oak Ponderosa Pine Western Red Cedar Hemlock Treatment to be DRICON by Koppers or equal. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WOOD 15% M.C. 18% M.C. 15 -1/2% M.C. A. Fire retardant treat all interior wood paneling if required for species to coply with U.B.C. Chapter 42, table 42 -B, Class III. to achieve Class II or above to achieve Class II or above to achieve Class III or above to achieve Class I to achieve Class I A. All joints to be neatly made, set all wood finish straight, plumb level in true alignment, tightly fitted and rigidly fastened in one place. Finished work must be guaranteed to stand one year after completion without warping, opening of joints or other defects. B. Plow out back of all flat trim. Splice no running trim under 16 feet in length and make joints only where solid blocking or backing occurs. Fit all joints flush on face by dressing off back. No face planing, excessive sanding or cross gain sanding will be permitted. Make all trim and fascia joints with 45 degree scarf,. C. Nailing of trims, paneling, caps etc.: Blind nail or fasten whenever possible. If face nailing is required use only finish nails, countersink and putty. D. Leave work clean, free from warp, twist and disfigurement. Sand smooth all finish material with minimum 120 grit abrasive 06200 - 5 oiyRF�Fi p � MQR o T` ° w �� pFRM,r 8 X998 CFNTRR and leave in perfect condition for painter. E. Install all building specialties, hardware and equipment as specified in their respective Divisions except where installation is required of supplier or other Subcontractor. F. Sand exposed wood surfaces for final finish per Section 09900, Painting. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC LAMINATE A. General: Install the approved plastic laminates in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Adhesives: For installation of plastic laminates, use only adhesives and methods as recommended by laminate manufacturer. Adhesive to be waterproof type. C. Edges: 1. Radius edges to be post formed to shapes indicated on Drawings by methods recommended by laminate manufacturer. 2. Self -edges to be routed (beveled) and filed smooth. D. All joints to be neat, and tight and all exposed edges to be filled smooth. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WOOD PANELING A. Prestain the tongue portion of shiplap or T &G joints prior to installation. B. Attach panels to substrates with panel adhesive and temporary bracing, plus nailing where covered by moldings, in accordance with manufacturers instructions for concealed fastener installation. C. Apply panel adhesive on substrates immediately prior to panel placement and nailing. Firmly press panels in place, then tilt off substrate, allowing the adhesive solvents to vent off. Visually examine to assure that the adhesive is transferring to the substrate. Press panels firmly back into place. D. Provide temporary clamping until panels have firmly bonded to substrate. 06200 - 6 3.04 INSTALLATION OF DOORS & HARDWARE A. See Division 8. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF SOLID PLASTIC MATERIALS A. Follow manufacturers prescribed procedures an methods for lamination, joinery, attachment and finishing to achieve best quality results. Polish finish as required by interior plans. END OF SECTION ( 06410 CUSTOM CABINETWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the fabrication, finishing, and installation of Architectural cabinets and counter tops. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Finish Carpentry Section 06200 Finish Hardware Section 08710 Painting Section 09900 1.03 STANDARDS Specified qualities of workmanship on cabinetwork items furnished to meet the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Institutes Quality Standards and Guide Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit following information: 1. Shop Drawings showing each of the items to be provided under this Section, completely detailing joinery and other construction, including anchorage. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The cabinetwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all required field measurements beyond their control. The General Contractor and the cabinetwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. B. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. 1.06 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS See Section 01014 - Owner Furnished Items. C<•ivTFR PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall comply with AWI Quality Standards and Specifications for Casework - "Custom Grade," factory finished cabinets. B. Cabinet Style: "Reveal Overlay ", See detail drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cabinet Body: Laminate finished: Stain finish: C. Shelves: APA, 3/4" thick, A -B, Douglas Fir plywood, exterior glue. AWI, 3/4" thick, II -II, Hardwood, plywood exterior glue. B. Backs and Drawer Bottoms: Laminate finished: APA, 1/4" thick (minimum), A -B, Douglas Fir plywood, exterior glue. Stain finish: AWI, 1/4" thick (minimum), II -II, Hardwood plywood, exterior glue. Exception: Thickness shall be 3/4" at Food Service Cabinets. Laminate finished: APA, 3/4" thick, A -B, Douglas Fir plywood, exterior glue. Stain finish: AWI, 3/4" thick, II -II, Hardwood, plywood, exterior glue. Exception: Thickness shall be 1" at shelves over 36" span. D. Counter Tops: Plastic.laminate Laminate finished: APA, 3/4" thick, A -B, plywood, exterior glue. Douglas Fir 06410 - 2 E. Counter Tops: Corain Corain: Solid plastic material finished per drawings. F. Face Frame: Laminate finished: 3/4" thick, solid stock hardwood. Stain finish: 3/4" thick, solid stock AWI,grade II, Hardwood. G. Door faces: Laminate finished: APA, 3/4" thick, A -B, Douglas Fir plywood, exterior glue. Stain finish: AWI, 3/4" thick, II -II, Hardwood, plywood, exterior glue. H. Drawer Sides: 1/2" thick, "Finnish" plywood, (9 -ply, plus). I. Hardwood trim: AWI, grade II, Northern Red Oak. J. Plastic Laminates 1. Vertical Surfaces 2. Horizontal Surfaces Decorative laminate nominal (countertops, thickness. General purpose type. shelves, and splashes) 3. Curved Surfaces 4. Backing Sheets 5. Surface Finish K. Hardware Decorative laminate nominal (1/32 ") thickness Vertical surface type. Post forming grade NEMA PF -42. Multi- purpose backer, nominal (1/32 ") thickness. To be "Textured (6)" non - directional textured surface with a moderate reflective quality unless otherwise noted. 1. Finish: Chrome at kitchen, polished brass at Bar areas. 2. Drawer glides: Grant no.511, ball bearing type. 3. Door hinges: 4. Silencers: 5. Pulls: L. S/S Edge Trim: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION Continuous, offset Stanley piano hinge. 3/8" diam. felt button pad (2 each door). 5/16 inch diameter x 4" x 1 -3/8" _+ wire pulls. 6. Shelf Standards Knape & Vogt: 87ANO Standards. and Supports: 187LL ANO x " Brackets 7. Locks: Corbin Camlock, 15700 series. 8. All other hardware not specified shall be the Cabinetwork manufacturer's option as to type and manufacturer, subject to Owner's review. Gage to match thickness of adjacent laminate. Welded and ground smooth for seamless construction. A. Fabricate the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the reviewed Shop Drawings, and the referenced A.W.T. grade standards. B. When provisions of the AWI grade specified are in conflict with or are modified by the Drawings and further specifications, the modifications govern. C. Accurately fit and install all finish hardware. After fitting remove all hardware until paint or varnish work is complete, then reinstall. Leave all hardware clean securely fastened and in working order. Cabinet doors to be mill fitted and hung. D. Assemble cabinetwork at the shop insofar as practical. Where it is necessary to cut and fit on the job, make ample allowance for cutting. E. Moisture content: Casework in storage and in place to have moisture content of between six and eleven percent, inclusive. 06410 - 4 C 3.02 FINISHING A. Laminate cabinets 1. Install laminates in strict conformance with laminate manufacturers printed instructions. 2. Adhesives: For installation of plastic laminates, use only adhesives and methods as recommended by laminate manufacturer. Adhesive to be waterproof type. 3. All joints to be neat, tight and all exposed edges to be routed and filed smooth. B. Stain finished cabinets 1. Concealed areas: One coat white pigmented sealer. 2. Stain finish: a. Prep sand with 120 grit abrasive. b. Followed by prep sanding of 220 grit abrasive. c. Remainder of finish specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Inspection 1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify dimension of all cabinetwork locations before fabrication. B. Installation 1. Install all components in strict accordance with the original design and the approved Shop Drawings, anchoring all items firmly into position for long life under hard use. 2. Fabricate counter tops for scribe fit to walls. 3. Install plumb, level and true. Shim and anchor securely. 064101A MAR p 6 ``w'c,a p�qM�� cF 1998 NrF,� 4. Doors and drawers to operate smoothly and freely, without binding or rattling. Proper reveal gaps to be maintained. 5. Install with concealed fasteners wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips head screws to match adjacent hardware. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each installed item, thoroughly clean all surfaces by using the cleaning material recommended by the manufacturer of the finish being cleaned, and carefully adjust all operating components for optimum operation. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07175 DAMPPROOFING 07190 VAPOR BARRIERS /RETARDANTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION. 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND WALL FINISH•SYSTEM 07460 WOOD SIDING 07510 BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07920 SEALANTS AND CAULKING c C 07175 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing liquid dampproofing /water - repellent of above - grade brick masonry exterior wall veneer. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Mechanically Attached Masonry Veneer 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1 . General: Comply with standards specified listed in Section 01085. herein 2. Water repellency per ASTM C67 -80a: 90% rating. 3. Moisture vapor transmission rate per ASTM cu.ft./ per 24 hours. 4. Water permeance test of masonry per ASTM reduction on brick walls. 1.03 WARRANTY Section 04252 and as D1653 49.8 g /per E 514 -86: 96.3% A. Deliver to the Architect the Hydrozo Coatings Company's Limited Warranty for vertical masonry surfaces. The duration shall be ten (10) years from the date of the application and shall warranty any moisture penetration if the product has been applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PROTECTION - A. Protect adjacent surfaces from overspray during application. B. Cover vegetation during spraying. 07C N OF I KW MAR 0 6 19 98 PERMIT CENTER PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. This specification is based on the use of products manufactured by Hydrozo Coatings Company. Equal products will be considered for use when submitted for review in accordance with Section 01640. B. Coating: Hydrozo "Clear Double 7" Enviroseal penetrating water - repellent sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Surface Condition: 1. Surfaces shall be clean and dry. 2. Re -point any loose or disintegrated mortar and allow 72 hours drying time before application. Allow 6 -12 hours curing time for caulking which is done (or until it is set). 3. If alkali or efflorescence is apparent on the surface, it shall be treated with a proper neutralizing compound recommended by masonry or concrete company or masonry or concrete distributor. B. Masking: Tightly cover all adjacent window frame, glass, metal and wood surfaces with tape and Polyethylene sheet plastic,. 3.02 TEST PANEL A. Apply coating on masonry test panel or on a portion of the building wall to assure desired results. Obtain Architect's acceptance prior to general application on building. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply one coat of material with a low pressure airless sprayer, followed immediately by a brush or push broom to work material into surface per manufacturer's instructions. B. Flood the wall surface to allow material to run down at least 12 inches. 07175 - 2 3.04 CLEAN -UP END OF SECTION C. Apply two coats where extreme seepage (or absorption) has occured. Allow 24 hours between coats. A. Adjacent surfaces that are accidentally sprayed or coated shall be immediately cleaned with appropriate materials followed by a normal washing and squeegee clean -off. 07190 VAPOR BARRIERS /RETARDANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION C A. Work in this Section includes all laminated vapor barriers and vapor retardants for use under on -grade concrete slabs and in wall and roof assemblies. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Excavation and Filling Cast -in -Place Concrete Building Insulation 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 02200 Section 03300 Section 07210 A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Building Paper 1. Where building papers are indicated on Drawings at roofs, walls or miscellaneous locations throughout the work, install asphalt saturated non - perforated felt weighing approximately 30 lbs. per 100 square feet at roof locations and felt weighing 15 lbs. per 100 square feet at wall locations, with two layers under cap flashings. 2. Building paper shall have a flame spread rating not to exceed .25 and a smoke density factor not to exceed 450 per U.B.C. Standard No. 42 -1. B. Laminated Reinforced Under -slab Vapor Barrier: Provide "Moistop" laminated vapor barrier as manufactured by St. Regis Paper Company, Laminated and Coated Products Division, "Plybar Plus II" by Glas -Kraft approved. Provide where called out on drawings, and where logical to prevent moisture flow from soil to conditioned building areas. 07190 - 1 CITy MAR 0 6 1998 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Building Paper 1. Install paper starting at bottom of wall, overlapping paper into rough openings under • flashings and behind window or door frames. Overlap all building papers minimum 6" in any direction to assure water will sheet down the membrane onto flashings or to appropriate weep systems or penetrations. B. Under -Slab Laminated Vapor Barrier 1. Cover entire surface with vapor barrier, lapping all joints 6 inches, using printed control strips on material as guide. 2. Patch all damaged vapor barriers immediately before covering. END OF SECTION c 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes insulation and associated materials used for the resistance of thermal and acoustic forces . 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Vapor Barriers Section 07190 Built -up Roofing Section 07510 Sealants Section 07900 Mechanical Insulation Division 15 1.03 STANDARDS A. Fiberglass building insulation shall comply with the requirements of Federal Specification HH- I -521F, Type I or II for unfaced, and Type II for kraft faced. B. Flame spread 25 insulation shall comply with the requirements of Federal Specification HH- I -521E, Type III and ASTM C665 -78. C. Semi -Rigid insulation board shall comply with the requirements of Federal Specification HH- I -558B, Form A, Class 1, Type as specified in Part 2, Products. D. Noise barrier batt insulation shall comply with the requirements of F.S. HH- I -521F, Type I (unfaced). E. Mineral wool fire safing blankets shall be rated non - combustible by NFPA Standard 220 and National Fire Code when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. F. Rigid insulation board for roof deck shall comply with material standards of ASTM, C -726 and UL Class "A" for Assembly used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 07210 - 1 CITYROF TUK MAR n 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 1.05 FLAME SPREAD A. Flame spread ratings of insulation and facings shall not exceed 25 and smoke density shall not exceed 450 when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard 42 -1 for all insulation materials within floor - ceiling assemblies, walls, crawl spaces or attics. B. When such materials are installed in concealed spaces of Type V construction, the flame spread and smoke developed limitations do not apply to facings, provided that the facing is installed in substantial contact with the exposed surface of the ceiling, floor or wall finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior wall insulation: Kraft faced fiberglass batts, R -19. B. Roof insulation: Refer to section 07510: Built -up Bituminous Roofing. C. Rigid Underfloor Insulation at foundation perimeter: 2" extruded polystyrene foam board rated for underslab use per ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25 lb. per square inch compressive strength. D. Foam insulation shall be Polycell 100, FEB Handy Foam Sealant or approved. E. Batt insulation fasteners shall be staples, zinc or coated wire, or other devices of type approved by the insulation manufacturer. F. Sill sealer batts - 1" thick fiberglass. G. Sound Attenuation Blanket: 3" thick unfaced batt using semi -rigid spun mineral fiber, rock wool or fiberglass insulation and complying with referenced standards. H. Fire Safing Blankets: 1" thick, minimum 4 lbs. /cubic foot, non combustible, mineral wool blankets. USG - ThermaFiber. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section. 07210 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Except as otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, install all building batt insulation in accordance with the current edition of "Fiberglass Building Insulation Application Instructions," publication 3- BL -4992 of the Owens /Corning Fiberglass Corporation. B. Fit insulation in all framing spaces, including areas between joists and outside headers with widths and lengths as required to fully bridge space between framing members. All butt joints to be taped. C. If attached to wood studs, place staples no further than 8" apart. For batts installed between roof joists, provide mesh or wire supports as required to prevent insulation from sagging. D. Place insulation and vapor barrier to outside of pipes to prevent freezing and fit neatly around and behind electrical boxes. E. Install insulation with vapor barrier toward the heated side of the wall. F. Insulate all cracks around doors, windows and sills with sprayed foam insulation. G. Install sill sealer insulation under all exterior wall bottom plates on top of concrete foundation. H. Acoustical Batt Insulation: Provide sound attenuation blanket at the following locations: 1. All walls separating kitchen from public areas including corridors. 2. All walls surrounding and separating restrooms. 3. Ceiling above restrooms. I. Rigid Roof Insulation: See Section 07510. 07210 C�T CENED of ruhNm q MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3.02 CLEARANCES A. Insulation shall not be installed within 3 inches of a recessed light fixture, ballast or other heat - generating electrical device, and shall not be so installed above the device as to entrap heat and prevent the free circulation of air unless the fixture is otherwise approved for that installation. B. Insulation shall not be installed with 3 inches of any metal chimney or gas vent. A permanent sleeve of fine wire mesh screen, sheet metal, or other noncombustible material, shall be installed to maintain the required clearances. C. Insulation shall not be installed in a manner that would obstruct opening required for attic ventilation. END OF SECTION ( 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND WALL FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION c A. Work in this Section includes furnishing all labor and materials required for an exterior insulation and wall finish system on the exterior walls over exterior plywood sheathing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sheathing Sealants 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 06100 Section 07920 A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers with prior approval of the Architect. C. Qualifications of installers: 1. Only subcontractors approved by the manufacturer as authorized installers are allowed to bid. 2. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Two 12" x 12" samples for each color and texture specified. 07240 - OP TiK CITY WI c� MAR o 6 19 98 pERMIT CENTER 3. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 4. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall submit a three (3) year limited warranty for materials in addition to installer's one year warranty, which is part of General Contractor's project warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All components of the System shall be obtained from the manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. No substitutions of, or additions of, other materials shall be substituted without prior written permission from the manufacturer. B. Dryvit, "Outsulation" systems approved. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Adhesive: an acrylic -based product produced by System manufacturer, rated for the designed thickness of insulation board installed over a plywood substrate. B. Insulation Board 1. Nominal 1.0 pcf aged expanded polystyrene meeting the specifications of manufacturer. 2. Flamespread and smoke development shall be less than or equal to 25 and 450 respectively when tested by ASTM E84. 3. Maximum size shall be 2' x 4'. 4. Thickness shall be per drawings. Minimum thickness 3/4 ". 07240 - 2 5. Shall not exceed the following dimensional limits: a. Length: +/ -1/16" b. Width: +/ -1/16" c. Thickness: +1-1/16" d. Squareness: +/- 1/32" e. Flatness: +/- 1/32" in 4' per ASTM C550 6. Thermal conductivity, "K" at one shall be .23 BTU /degree F -SF -hr at 40 degree F .25 BTU /degree F -SF -hr at 75 degree F. C. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: A balanced, open weave, treated glass fiber mesh supplied by System Manufacturer. To be installed at ALL locations above 10' -9" horizontal cornice line. D. Heavy -Duty Mesh: A balanced, treated heavy glass fiber mesh supplied by system manufacturer. Dryvit "Panzer Mesh ", shall be Panzer -15, 15 oz. reinforcing mesh installed at ALL locations of EIFS below 10' -9" cornice line. E. Finish: 1. Manufactured by system manufacturer. 2. Factory - mixed, acrylic -based coating with integral color and texture. 3. Custom color to be selected by Architect. (Two required.) 4. Texture to be "SANDPEBBLE" finish. F. Lamina: Shall be Classified by Underwriters Laboratory as having a flamespread of less than or equal to 25 when tested by ASTM E84. G. System: 1. Shall have been tested for moisture resistance, rain resistance, absorption- freeze, accelerated weathering, mildew resistance, salt spray resistance, chemical resistance, and abrasion resistance. 2. Shall have been tested at full scale for impact resistance and structural load capacity per ASTM E72 and E330 respectively. 3. Shall have been tested by the following diversified fire test methods: a. Modified ASTM E108 0720 In' OF KW MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER b. Factory Mutual Corner Test H. Cement: Type I, I--II or II Portland Cement meeting ASTM C150. I. Water: shall be clear and potable. J. Sealant System: Tremco "Dymeric" with Primer 1 or Pecora "Dynatrol II" with Primer P75. Consult system's detailed sealant specification for complete information. K. Finish coating: An acrylic -based coating manufactured for direct application to selected Substrate. PART 3 XECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: 1. General: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Sheathing shall be inspected for damage or deterioration prior to installation. Defective materials shall not be used. 3. Sheathing joints shall occur at studs. 4. The strong axis of sheathing shall be oriented perpendicular to the studs. 5. Edges of outboard sheathing pieces shall align with panel frame edge. 6. Edges of sheathing board shall be tightly abutted. 7. All fasteners shall be effective. Fasteners not attached to framing shall be replaced. 8. Fasteners shall be properly seated to ensure maximum connection strength and to ensure that fasteners do not protrude or "back out ". 07240 - 4 s�, C 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install system in strict conformance to manufacturer's printed instructions and directions. B. Provide reinforcing system as noted above. C. Expansion Joints 1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at the following locations: a. Where expansion joints occur in the substrate system. b. Where building expansion joints occur. c. Where panels abut one another. d. At floor lines in wood -frame construction. e. Where the system abuts other materials. f. Where the substrate changes. g. Where significant structural movement occurs, such as at: 1) Changes in roof line. 2) Long continuous elevations. 3) Changes in building shape and structural system. 2. Expansion and contraction of the field applied system and adjacent materials shall be taken into account in the design of expansion joints, with proper consideration given to sealant properties, installation conditions, temperature range, coefficient of expansion of materials, joint width -to -depth ratios, etc. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During system application, work shall be inspected by an authorized representative of system manufacturer. 3.04 INSPECTION AND CLEAN -UP A. Inspect all surfaces and repair any damaged areas. 07wIECEl p OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER B. Materials left over at the jobsite shall be removed. C. The applicator shall clean adjacent materials and surfaces, and the work area, of foreign materials resulting from their work. END OF SECTION 07460 WOOD SIDING PART 2 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all wood siding at locations shown on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Sealants and Caulking Section 07900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01085. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Horizontal siding: Clear, Western Red Cedar, 1x6, Horizontal bevel siding, Smooth texture exposed, maximum moisture @ 15 %. B. Plywood siding: Western Red Cedar, 1/2 ", APA T -1 -11. C. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized, sinker head, diamond point, siding nails. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install bevel siding with 1" minimum overlaps. Fasten with one siding nail @ 24" o.c. w/ minimum 1" penetration into studs or blocking. 07460 - i CI I r OFTUK MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER B. Butt joints of siding to occure over solid blocking. C. Provide metal corner trims for mitered appearance. D. Provide evenly cut, tight fitting butt joints between siding and trim. E. Assure all materials are back - primed and or treated prior to installation. END OF SECTION 07510 BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing an integral roofing system including flashings, roofing membrane and related items to produce a weatherproof, watertight, guaranteed Class A B.U.R. assembly. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Insulation Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 06100 Section 07210 Section 07600 A. Standards: Comply with standards specified here in and as listed in Section 01085. B. Qualifications of manufacturers:All products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by one manufacturer, regularly engaged in the reputable manufacture of similar items. C. Qualifications of installers: Roofing contractor shall be licensed by roofing materials manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provision of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit the following information: 1. Complete materials list and samples of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when reviewed by the Architect, will become the basis for 07510 -1 CITYROFTU MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTAb 4. Copy of applicator's license certificate /agreement with roofing materials manufacturer if a guarantee is required. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Roofing materials shall not be applied unless proper asphalt application temperatures (approximately 400 degrees F.) can be maintained. Nor shall materials be applied when water in any form (i.e. rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, etc.) is present on the deck. B. The roof deck shall be structurally sound to support the live and dead load requirement of roofing system and sufficiently rigid to support construction traffic. 1.06 GUARANTEE PART 2 PRODUCTS inspecting and accepting and rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. A. Provide, as part of the roofing bid, a guarantee of the roof installation for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance of the roof. Guarantee to cover any defects in the materials or workmanship and to provide for repair and /or replacement (labor and materials) of any leaks, cracks or otherwise defective areas. B. Manufacturer to provide standard written ten (10) year, "NDL ", (No Dollar Limit) guarantee on roofing. 2.01 GENERAL A. The roof design assembly, including all materials and application methods, shall meet the requirements of a U.L. or F.M. Class A rating. B. This specification is written based on the use of products and assemblies -of Schuller Roofing Systems. Alternate products and assemblies will be considered when submitted in accordance with Section 01640. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Roof System: Schuller 4 -GIC, 3 ply over rigid insulation, roof assembly consisting of: 07510 -2 c C Interply: Felts: Bitumen: Surfacing: Bitumen: Cap Sheet: B. Related Materials: C. Roof Accessories: 1. Attic /Roof Vents: See Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION 3 plies of GlasPly Premier Type III, 25 lbs. per 100 s.f. /ply Type III, 25.1bs. per 100 s.f. White mineral cap, 78 lbs. per 100 s.f. 1. GlasPly Premier felt, manufactured to standards of ASTM D -2178, Type VI. 2. Asphalt Primer: To comply with general requirements of ASTM D41. 3. Bitumen: To comply with general requirements of ASTM D312, Type I, II, III, IV as dictated by roof slope. 4. Base Flashings: DynaFlex SBS, elastomeric flashing by Schuller Roofing Systems. 5'. Plastic Cement: To comply with general requirements of ASTM D2822. 6. Fasteners for base flashing: "Large -Head Simplex" nails (min 15/16" head diameter) system. 7. Insulation: UltraGard Rigid closed -cell polyisocyanurate foam core thermal insulation board bonded to glass fiber facers. This insulation type must be covered by an overlay of perlite 3/4" Fesco, mineral fiberboard, as specified in the NCRA "Technical Bulletin 49 ", because of the potential for blistering of the roof membrane. Insulation value is minimum of R -14.4 per energy calculations for this project. 07510 - 3 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA M AR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Notify General Contractor and architect immediately of any unsatisfactory decking. C. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean roof deck. D. Fill joints between roof decking greater than 1/4" wide. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Roof Deck Insulation 1. Install insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Schuller 1M -1A. 2. Mechanically fasten UltraGard insulation to roof deck with proper quantity and length Schuller, UltraFast fastening screws and plates, per 4'x8' board in pattern recommended by manufacturer to achieve a Factory Mutual Class 1, I -90 rating. 3. Install 3/4" Fesco overlay board, embedding in hot bitumen, using not less than 30 lbs /100 sq. ft. Offset Fesco board joints minimum 6" from Insulation joints below. B. Cant Strips 1. Verify installation of Fescant cant strips at all junctures of vertical and horizontal surfaces. C. Inter Ply Installation 1. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's current published application instructions. 2. At parapets and roof penetrations, run base sheet (ply) up wall a minimum 8" and nail off (to wall or wood nail strip) . 07510 - 4 3. Set roofing plies in solid nominal uniform rate of hot bitumen of 25 lbs. per 100 sq.ft. in accordance with slope requirements. 4. Place plies with exposure as determined by number of plies, and depicted by manufacturer's published details and drawings. D. Surfacing 1. Install bitumen and mineral cap sheet per manufacturer's specifications. E. Base Flashings 1. After built -up roof has been installed, install SBS elastomeric base flashings per manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Flashings to extend a minimum of 4- inches vertically above top of cant strip and beyond bottom of cant strip onto cap sheet. Nail top at 6 inches on center and cover with flashings. 3. Secure the SBS elastomeric flashing material with asphalt of a sufficient temperature to melt the bitumen and to ensure full adherence of the material to the cap sheet. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Guarantee Inspection 1. The installation of the roof is to be supervised and /or reviewed by the manufacturer's representative to satisfy . the terms of the Guarantee. B. Roof cuts 1. If deemed necessary by the Architect or manufacturer's representative to verify the quality of the roof installation, the following procedure will be used to make roof cuts and subsequent repairs. a. Remove one 12" x 12" unsurfaced cut per 100 squares of roof area. b. Roof cuts are to be sent to roof manufacturer (or independent testing agency) for laboratory examination. 07510 - 5 RECEIVED OF TUKWILq MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER c. Repair patch area with "feathered in" patch consisting same number of plies and material as roof. d. Correct deficiencies, if any in roof as directed by Architect and manufacturers representative. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove trash, debris, equipment and parts from jobsite. B. Remove stains from walls, walkways and driveways. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Finished roof areas shall be protected from damage by the contractor during construction. END OF SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Flashings: Metal, plastic, or laminated sheets used in walls, or as flashing at perimeter of roofing, curbs, cants, equipment, supports, masonry veneer, awnings, and at other roof penetrations. 2. Metal accessories and trim: Gutters, downspouts, copings, pitch pans, diverters, and other weather- protective metal items related to roof or exterior walls. 3. Metal Roofing: Flat seamed rolled sheet metal roofing as used on each of (2) arched canopies. Berridge Manufacturing Company "curved flat seam panel" or approved equal. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Masonry Veneer Built -Up Roofing Joint Sealants Wood Windows Mechanical System Sheet Metal Section 04252 Section 07510 Section 07920 Section 08600 Division 15 1.03 STANDARDS A. Galvanized Sheet Metal: ASTM A -525, latest revision. B. Solder: ASTM E -32, latest revision. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards:' Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Install flashings in accordance with SMACNA requirements. C. Install roofing in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 1.05 GUARANTEE 07600 1 C11y MAR a 6 1998 PERMIT CENTEn A. A two (2) year written guarantee shall be furnished for material and workmanship of all parts of building to be made watertight with sheet metal work under normal usage. B. Repair any leaks that may occur at sheet metal work without cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel 1. Galvanized, ASTM A446, Grade A. 2. Coating designation G90, ASTM A525. 3. 24 gauge, unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Aluminum Flashing: ASTM B209; 0.03 inch thick. C. Lead Flashing: 2 -1/2 pound sheet. D. Related Materials 1. Pipe and conduit penetrations through roofing to be sealed with a preformed elastomeric or 31b. malleable lead sheet flashing collar compatible with roofing material. 2. Screws and Bolts: Galvanized or non - ferrous metal, stainless steel, or cadmium plated steel. 3. Mastic: Cold- application, asphalt based, flashing cement, compatable w /roofing system. 4. Bituminous Paint: ASTM NA -TAZ .007, Pure Asphalt Company, Chicago, Illinois, or equal, for use where dissimilar metals are in contact or the flashing is on or near the ground. 5. Solder: All solder used on galvanized sheet metal shall conform to ASTM B 32. 6. Soldering Flux: Federal Specification O -F -506, Type I, Form A or B, or equal commercial product as approved on job (raw muriatic acid). 7. Galvanize all clips, downspout brackets, wire screen, and other ferrous accessories. 8. Other materials: Provide all other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and 07600 - 2 proper installation of this work,shall be new, first quality, of their respective kinds. 9. Prefinished Steel Roofing: 24Gauge Hot - Dipped Galvanized Steel Grade C, G -90 Coating ASTM A 653 -94 & A 924 -94. Custom color Kynar finish to match PT -7. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION /INSTALLATION A. General D . 1. Form all sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing all molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit, soldering securely. 2. Hem all exposed edges 1/2 ". B. Expansion: Form, fabricate and install all sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and contraction of the finished work. C. Weatherproofing 1. Finish watertight and weathertight where so required. 2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make all lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3 ". 5. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow. Joints 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40' except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation. E. Nailing 07600 - 3 CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3.02 EMBEDMENT 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through the metal. 2. In general, space all nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead washers. A. Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant. END OF SECTION RETAKE PREVIOUS DOCUMENT f proper installation of this work,shall be new, first quality, of their respective kinds. 9. Prefinished Steel Roofing: 24Gauge Hot - Dipped Galvanized Steel Grade C, G -90 Coating ASTM A 653 -94 & A 924 -94. Custom color Kynar finish to match PT -7. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION /INSTALLATION A. General 1. Form all sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing all molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit, soldering securely. 2. Hem all exposed edges 1/2 ". B. Expansion: Form, fabricate and install all sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and contraction of the finished work. C. Weatherproofing 1. Finish watertight and weathertight where so required. 2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make all lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3 ". 5. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow. D. Joints 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40' except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation. E. Nailing 0 - 3 CIT7600 Y OF 7UKWILq MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through the metal. 2. In general, space all nails, rivets, and screws not more. than 8" apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead washers. 3.02 EMBEDMENT A. Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant. END OF SECTION ( 07920 SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Elastomeric and nonelastomeric sealants, nonskinning mastic sealants, bituminous sealants, oil -based caulking compounds, compression gaskets, joint fillers, and related products including primers, backer rods, and bond breaker tape, applied to exterior and interior moving and non moving joints to prevent penetration of moisture, air and sound. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 Doors and Windows Division 8 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Submit written guarantee of workmanship against leakage for two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. This Specification is written based on the use of "Tremco" products unless otherwise noted. Alternate products will be considered when submitted in accordance with Section 01640. B. Each color and each class of sealant shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.02 SEALANTS A. "Type A" (for non - traffic bearing horizontal surfaces): 1. THC /900, 2 -part polyurethane compound conforming to Fed. Spec. TT -S- 0027E, Class A, Type 1, self - leveling. 0792 0 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER B. "Type B" (for vertical exterior surfaces): 1. MONO, 1 -part acrylic terpolymer conforming to Fed. Spec. TT- S- 00230, non -sag. C. "Type C" (for interior vertical surface): 1. BUTYL SEALANT, 1 -part butyl sealant conforming to FEd. Spec. TT -S- 001657. D. "Type D" (for acoustical sealant applications): 1. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT, 1 -part, non - drying, non - hardening, permanently flexible synthetic rubber based product with consistency conforming to ASTM D -217. E. "Type E" (for joints in fire -rated assemblies): 1. FIRE BARRIER CAULK CP 25 ", 1 -part synthetic elastomer expandable compound as tested per ASTM -814 (UL 1479) for fire and hose steam exposure. F. "Type F" (for sealing in sanitary locations) 1. SANITARY, 1 -part, mildew resistant, non - hardening silicone type. G. "Type EIFS" (for sealing EIFS system to other materials) 1. Provide sealant in compliance with latest technical bulletin as provided by manufacturer. 2.03 RELATED PRODUCTS A. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer for each product. Nonstaining. B. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Backing Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. Nonabsorbent and nonstaining. D. Bond preventative Material: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each product. C PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Joints greater than 3/8" in depth to receive backer rod. C. Cleaning: Clean joint surfaces, using joint cleaner as necessary to be free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust lacquers, laitance, release agents, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion of sealant. D. Priming: Apply primer, following manufacturer's instructions when required for joint condition. E. Apply sealants in joints that are completely dry and free of moisture using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width. Make sure sealant is deposited in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets. F. Tool joints to required configuration within 10 minutes of sealant application. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling. G. Provide complete sealing of all joints, both interior and exterior, where preventing the penetration of moisture, air, fire or sound is required, including, but not limited to: Exterior pavement joints Exterior building wall joints Flashing and coping joints Misc. construction joints Interior floor, wall and ceiling joints Utility penetrations Sound walls Fire walls and shafts Wall flashing joints Equipment and isolation joints 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials adjacent to joints to eliminate evidence of spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surface. END OF SECTION 07920 - 3 CITy RECEIVE D TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTID DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08200 WOOD DOORS 08300 ACCESS DOORS 08600 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes doors fabricated of steel and sheet metal frames pressed into profiles required for openings for doors, casings, transoms, relites and sidelights. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Wood Doors Section 08200 Finish Hardware Section 08710 Painting Section 09900 1.03 STANDARDS A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Door and Frames: Comply with CS 242 -62, PS PS4 -66i and Steel Door Institute Standard SDI -100. Latest revisions of all. C. Labelled Doors and Frames: Comply with all UL Procedures R -3791, R -5493 and R -3821. D. Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware: Comply with ANSI A115, latest revision. E. Door and Frame Performance Test: ANSI Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 08111 - 1 CITY RECEIVED MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of finish hardware and for concealed supportitems. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials used shall be prime grade, open hearth, cold rolled, full pickled, double annealed, stretcher levelled steel, free from scale, pits, warps or buckles. U.S. Standard Gages. B. Hollow metal doors shall be flush 1 -3/4" thick, welded and interlocked construction in types shown on Drawings. 1. Face sheets: 16 ga. for exterior doors. 2. Vertical edges: mechanically interlocked, 12 ga. 3. Horizontal edges: 16 ga. 4. Core: rigid urethane foam or one piece resin- impregnated honeycomb or as required for U.L. label and "heavy duty" standard. All cores to be fully bonded to face sheets. 5. Door prepared for lights or louvers shall have to openings framed and securely attached. 6. Glazing beads shall be screwless snap -in type. 7. The lock and hinge edges of stiles shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 8. All paired, fire rated doors, required to have panic hardware shall be manufactured so as not to require an astragal or coordinator. 9. Doors shall be chemically treated for optimum paint adherence and painted with one (1) uniform coat of rust- inhibiting quality primer, oven dried, complying with ASTM D 2247, ASTM B 117, and ASTM D 1735 tests and ready for paint finish. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: Curries, CECO, Fenestra, Steelcraft, Republic 08111 - 2 ( C. Hollow Metal Frames 1. Minimum thickness commercial quality cold - rolled steel shall be 16 ga. for all interior frames and 16 ga. for all exterior frames. 2. Provide frames bearing a a U.L. label, in the openings indicated. 3. See Drawings for frame profile and depth. All stops shall be 5/8" minimum projection unless otherwise indicated. 4. Exterior frames head and jamb members shall be mitered, set up, arc welded at miters and ground smooth. Provide temporary metal spreaders at bottom of frames to maintain rigidity during construction. 5. Interior frames mitered, set up and spot welded at miters. 6. Frame anchors shall be manufacturer's standard design for condition encountered. Provide minimum of three wall anchors per jamb along with a floor anchor at the bottom of each jamb. 7. All frame anchor fastenings shall be concealed. 8. Frames shall be chemically treated for optimum paint adherence and painted with one (1) uniform coat of rust - inhibiting quality primer, oven dried, complying with ASTM S 2247 and ASTM B 117, and ready for paint finish. 9. Frames shall be supplied with factory installed rubber bumpers (silencers),three (3) per jamb, one (1) per head. 10. Provide reinforcing: 16 ga. for strikes, 12 ga. for surface closers, 8 ga. for hinges. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: Curries, CECO, Fenestra, Steelcraft, Republic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's product data reviewed by the Architect. B. All finished work must be strong, rigid and neat in appearance. Surfaces shall be smooth, free from defects, warps and buckles, miters well formed and in true alignment. All welds shall be neatly made and ground finish. 08111 - 3 CITY RECEIVED MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER C. Furnish doors with all hardware per hardware schedule. See door hardware schedule for requirements. D. All doors shall be prefitted to frames at factory. Doors shall be fitted with the specified hardware and shall operate perfectly without bind, sag or looseness. The clearances for doors shall be 3/32 inch at jambs, head and meeting stiles, sills 1/2 inch or as indicated on Drawings. 3/8 inch clearance maximum for U.L. Labelled doors at sills. E. Manufacturer shall mortise,drill and tap doors and frames for surface mortise or unit type hardware in accordance with templates for the hardware furnished by the hardware supplier. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section straight and plumb within a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically, rigidly anchoring into position for long life under hard use. Perform all drilling and cutting required. B. Doors and frames shall be installed by others -plumb and in true alignment. C. Frames shall be rigid and securely anchored in place. D. Adjust all fire labeled frames to tolerances required by NFPA 80, Section 2 -5.4. E. Doors shall be installed in a manner to achieve the intended functional operation and appearance. F. Install labelled doors in compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories requirements for the indicated rating. G. Doors with dents or other defects not repairable will be rejected. 08111 - 4 C H. At sound retardant doors, tightly pack frames and rough openings with rockwool insulation or grout solid. Provide extra bracing as required to support heavier doors. I. Frames against concrete or masonry to be grouted solid. END OF SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes doors and fixed panels of solid or hollow core construction with wood or plastic laminate veneer faces. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Metal Door Frames Section 08111 Wood Windows Section 08600 Finish Hardware Section 08710 Glass and Glazing Section 08800 Painting Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standard specified herein and listed in Section 01085. B. Doors shall comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards and Guide Specifications for Premium Grade. C. Doors shall comply with National Woodworking Manufacturer's Association (NWMA) Industry Standards. D. Provide Fire doors manufactured to U.L. Standards and bearing appropriate U.L. Labels. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 08200 - 1 C17y VFD Mq � O r `''`w' � 619 98 pFRMiT CENTER. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1.05 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. A maximum allowable warp or twist of doors shall be 1/4" using the NWMA testing method. Doors not meeting this requirement are subject to rejection. B. The allowable gap at jambs, head and meeting stiles shall be 3/32 ". Edges of both stiles shall be beveled 1/8" in 2 ". C. Size tolerances: 1. Thickness: +/ -1/16 inch 2. Length: +1-1/16 inch 3. Widths: +/ -1/16 inch 4. Prefit widths: +/ -1/32 inch D. Squareness Tolerance: diagonal measurement difference shall not exceed 1/8 inch. E. Factory Hardware Preparation Tolerances: 1. Hinges: +/ -1/32 inch 2. Lock cut outs: 0 - 1/32 inch F. Stile, rail and core telegraphing not acceptable. G. The sill undercut shall be 1/2" or as indicated on Drawings. 3/8" maximum clearance undercut for U.L. label doors. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Furnish a manufacturer's written guarantee stating that all doors will be of good materials and workmanship and that doors will be guaranteed against excessive warpage as follows: 1. Solid Core: a. Interior installation - lifetime b. Exterior installation - two (2) years 08200 - 2 C 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate door preparation work with finish hardware and hollow metal frame supplier for items to be installed in doors so proper allowances can be made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wood doors shall be of the sizes, types and designs as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 DOORS A. Stile and rail interior & exterior doors: 1. Grade 2. Thickness 3. Glue 4. Core 5. Face skins 6. Edge 7. Finish 8. Glazing PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AWI Premium 1 3/4" Type I, exterior waterproof. Solid stock hardwood or softwood Plain sliced Red Oak Solid stock hardwood to match face Field stain, and Clear finish. Factory glazed per Section 08800 (Wood stops only) A. Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturer's product data and as reviewed by the Architect. B. Manufacturer shall machine doors for specified hardware, with the exception of through - bolts, pilot holes for screws, and other similar drilling operations, in accordance with current recommendation and standards of the NWMA and the Door Hardware Institute. C. The utility or structural strength of the door must not be impaired in the fitting of the door, the application of hardware, or cutting and altering the doors for lights, louvers or other special details. 082 ,/1r � F vW I � A HAR o 619 E RMiT ceNT 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Initial Inspection of Doors: Prior to start of installation of each door, carefully inspect the door and verify: 1. That the door furnished is the proper door for the opening, as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. 2. That the door is in sound condition, unblemished, without warp, twist, bow or other attributes causing it to be rejected upon in- stallation. B. Handling: Carry wood doors, do not drag them. Use extreme care in handling. C. Fitting: Trim all wood doors as necessary to provide a uniform clearance of between 1/8" and 3/16" at jambs and head, and a uniform clearance at the threshold or floor to properly clear the floor covering described on the Finish Schedule in the Drawings. D. Installing: For each door, verify the hardware type as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings and verify that hardware actually supplied is the hardware specified. Using only the specified hinges or butts, and the proper equipment for the purpose,install the door into the opening with the following hinge or butt locations throughout the Work: 1. Top hinge or butt:The center of the hinge or butt not more than 11" below the top of the door. 2. Bottom hinge or butt:The center of the hinge or butt not more than 13" above the finish floor. 3. Intermediate hinge: Equidistant between the top and bottom hinge, butt, or pivot. E. Finish Preparation of Wood Doors: With fine sandpaper, working only in the direction of the grain of the wood, remove all rough edges resulting from door trimming and leave the installed door in condition to receive its final finish. END OF SECTION J 17 08300 ACCESS DOORS C PART] 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. At locations shown on Drawings or as required by access needs, provide wall or ceiling access doors. 1.02 Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION A. Provide Inryco /Milcor or equal access doors of type as required by type of construction. B. Provide flush keyed access lock and full width or height "piano" hinge. C. Provide U.L. listed, fire rated doors where required by type of construction. D. Finish surface to match adjacent wall or ceiling surface and paint to match. 3.01 Install neat and square and in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 0830 q E/V of r uicw/LA MAR 06 98 P ERM /T ccNTE C C 08600 WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all wood and aluminum -clad -wood window frames, stops, jamb extensions, mullion /muntin extensions, and accessories, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Provide factory glazing of windows unless otherwise coordinated with General Contractor. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sealants and Caulking Section 07900 Wood doors Section 08200 Glass and Glazing Section 08800 Painting Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01085. B. Comply with General Requirements of "ANSI /NWMA Industry Standard for Wood Window Units I.S.2" by National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA), except to extent more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Performance and Testing: Provide windows which have been tested and labeled for structural performance (ASTM E 330), air infiltration (ASTM E 283), and water penetration (ASTM E 547). D. Manufacturer's published data. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit Manufacturer's Product Data and Drawings showing all of the window types indicated or required. C. Provide actual samples of exterior custom color cladding materials, matching colors as specified herein, for Architect/ Owner approval. 08600 - 1 T(Jk MAR o S 19 98 pFRM/T cenm ,. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable wrapping or coating to protect surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Frame and Sash 1. Material: Select kiln dried Western Pine, Water repellant and preservative treated in accordance with NWWDA IS.4, exterior surfaces extruded aluminum, custom coated for color. Exterior surfaces clad with roll formed aluminum, folded, locked and gasketed at corners. 2. Frame size nominal per manufacturers standard "Clad Casement Series" window. Jamb extensions as detailed. 4. Joints double Mortised and tenoned, glued and metal fastener, with corrosion resistant screws to allow reglazing. 5. Section Profile: "Clad Wood Casement" - Fixed Lite 6. Finish: Exterior aluminum finishes shall be finished with baked -on high - solids acrylic polyester paint to meet or exceed standards required by AAMA specification #603.8, Color custom to match PT -7 on Architectural Finish Schedule; Sherwin Williams VC -4547. 7. Attachment device: Manufacturer's recommended clips or screws. 8. Glazing Factory glaze per Section 08800, insulated double glazed fixed unit. 9. Stops Removable clad wood. Putty not allowed. 10. Flashing As detailed on Drawings and Section 07600 11. Vent operation: N/A (Fixed lite). 12. Hardware N /A. 13. Screen N /A. 14. Weatherstripping Continuous vinyl all four sides between frame and sash. 09600 - 2 C C 15. Muntin Grid Integral wood muntin, true divided light. B. Interior relight Sash unit. (True divided lights) 1. Material 3. Sash size 4. Joints 5. Section Profile 6. Finish 9. Glazing 10. Stops 11. Muntin Grid 2.02 PERFORMANCE Western Pine Nominal 1 5/8 "x2 3/4" Mortised and tenoned, glued and metal fastener Wood Casement - Fixed Lite Factory prime for field painting per Section 09900. Factory glaze per Section 08800, clear float. Removable wood. Putty not allowed Integral wood muntin, true divided light, per detail Drawings A. Manufactured units shall meet ANSI /NEMA Standard I.S.2 for Class "A" window when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, (structural performance) , ASTM E283, (air infiltration) , and ASTM E331 (water infiltration). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all weatherstripping, glazing and mounting accessories as needed to provide a complete installation. 2.04 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERS A. Fixed Windows 1. Pella, Rolscreen Company, Architect series, wood clad casement, Pozzi Clad Casement Window series, Hillsdale Windows, or Marvin Clad windows, per Owner Approval, provide manufacturer at time of BID. 0060 AJAR s 19 98 PERMIT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Provide frames in manufacturers standard shapes and profiles as shown on drawings. B. Provide all glazing accessories as required for a complete, weathertight window system. C. Provide windows with minimum 110 grit finish sanding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows per manufacturers instructions. B. Use a sufficient number of ancorage devices to securely attatch the unit to the structure, and as reccommended for the local wind load zone. C. Align frame plumb, level and square, free of warp or twist. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove Protective material from surfaces. B. In addition to the requirements of Section 01700 of these Specifications, and prior to acceptance of the Work, remove all labels, paint spots, putty and other defacements. END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes all hardware required for proper operation, fastening and locking of movable parts shown on Drawings and whether or not listed in the hardware schedule. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Finish Carpentry Cabinet Hardware Metal Doors & Frames Wood Doors 1.03 STANDARDS Section 06200 Section 06410 Section 08111 Section 08200 A. Where doors carry a U.L. Label for fire rating, all hardware applied to that door shall comply to and for that rating. B. All hardware shall meet the security standards of the local jurisdiction. C. All hardware shall comply with the governing building code and handicap access regulations. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant with technical experience necessary to correctly and efficiently service this hardware contract. Said consultant shall be a member of DHI and shall be available to the Owner or his representative for consultation at all times and shall direct application and final adjustment. B. The types listed are to be used as a guide for quality and operation and not to be construed as a complete list. Detail hardware requirements for each individual situation to suit job conditions. C. The detailing of the hardware requirements shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier. D. Workmanship and finish of hardware shall be free from blemishes and defects. Each item shall be properly wrapped in 08 7cy REC � F TV �WIL,q MAR 0 6 1998 a separate package distinctly labelled and numbered for each and every opening for which it is intended and in accordance with the Hardware Schedule. E. No later than two (2) weeks after approval of hardware schedule make available to door and frame manufacturers a complete set of required hardware templates and schedules. F. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life, and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, sex bolts, toggle bolts, or other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Furnish all items of hardware not definitely specified or listed but required for competition and proper installation of the work; provide type and quality suitable for service required and comparable to the kind specified for similar use. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Complete hardware schedule of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. List hardware for each opening separately in number order, listing material, finish and number. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. 3. Sufficient dimensional data to enable coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. All hardware shall be factory guaranteed, free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year after acceptance of the building. B. Door closers shall carry a factory five year guarantee. 08710 - 2 C C PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hardware types and sizes shall be as listed on drawings and as specified herein. B. Closer: All closers sized to an in conformance with factory recommendations. Door closers shall in no case restrict swing of doors, but shall allow door to open as far as conditions permit. List and verify degree of opening for all closers. C. Cylinders and Latches: Strikes to have extended lip where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. All lock and latch sets to be furnished with box type strikes. Furnish reinforcing units for all metal doors. D. Stops and Holders: Check Drawings for suitability and method of anchorage. Provide stops wherever a door or an item of hardware on a door might contact a wall or other type of the building construction of types as scheduled. E. Door Silencers: All doors shall receive silencers, except labelled firedoors and exterior doors, three (3) per single door and four (4) per double door. F. Butts: 1 -1/2 pair, 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 inch. per door, unless otherwise noted. G. See Section 06200, Finish Carpentry and Section 06410, Custom Cabinetry for additional hardware. H. Any substitution in hardware from that specified must be submitted in advance, per Section 01640. 2.02 FINISH A. General finish of all exposed hardware to be US3 (605), bright brass and US26D (626) satin chrome, as indicated. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE' MANUFACTURERS SCHEDULE: Butts Stanley, Lawrence, Hager Locks, Latches, Cylinders Schlage Push Plates, Pull Plates, Quality, BBW, Trimco, Ives 08710 - 3 . MAR r�Kw 0 6 1998 PERMlr cEN,,._ Kick Plates, Flush Bolts Quality, BBW, Trimco, Ives Closers LCN, Norton, Sargent Stops Ives, Glynn Johnson Thresholds, Door Bottoms Pemko, Reese, National Guard Weatherstripping Pemko, Reese Exit Alarms Detex One Way Viewer Ives Panic Exit Devices Von Duprin 2.04 KEYS AND KEYING A. It shall be mandatory that keying be done by a registered locksmith for security, Owner's convenience, and permanent keying records maintained by the locksmith. B. Provide 5 master keys and 3 change keys for each lock or as directed by Owner. C. Provide construction cylinders and keying during construction period. 2.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE - See Drawings for Schedule and List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Deliver to the job site all finished hardware except that which is to be delivered to other Subcontractors as directed. A complete hardware schedule and installation pamphlets shall accompany the delivery. Deliver all hardware items complete with necessary parts for fitting, installing and as required for proper perfect operation. 08710 - 4 C C 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locations: Using only the specified finish hardware, and the proper equipment for the purpose, install all finish hardware in the following locations throughout the Work: 1. Combination push- and - Centered 40 -1/4" above the finish floor pulls: 2. Door pulls on plates:Centered 40 -1/4" above the finish floor 3. Door pulls - sectional: Centered 40 -1/4" above the finish floor 4. Door - closing devices:Install and adjust in strict accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. Insofar as practicable, doors opening to or from halls or corridors shall have the closer mounted on the room side of the door. 5. Extension level flush In the edge of the door. bolts: Center to bolt: fronts 12" from top edge of the door and 12" from the bottom. 6. Kick plates:On single acting doors: with kick plate on push side. On double - acting doors: with kick plate on both sides 7. Mortise deadlock: Center 60" above finish floor 8. Knob lock and knob: Center 40 -1/4" above the finish latch strikes: floor 9. Panic bolt cross bars: Align in horizontal position with top and bottom bolts and rods aligned vertically. Install the center line of strike 40 -5/16" above the finish floor. 10. Push bars, single: Centered 42" above the finish floor 11. Push plates: Centered 48" above the finish floor 12. Other hardware items: Install as directed by manufacturer not described above: 08718, OF r 74F. U KWICq AR a 6 19 M 98 Pen/41r ceivrea 3.03 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove all protective materials and wipe all surfaces clean. B. Adjust all operative hardware for proper and smooth action. Align all gasket weatherstripping for proper fit and use. END OF SECTION. C 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all glass and glazing, and insulated glass units, complete and in place, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or needed for a complete and proper installation, in compliance with local codes for energy conservation and governing codes for safety glazing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Glass and Glazing are required under various Sections of these Specifications. Wood Doors Steel Doors Wood Windows 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01085. B. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. C. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. 1.04 GUARANTEE FART 2 PRODUCTS Section 08200 Section 08111 Section 08600 A. Provide a written guarantee stating that the specified insulating glass units will not, for a period of five (5) years from date of final acceptance of building, develop material obstruction of vision between the interior glass surfaces caused be failure of the hermetic seal due to the faulty manufacture of the unit. 2.01 GLASS A. General: Glass types are described by application in paragraph "D" below. 08 8 0 aTtI V MAR OF T�KWICq Q 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER B. Tempering: Provide heat - strengthened (tempered) glass where called for on the Drawings or in these Specifications, and where such heat- strengthening or tempering would be required under provisions of the governing building code. C. Thickness: As required by code for size of opening. D. Glass Types: 1. EXTERIOR WOOD WINDOWS: 1" thick insulating glass, hermetically sealed unit with dehydrated air space, comprised of two sheets of 1/4" minimum thickness, clear, float glass, complying with Fed. Spec. DD -G -451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, and transmittance of 89% in the 1/4" thickness. U = .60, Sc - .91. 2. EXTERIOR DOORS: 5/8" thick insulating glass, hermetically sealed unit with dehydrated air space, comprised of two sheets of clear, tempered, float glass, complying with Fed. Spec. DD -G -451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, and transmittance of 89% in the 1/4" thickness. U = .60, Sc = 1.0 (total assembly). 3. INTERIOR RELIGHTS AND DOORS: Single sheet of 1/4" minimum thickness, clear float glass, complying with Fed. Spec. DD -G -451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, with transmittance of 89% in the 1/4" thickness. Tempered at doors and sidelights, or where otherwise required by code. 4. MIRRORS: Mirror glass consisting of 1/4" thick, clear, float glass, silver coated and hermetically sealed with uniform .0002" coating of electrolytic copper. Per Fed. Spec DDM -411 and a clear varnish seler on back and edges meeting Fed. Spec TT -V- 00121. E. Field measurement: Glass sizes shown on Drawings are approximate. Sizes and proper edge clearances shall be determined by measuring the actual opening to receive glass. 2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND SEALANTS A. General: use glazing compounds and preformed glazing sealants approved for the application, and except as otherwise specified, conforming to the Glazing Materials portion of the FGMA Glazing Manual. C ( 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Provide all glazing accessories required to supplement those accessories which accompany the items to be glazed, and as needed to provide a complete installation, including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads, settling blocks, and spacer strips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Selection of Glass: Where plate glass is indicated, float glass may be used. 2. Distortion: Cut and install glass with the visible lines or waves running with the horizontal direction. 3. Fix moveable items securely, or in a closed and locked position, until glazing compound has thoroughly set. 4. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40° F. 5. Perform glazing on dry surfaces only. B. Glass setting 1. Items to be glazed shall be shop - glazed or field - glazed with glass of the quality and thickness specified. 2. Prepare surrounds and glass, unless otherwise directed, in conformance with the details and general conditions governing glazing in the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual. 3. Use beads or stops furnished with the items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. 4. All glass to be set with the FGMA recommended clearance 088 0 d)1 R E T v MAR 0 5 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3.03 CLEANING and isolation from frame or sash using appropriate setting blocks, spacers, tapes, beads, sealants or compounds. 5. Glass shall be set "flat" with no visible twist, torque, bending or other detrimental induced stress. 6. Provide final sealing of all glazed openings against the penetration of air or water. In addition to the requirements of Section 01700 of these Specifications, and prior to acceptance of the Work, thoroughly clean all glass and remove all labels, paint spots, putty and other defacements. END OF SECTION 0 C DIVISION 9 FINISHES C 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09330 QUARRY TILE 09510 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 09680 CARPETING 09900 PAINTING 09970 PREFINISHED PANELS 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION C A. Work in this Section includes unfinished gypsum wallboard on wood, metal, and solid substrates; gypsum backing board for other finishes; joint taping and finishing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Painting Section 09900 Rough Carpentry Section 06100 1.03 STANDARDS A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C -36, latest revision. B. Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C -442, latest revision. C. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C -630, latest revision. D. Fasteners: ASTM C -646, latest revision. E. Conform to code requirements to achieve fire rating of walls, ceilings, ceiling -floor and ceiling -roof assemblies and column and beam protection which require joint taping of gypsum wallboard assemblies, even when finishing is not required for decorative purposes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Moisture Content of Substrate: Do no taping or finishing of gypsum wall board surfaces until the moisture content of substrate is 15% or less. C. Temperature: Do no taping or finishing of gypsum wallboard surfaces until the interior temperature has been maintained at a minimum of 55 degrees F for a period 09250 - wa elymmA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT OENTEa of at least 24 hours. D. Temporary Heat: Temporary heat for interior work shall be provided as specified under Section 01500. The heat and method shall be sufficient to allow all coats of taping and finishing compound to dry to a maximum of 15% moisture within 72 hours. E. Ventilation: Coordinate the work so that adequate continuous ventilation is provided, in conjunction with temporary heat to insure proper drying. F. Lighting: Do not proceed with the work in any room unless lighting level of 15 candlepower per square foot is available. 1.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces that do not receive wallboard finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard 1. Comply with Fed. Spec. SS- L -30D, Type III, Class 1, style 3, tapered- edged, and of the grade and form specified below, in 48" widths and in such lengths as will result in the minimum of joints. 2. Fire Retardant: Grade Type "X ", Form A, 5/8" thick for single ply, 1/2" thick for double ply ASTM C36 -78. 3. Moisture Resistant: Grade MR -X, 5/8" thick, asphalt treated core and water repellent paper face per ASTM C -79. B. Adhesive (Adhesive -Stud Application): Drywall stud adhesive. C. Joint Tape: Furnished perforated, cross - laminated, reinforced paper. 09250 - 2 C C ( D. Taping Compound: Furnish specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding of tape at wallboard joints compatible with the tape and substrate; do not mix vinyl -base and casein -base formulations for any one coat. E. Finishing Topping Compound: Furnish specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound; do not mix vinyl base and casein -base formulations for any one coat. F. All Purpose Compound: Furnish specifically designed to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound compatible with the tape and substrate. G. Compound Form: Furnish compounds for taping and finishing in either powder or premixed forms, of compatible chemical composition with previous and successive coats of compound applied joints, fasteners, and trim. H. Suspended Metal Drywall Furring System. 2. All members shall be galvanized steel. 1. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive system of components as required for a complete installation including but not limited to furring runners, tees, cross tees, wall channels, hanger wires, clips, angle reinforcement and bracing. 3. Furring tees shall be spaced 16" o/c maximum and 8" from ends of each gypsum panel. 4. System design and hanger spacing shall accommodate mechanical and lighting loads as shown on drawings. 5. Loading of any suspension component may not cause deflection of more than 1/360 of the span. 6. Laterally brace system per Section 09510 Part 3.02, E by local code. I. Metal Trim 1. Trims: Furnish trims for corners, expansion joints, exposed edges, edges abutting dissimilar materials and where detailed or noted on the Drawings, specifically designed for such installations, and of type to meet the requirements of the work in this 09250 ::::::::: Section and any code requirements for fire ratings to be achieved by the installation or system. 2. Trim Features: Provide hot -sip galvanized 0.0217" nominal thickness (26 gauge). 3. Casing Beads: Channel shaped with concealed wing not less than 7/8" wide, and an exposed wing. 4. Corner Beads: Provide angle shaped with wings not less than 3/4" wide. Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing shall be folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in a white color. 5. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings shall be angle - shaped with wings not less than 3/4" wide. Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing shall be folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color. J. Acoustical Furring: U.S.G. RC -1 channel or equal. K. Fasteners: Self - drilling, self- taping steel screw fasteners, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for the application involved. L. Specialty mouldings denoted "Fry" to be extruded 6063 -T5, .050 thick aluminum as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation, Alhambra, California. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard with the separate boards in moderate contact with each other but not forced into place. 2. At internal and external corners, conceal the edges of the board by overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. 3. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical 09250 - 4 C C corners. 4. Place boards perpendicular to framing wherever practical. 5. Install gypsum boards on ceiling first, then on walls. B. Ceilings: Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with the long dimension of the wallboard at right angles to the supporting members, except that wallboard may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting members that are spaced 16" on center when attachment members are provided at end joints. C. Walls: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard at right angles to the furring or framing members. Make end joints, where required, over furring or framing members. 2. Stagger end joints in successive corners. place end joints on opposite sides of partitions on different studs. 3. Drive fasteners in field of panel first, working toward ends and edges. 4. At fire rated exterior walls and interior bearing walls, install gypsum board full height from floor to floor or ceiling structure above, including in floor /ceiling and attic spaces. 5. Provide moisture resistant board in kitchen, on "wet walls" in other rooms (i.e. walls on which plumbing fixtures are located), and all walls indicated on drawings to receive MRGWB. D. Attaching: Drive the specified screws with clutch - controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the screws 12" on centers at ceilings and 12" on centers at walls. 3.02 JOINT TREATMENT A. General 1. Inspect all areas to be joint treated, ascertaining that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against 09250 - 5C� RECEIVE MAR U 6 1998 '°ERor CENTER supporting framework. 2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F for 24 hours prior to commencing treatment, for the entire period of treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. 3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. 4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas. 5. Taping not required on gypsum wallboard surfaces that are: a. Above ceilings, behind acoustic tile, in concealed spaces, behind rigid surface paneling or on base layers or multi -layer systems, except as required for fire resistant ratings. b. On draft stops in attic spaces. c. Under ceramic tile on water resistant board or tile backer types of gypsum wallboard. d. Where tongue and groove edged backer board is installed to achieve fire resistance ratings for the assembly installed. B. Embedding Compound: Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. Spread the compound not less than 3" wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6" wide at joints, and feather edged. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to elimate ridges and high points. 3.03 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, except that the reinforcing tape shall be folded lengthwise through the middle and fitted neatly into the corner. 09250 - 6 C C B. External Corners: 1. Install a corner bead fitting neatly over the corner and secured with the same type fassteners used for applying the wallboard, spacing the fasteners approximately 6" on centers and driving through the wallboard into the framing or furring member. 2. After the cornerpiece has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" to 10" on each side of the corner. 3.04 OTHER METAL TRIM A. General: The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and all requirments for metal trim in connection with the work of this Section. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation; provide in place all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard used. B. Installation: Install the metal trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation,providing not less embedment and finishing than specified above for corner treatment. 3.05 TEXTURING A. Finishing Compound (smooth surface finish): After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to all joints and fastener heads. Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12" wide. When thoroughly dry, snadpaper to obtain uniformly smooth surfaces, taking all necessary care to not scuff the paper surface of the wallboard. 3.06 LIGHT FIXTURE TENTS A. In all fire -rated ceilings, provide 5/8" type "X" gypsum board tents over light fixtures that penetrate ceiling material. 09250 7CITy OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3.07 CLEANING UP A. In addition to the requirments of Section 01700 of these Specifications, use all necessary care during execution of this portion of the work to prevent scattering of gypsum wallboard scraps and dust and to prevent tracking of joint and finishing compound onto floor surfaces. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris, and surplus material of this Section. END OF SECTION (7 09310 CERAMIC TILE l.. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installation of vertically and horizontally set ceramic tile, accesories, trims, grout, setting materials, and associated protection of tile after installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Quarry Tile Section 09330 1.03 STANDARDS A. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation published by the Tile Council of America. B. ANSI Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Measure and carefully coordinate layout of patterns to achieve desired results, confirm with Architect and Interior Designer where questions arise prior to installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide (2) samples of each tile and grout color for Architect /Owner approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CERAMIC TILE A. Furnish only Standard Glazed Tile meeting ANSI A 137.1. 1. See Finish Legend on Drawings for color and size, Note Subfloor system is concrete topping over plywood subfloor. 09310 RECAVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 2.02 RELATED MATERIALS A. Tile accessories: Furnish bullnoses etc. as required. B. Latex- Portland Cement Mortar: C. Latex - Portland Cement Grout: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION all sanitary coves, trims, ANSI A118.4. ANSI A118.6. A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Condition of Surfaces: 1. Surfaces shall be clean, fee of cracks, films, oils and curing compounds. Concrete slabs shall be cured and dry. 2. Maximum variation of surfaces to receive tile shall be: a. Floors: 1/4" in 10 feet from required plane. b. Walls: 1/4" in 8 feet from required plane. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install tiles in full pieces, center and balance in areas if possible. 2. For partial tiles, cut, do not split. 3. Provide expansion and control joints per reccommendations and Tile Council of America specifications. 4. Mix all mortar and grouts in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 09310 - 2 J; B. Setting and Grouting: Install in accordance with the following listed specifications: (see Finish Legend for exact locations.) 1. Walls: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar per ANSI A108.5. 2. R/R Floors: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar per ANSI A108.5. 3. Other Floors: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar per ANSI A108.5. C. Cleaning: Clean all grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials are still workable. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cover tile with visqueen and plywood to protect. B. Protect adjacent surfaces when installing and cleaning tile. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide Owner with extra 2% of each tile type for future repairs. B. Provide 1 -101b. bag of each grout color, wrapped in moisture resistant plastic bag. END OF SECTION C 09330 QUARRY TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installation of horizontally set quarry tile, grout, base, accessories, and associated protection after installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Ceramic Tile Sealants Mechanical, through floor connections Electrical, through floor connections 1.03 STANDARDS Section 09310 Section 07920 Division 15 Divisions 16 A. Comply with all standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation published by the Tile Council of America. C. ANSI Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Tile: Unglazed, standard grade, dense extruded, 1/2" thick, quarry tile conforming to ANSI A- 137.1, current edition. See Finish Legend on Drawings for color and size. Additionally provide 4 ",x 8" x 1/4" finish transition tiles, cove base tiles and corner trims. B. Mortar Bed: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar per ANSI A118.4. C. Typical Grout: Latex - Portland cement grout, Color per Drawings. D. Specialty Grout: Epoxy based grout system by Laticrete, Refer to Finish Drawings for locations. 09330 - 1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 DI:OIUIT /•CArrrn PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - FLOORS A. Set and grout tile with latex - portland cement mortar /grout per ANSI A- 108.5. Epoxy grout areas shall follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing, application and clean -up. B. Install tiles in full pieces, center and balance in areas if possible. C. For partial tiles, cut, do not split. 3.02 BASE: A. Install base over w. r. gypsum board fully blocked, or concrete curb. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cover tile with kraft paper and plywood to protect. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide Owner with extra 2% tile of each type, and shape for future repairs. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Clean grout from surface of tiles an abutting surfaces. END OF SECTION 17 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS C PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide acoustical ceiling complete and in place, including all associated hardware, as shown on Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 Painting Section 09900 1.03 STANDARDS A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. B. Acoustical Ceiling Tile 1. Federal Specification SS-S-1188, Class A, latest revision, U.L. 25 or less. 2. Fire Hazard Rating: ASTM E 84 -79c, (0 -25) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTIC TILE A. See Finish Legend on Drawings for materials. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General 1. Framing shall comply with referenced standards for intermediate duty. 2. Framing shall be electrogalvanized steel or aluminum. B. At public areas, provide U.S.G Donn DX series 2' x 2' or 2' x 4' exposed 15/16" tee bar grid, per Reflected Ceiling Plan, color to match tile, low sheen. System is intended to be custom painted with a latex synthetic paint per Finish Schedule. 09510 - 1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR Q 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER C. Where designated on Finish Schedule, provide glue on acoustical units attached to a gypsum board ceiling substrate per manufacturer's requirements. D. At kitchen /service areas, provide gypsum wallboard suspension system. System may be a tee bar system or a system of cold rolled channels with perpendicular hat channels at 16" o.c. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUSPENSION - GRID INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install ceiling system per referenced standards. B. Main runners shall be installed 48 inches on center, and be directly suspended by not less than 12 gage galvanized steel wire spaced 48 inches on center along the main runners. Hanger wires shall be wrapped tightly at least 3 full turns. C. Main runners shall be interconnected by cross tees at 24" centers for 24" x 24" modules. Proper length cross tees shall also be installed adjacent to all recessed light fixtures or supply and return diffusers on each side not supported by a main runner. D. Wall angle mouldings shall be installed wherever suspension components meet vertical surfaces. E. Provide extra hanger wires at each corner of light fixtures and at all points where tees are interrupted by light fixtures. F. Attachment devices to be of an approved type capable of carrying 5 times the ceiling load (50 #). G. Hangers to be plumb or counter splayed and not press against pipe or duct insulation. H. Deflection shall be limited to 1/360 or .133" (1/8 ") in a 4' span. If the fixture causes a deflection in excess of the 1/8 ", the fixture shall be independently supported or the grid shall be supplementally supported within 6" of each corner with a #12 wire. I. A fixture installation shall not cause the runners to rotate more than 2° from the vertical (this is the equivalent of a 1/32" out of horizontal for a standard 1' tee). 09510 - 2 C J. Carrying channels and main runners are to be level within 1/8" in 12 feet; leveling is to be performed with hangers taut;, kinks or bends are not be be used as a way of leveling. 3.02 SUSPENSION - GRID INSTALLATION LATERAL BRACING REQUIREMENTS: (FOR STANDARD TEE BAR GRIDS WHEN NOT SUPPORTING PARTITIONS) A. Hangers to be a minimum of #12 gage, galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire @ 4' o.c. each way. Hangers to be attached to suspension members and to the support above with a minimum of three turns. Hangers shall not attach to or bend around other material or equipment and shall not be more than 1 in 6 out of plumb without being counter splayed. B. All connection devices shall be of an approved type capable of supporting 100#'s and be secured to the building structure. C. A trapeze or equivalent shall be used where obstructions preclude direct attachment to the structure. Trapeze suspension shall be a minimum of back to back 1 -1/4" cold rolled channels where spans exceed 48 ". D. All runners shall be independently supported at the perimeter within 8" of the wall or ceiling discontinuity; the wall angle or closure strip shall not be allowed for this purpose. E. Within 4' of the walls at 12' o.c. in each direction, 4 -#f12 ga. wires shall be connected within 2" of an intersection of a main runner with a cross runner and splayed 90° from each other at an angle not exceeding 45° from the plane of the ceiling. 1. A strut fastened to the main runner shall be extended to and fastened to the structural members supporting the roof or floor above. The strut shall be adequate to resist the vertical component induced by the wires. 2. Lateral force bracing members shall be spaced a minimum of 6 inches from all horizontal piping or duck work that is not provided with bracing restraints for horizontal forces. Bracing wires shall be attached to the grid and to the structure in such a manner that they can support a design 'load of not less than 200 pounds or the actual design load, whichever is greater, with a safety factor of 2 . F. Members perpendicular to the wall shall be tied together (stablizied) to prevent their spreading. This shall be done immediately adjacent and parallel to the wall. The wall or closure angle shall not be used for this purpose, although to facilitate installation, runners may be attached to the 09510 - 3 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 closure angle at two adjacent walls with clearances between the wall and the runner being maintained at the other two walls. G. All light fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspension system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of 100% of the fixture weight in any direction. H. Only intermediate -duty and heavy -duty suspension systems shall be used to support light fixtures. I. With intermediate -duty suspension systems, the grid members shall have supplemental support within 3" of each corner of the fixture with a #12 ga. hanger. Where heavy -duty suspension systems are used, supplemental support is not required. J. In addition to the above, fixtures or other equipment weighting more than 20# but less than 56# shall have two #12 ga. wires from the housing to the structure above or to other hanger wires. These wires may be slack. Fixtures or other equipment weighing in excess of 56# shall be independently supported with #12 ga. wire at each corner to the structure above. Pendant hung fixtures shall be independently supported with a minimum of one #9 ga. wire. 3.03 LAY -IN PANEL INSTALLATION A. Center and balance areas of tile, if possible. B. An excessive amount of cuts shall not be made. Usually, no cuts smaller than half size should not be made. Make all cuts on the outer edges of the field. C. Install the tile without jagged or flaked edges. No visible cut edges allowed. D. Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons or other similar devices. E. Install whole tiles wherever possible. The splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. F. Make cutouts for all penetrations of lights, mechanical and fire sprinkler systems. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish an additional 5% of each tile color, size, style and pattern for Owner's use. 09510 - 4 END OF SECTION 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Leave all tile clean and free of dust or discoloration. Replacedamaged or discolored units at no additional cost to the Owner. 09680 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all materials, labor, adhesives, and accessories necessary to completely unload, store, install, and protect all carpet. 1.02 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. Refer to Section 01014 for Owner supplied Carpet. Owner will supply carpet roll goods and have delivered to site. Contractor shall unload, store, and otherwise install carpet and associated accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein as listed in Section 01085. B. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when reviewed by the Architect, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. FART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet: See Finish Schedule Legend on Drawings. B. Mastic for direct glue -down: waterproof type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Seam Adhesive shall be W.W. Henry Company number 246, Roberts Company number 41 -0502 latex carpet seaming adhesive, or an equal recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved carpet. D. Provide other accessories and materials,required to complete installation 0 9 6 8 qiEL'EIkD CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Immediately prior to installation of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all substrata and remove all oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other items which would adversely affect the bond of adhesive. B. Smoothing: Make all substrata level and free from irregularities. Assure one constant floor height after carpet is installed, grinding high spots and filling low spots as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install carpeting where indicated. Installation shall be direct glue -down. B. Carpet shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be laid in continuous matching pattern, square with the lines of the room. All seams shall be smoothly and continuously joined utilizing an approved steam -type adhesive backing tape. The final installation shall provide a carpeted surface that is smooth, lays completely flat, without wrinkles, ripples, or surface irregularities. All finished seams shall not be noticeable under normal visual observation. 3.04 CLEAN -UP A. In addition to the requirements of section 01700, thoroughly clean all carpet surfaces prior to final acceptance of the carpeted areas by Owner. B. Installed carpet shall be free of spots, dirt or soil, and shall be without tears, frays or pulls. C. Any damage to paint, walls, woodwork, doors, etc., during installation shall be the responsibility of the carpet contractor to repair. D. No installation will be accepted until inspected by representatives of the Architect, Contractor, Owner and carpet installer. 09680 - 2 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide a heavy non - staining paper or plastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of foot traffic, maintaining intact until carpeted space is accepted by Owner. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Paint and finish all exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the Painting Schedule in Part 2 of this Section, in accordance with the types of finish shown on the Finish Schedules in the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Priming and finishing of certain surfaces are specified to be factory performed or installer performed under pertinent other Sections. Custom Cabinetwork Section 06410 Wood Windows Section 08600 1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Do not include painting which is specified under other Sections to be completed by those trades. B. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. Note: There are exposed structural ceilings, where it is intended for ceiling to be painted. C. Prefinished metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, brass,copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be specified herein. D. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operations, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. E. Do not paint over any required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 09900 - i RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 1.04 DEFINITIONS The term "paint", as used herein, means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. Qualifications of Workers: 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of the work of this Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements of the materials and the methods needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. 2. Provide adequate numbers of workers skilled in the necessary crafts and properly informed of the methods and materials to be used. 3. In acceptance or rejection of the work of this Section, the Architect will make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of the workers. C. Paint Coordination 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. 3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the ,specific finish materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. 4. Provide barrier coats over noncompatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime as required. 5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coating supplied under other Sections. 09900 - 2 6. Contact Owner's representative for exact color and gloss locations prior to final coating. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver paint materials to the job site in sealed, original labelled containers, each bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and /or reducing. B. Storage of Materials: Provide proper storage to prevent damage to, and deterioration of, paint materials. C. Comply with Federal, State, and Local regulations regarding use of finishes for VOC compliance. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage caused by this Work. Make good any damage caused by failure to provide suitable protection, but not any damage caused by other trades. B. Removal of Flammable Rubbish: Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and daily remove from site. C. Coordinate the work with other trades that they remove all miscellaneous hardware prior to starting work under this Section. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Products List: Before ordering, submit detailed list of materials proposed for use on work. C. Drawdowns: Submit (3) sets drawdowns prepared with type of paint and application specified, samples not less than 8 -1/2" x 12" in size. D. Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes and textures are approved. Retain approved samples to be used as the quality standard for final finishes. 09900 - 3 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT MATERIALS A. Design is based on use of paint products by manufacturers listed below and other materials of those manufacturers are named in the Painting Schedule. B. General: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard best -grade product will not be acceptable. C. Durability: Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not use paint materials which will not withstand normal washing as required to remove pencil marks, ink ordinary soil, and similar material without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage. D. Colors and Glosses: See the Interior Finish Schedule Legend on the Drawings. The Owner has selected the colors to be used in the various types of paint specified and will be the sole judge of acceptibility of the various glosses obtained from the materials proposed to be used in the Work. E. Undercoats and Thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to the recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish. F. Standards 1. Provide paint materials which meet or exceed the standards listed for each application in the Painting Schedule in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Furnish coatings ready -mixed unless otherwise specified, except field mix coatings which are in paste or powder form, or to be field catalyzed, in accordance with the directions of its manufacturer. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint (General): Sherwin - Williams, Miller, Rodda, or approved substitution. B. Wallboard Primer (over tape joints and patches) and over patches on other walls: pigmented shellac or pigmented PVA. 09900 - 4 C. C 2.03 PAINT TYPES SCHEDULE A. Exterior Coatings: 1. Windows, Associated Wood trims as called out on Drawings: 1st Coat: Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer 2nd Coat: Industrial Enamel, (S -W, B54) High Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat: Industrial Enamel, (S-W, B54) High Gloss Enamel Minimum dry thickness: 6.2 mils total 2. Galvanized metal: 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: 3rd Coat: 4th Coat: Pretreatment Primer, as Acrylic Rust - Inhibitive Industrial Enamel, (S -W, Industrial Enamel, (S -W, Minimum dry thickness: required per mfr. Primer B54) High Gloss Enamel B54) High Gloss Enamel 6.0 mils total 3. Exposed Ferrous metal: 1st Coat: Alkyd Rust - Inhibitive Primer 2nd Coat: Alkyd Semi Gloss Enamel (Flat at Canopy Frames) 3rd Coat: Alkyd Semi Gloss Enamel (Flat at Canopy Frames) Minimum dry thickness: 4.2 mils total 4. Exterior Wood siding: Western Red Cedar, Opaque Finish 1st Coat: Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer 2nd Coat: Flat Latex House Paint 3rd Coat: Flat Latex House Paint Minimum dry thickness: 7.0 mils total 5. Exterior Wood Timbers: Solid Color Stain finish 1st Coat: Olympic Latex Primecoat 2nd Coat: 100% Acrylic, Solid Color Latex Stain 3rd Coat: 100% Acrylic, Solid Color Latex Stain Minimum dry thickness: 7.0 mils total B. Interior Coatings: 1. Flat wall paint: General Finish On gypsum drywall, use 1st Coat: Pigmented Shellac or PVA sealer 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Wall Paint 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Wall Paint Minimum dry thickness: 3.9 mils total 09900 - 5 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 2. Semi -Gloss enamel: On gypsum drywall, use 1st Coat: Pigmented Shellac or PVA sealer 2nd Coat: Prime undercoater 3rd Coat: Semi -gloss Alkyd Enamel Minimum dry thickness: 4.1 mils total 3. Eggshell enamel: Where called out as "Lasen" On gypsum drywall, where shown on drawings 1st Coat: Pigmented Shellac or PVA Sealer 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Egg -Shell Enamel 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Egg -Shell Enamel Minimum dry thickness: 4.1 mils total 4. Eggshell Enamel: Over Acoustical Ceiling Tile and Grid Where called out as "Lasen" 1st Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Egg -Shell Enamel 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Egg -Shell Enamel 5. Painted Wood: 1st Coat: Alkyd Enamel Undercoater 2nd Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel Minimum dry thickness: 5.2 mils total 6. Natural Finish Hardwood Trim & Doors: 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: 3rd Coat: 4th & 5th Coat: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Dye Wiping stain Sanding sealer and /or Filler with 220 grit intermediate sanding Semi -gloss Marine Spar Varnish with 220 grit intermediate sanding Minimum dry thickness: 3.0 mils total A. Do no exterior work if surface moisture from any source is present or expected before applied paints can cure. 09900 - 4 B. Do no work if temperature extremes are in excess of those recommended by manufacturers. in no case below minimum temperature of 45° F. C. Do no work on surfaces receiving less than 15 candlepower per square foot lighting levels. D. Provide adequate ventilation to materials receiving coatings per manufacturer's requirement for proper drying. 3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Before starting work in this Section, inspect all surfaces to receive coatings and verify their condition is suitable to receive work under this Section. B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect. Commencement of work will signify acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES A. Prepare surfaces to receive scheduled work under this Section as hereinafter set forth, and as supplemented by the Painting Specification Manual, latest edition. B. Interior Wood: 1. Surfaces are to have been cleaned of dirt and contamination by other trades. Wipe off dust and minor grit prior to prime and subsequent coats. 2. Fill all nail holes and fine cracks with filler prior to sanding. C. Gypsum Wallboard (Walls and Ceilings) 1. Surfaces are to be crack -free, properly finished, textured where required and left clean by other trades. 2. Remove any minor subsequent contamination, dust and dirt. 3. If surface defects appear after prime coating, have defects repaired by the drywall trade; after defects are corrected, proceed with finish painting again using primer over repaired areas. 09900 - 7 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AR 0 6 1998 'ERMIT CENTER D. Steel and Iron 1. At areas not shop primed or at shop primed surfaces field welded or abraded: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing, sandblasting, or other methods and means to clean surface. Remove dust, dirt, oil, grease; clean surface by solvent wash; apply phosphoric acid solution and let set the time recommended by the acid etch manufacturer, rinse off with potable water and, when thoroughly dry, immediately apply prime coat. 2. Galvanized or Zinc Coated metal surfaces: Remove surface contamination, wash metal with phosphoric acid or approved solution, or apply one coat of etching type primer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1. Prepare metal surfaces as specified above for "Steel" and "Galvanized Surfaces " and as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted. 3.04 PREPARATION OF PRE - PAINTED SURFACES A. Wood & Metal: 1. Remove all loose, peeling, flaking or scaling paint by scraping, chipping and sanding. 2. Feather back all rough paint edges and weathered wood to sound surfaces by sanding. 3. In extreme cases, remove old paint completely and treat as new. 4. Spot -prime bare areas as though they were new. 5. Remove the gloss from old painted surfaces, sand with proper grade sandpaper, use a wire brush, or use a liquid deglossing compound. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Apply paint or finish by methods generally accepted by the trade to achieve approved finishes, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. In multiple coat work, provide each coat of paint of slightly different color than preceding coat. 09900 - 8 C C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. E. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. F. Tint filler to match stain where clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has set, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface. G. To achieve the minimum dry thickness the following formula will be accepted: If coating "Volume Solids" (as specified by product manufacturer) is 100% then one gallon will cover 1,600 square feet at one mil dry film thickness (DFT), or 800 square feet at two mils DFT, or 400 square feet at four mils DFT. Reduces volume solids will reduce coverage proportionately to achieve same dry film thickness. 3.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Submit, in original unopened containers, one gallon of each top coat for touch up purposes. Label for positive identification. Store where directed. 3.07 CLEAN -UP /TOUCH -UP A. Touch up any blemishes on painted surface. Sand surface and refinish per specifications if necessary. B. Clean adjacent surfaces (or replace finish materials if necessary) of all paint materials or blemishes that resulted during execution of Work in this Section. END OF SECTION 099.00 RECEI ED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 09970 PREFINISHED PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes furnishings and installing Fiberglass reinforced plastic wall panels at locations shown on Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels: 1. Kemlite Corp. FRP -FR White, flat panels and accessories, Duratuf 125 DT or equal panels by Ornyte. 2. Panels size: 1/8" thick, 4 feet wide by full height of wall. 3. Panels shall have U.L. class III flame spread per ASTM E -84. B. Adhesive: Henry's No. 117 construction adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panels shall be installed directly over wall materials by adhesive and perimeter fastening with division bars and moulding sections as necessary. B. Apply adhesive with notched trowel over entire panel back. C. No horizontal seams are allowed. END OF SECTION 09970 `RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES 10200 LOUVERS & VENTS 10521 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10530 EXTERIOR FABRIC CANOPIES 10800 TOILET, BATH & MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 10900 MISCELLANEOUS (7 10200 LOUVERS & VENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION C A. Work in this Section includes furnishing and installation of through wall louvered vents at locations shown on Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Louvers: Provide one of the following models: 1. Airline Products Company: Model: XC4 /M- Intake, Gravity Louver /Damper combination. 2. The Airolite Company: Model: KN827, Extruded Aluminum Damper. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc,: Model: 4920 4" Intake automatic combination dual Damper. B. All louvers shall have Insect screening, with rodent proof mesh behind it for support. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Install per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 10200 REC EIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER C C 10521 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART J. GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes furnishing and installing portable fire extinguishers, and wall brackets. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Requirements of local jurisdictions are in force govern. B. Comply with standards specified herein and as Section 01085. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide 10 lb. capacity, 4A -60BC rated extinguishers, multi - purpose dry chemical type with pressure gauges and wall brackets at all locations. (Verify with Fire Department). Refer to plan for quantity /location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated by fire marshal. END OF SECTION and shall listed in A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. Confirm with Owner exact locations prior to installation to ensure coodination with fixtures. 10521 - RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 10530 EXTERIOR FABRIC CANOPIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes the engineering, furnishing and installation of exterior fabric canopies, including the support frame. 1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS A. Comply with standards specified herein and as listed in Section 01085. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Shop Drawings and sufficient dimensional data to enable proper coordination of installation of concealed items of support. 2. Material Samples: Minimum 6" x 12 ". 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee installation against deflects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Support frame: 1. Steel" 1" square welded tube frames. 2. All tubes, joint connectors, clips and fasteners to be galvanized steel at exterior locations. 3. All metal components factory prime painted. Refer to Painting Section 09900 for specific paint system. 10530 - 1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIlA. MAR 0 6 1998: PERMIT CENTER B. Fabric: 1. Provide Fire Retardant Treated fabrics. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION a. Manufacturer: Sunbrella. b. Style: Acrylic Canvas. c. Colors: See drawings. A. Fabricate to dimensions and details as shown on reviewed shop drawings. B. All joints in steel framing to be made by premanufactured connectors specifically designed for use with framing members or by fully welded rigid joint, ground flush and smooth. C. Fabric to be stretched taught and wrinkle free. D. All fabric seams to align with framing members and be straight and true to line. E. All fabric edges to be seamed, no raw cuts. F. Frame to be custom painted under Section 09900. Installer to allow adequate time for painting prior to fabric installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide all connectors or fasteners as required for secure attachment to building. B. Install as shown on drawings, level and true to established lines. END OF SECTION 10530 :. C C C 10800 TOILET, BATH AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes providing prefabricated accessories for use in conjunction with toilets, vanities and service areas. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Backing /Blocking Glass- Mirrors 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 06100 Section 08800 A. Comply with the standards specified herein and listed in Section 01085. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting construction. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head fasteners with finish matching the accessory. B. Finish: All accessory items shall be stainless steel with satin finish. C. Design is based on the use of products manufactured by Bobrick. D. Alternate products and manufacturers will be considered for use when submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01640. lostribuA cay MAR 0 6 i99B PERMIT CENTER 2.02 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. See Accessory Schedule on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units requiring handicap access at recommended mounting heights per ANSI A117.1 -1986. B. All accessories shall be installed with sufficient strength, together with anchorage, to sustain a dead weight of 250 pounds for five minutes at any point. C. Grab bars shall be installed with sufficient strength, together with anchorage, to sustain a dead weight of 250 pounds for five minutes at any point. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Carefully adjust accessories and leave in perfect working order. B. Clean finished surfaces and leave free from any imperfections. END OF SECTION 1 s' C 10900 MISCELLANEOUS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work Included: Provide the following items listed below. A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section and as listed in Section 01085. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Brass railing: 1. Based on TSCO manufacturing products. 2. See Drawings for details. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION 10900. REC1 , / ED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 61998 PERMIT CENTER DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12600 FURNITURE 12600 FURNITURE PART a. GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this Section includes coordination for all Owner supplied furnishings and limited installation of these furnishings as specified herein. 1.02 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. See Section 01014 - Owner Furnished Items. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Blocking and Backing Section 06100 1.03 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Properly coordinate with all other trades as required to ensure adequate provision for anchorage of the work of this Section and for proper interface with the work of all other trades. B. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FURNISHINGS A. See Section 01014 - Owner Furnished Equipment. DART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide final field assembly of furniture items, set and anchor in place. B. Make final cut -outs, install equipment therein and make final connections. END OF SECTION 12 61AcEly CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15250 Insulation 15300 Fire Protection .15350 Natural Gas Piping Systems 15400 Plumbing 15650 HVAC 15950 Controls 15990 System Balancing 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section shall be required for . all sections in this Division. This work consists of general items necessary for a complete and properly operating system. PART 2 PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Codes: Install in accordance with the latest edition of regulations of governing local, State, County, and other applicable codes, including applicable seismic zone requirements and regulations of the Utility Companies serving the project. B. Standards: All equipment and devices shall bear UL label or the label of approved testing agency. C. Should there be any direct conflict between Codes and the Drawings and /or Specifications, the Codes, rules and regulations shall govern. D. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections and connection fees required by governing bodies in connection with the work. Deliver certificates of inspection to Architect. E. All HVAC, plumbing and fire protection systems shall be installed and material supplied in strict conformance with the applicable State Administrative Code. 2.02 ERECTION AND WORKMANSHIP A. The Contractor shall adapt work to job conditions and make such changes as required and permitted by the Architect, such as moving his work to clear beams, joists, light fixtures, and adjusting his risers or other apparatus to avoid interferences with windows and openings; or raising or lowering his work to permit the passing of ductwork or the work of other trades; all as required or as job conditions, dictate, without any additional costs to the Owner. B. All appliances and equipment shall be installed and connected with the best engineering practices and in accordance with the manufacturers best instructions and recommendations. All piping, valves, connections, and similar items recommended by the manufacturer or as required for proper operation shall be provided complete, without additional cost to the Owner. C. All pipes, fixtures, traps, equipment, and other parts of the Contractor's work shall be protected against injury by freezing or other means during construction. Contractor shall identify all items required for complete installation and compare to equipment to be furnished. Any additional requirements shall be brought to the attention of the. Engineer prior to installation. D. All materials and products used for construction shall be new, of the best grade, and the latest products as listed in printed catalog data. All articles of a kind shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. Trade names and manufacturer's names denote the character and quality of equipment desired and shall not be construed as limiting competition. E. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all manufacturer's certifications required for those materials and products subject to certification regulated by the State Administrative Code for compliance with the efficiency standards. 2 03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor Qualifications and Experience: The Contractor shall be licensed in his trade in the State and locality of the project. B. Auxiliaries and Accessories: Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems'. C. Layout of Work: Drawings are diagrammatic. Correlate final equipment with governing Architectural and Structural Drawings. Lay out work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner. D Submittals: In order to facilitate review of product data, insofar as practicable they shall be noted, indicating by cross reference the Contract Drawings, note, and /or Specification paragraph numbers where item(s) occur in the Contract documents. 1. See specific sections of Specifications for further requirements. 2. Submit five (5) copies, three (3) will be returned. E Visiting the Premises: The Contractor, before submitting a bid on the work, must visit the site and familiarize himself with all visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises, the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions. F. Substitutions: Each bidder represents that bid is based upon the materials and equipment described on the Contract Drawings and in this division of the Specifications. . No substitutions will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the Owner and Architect for review and approval. Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, substituted equipment model numbers, Drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for the Engineer to determine that the equipment meets all Specifications and requirements. If the Engineer approved any proposed substitutions, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. 2. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems of this or other trades as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and Contractor shall so state in his written request for substitution. 15010 CITY; OP TUKWICA: : k..0 • ,6 1998 PERMIT,CENTE G. Record Drawings: Contractor shall maintain an up -to -date set . of prints for recording "Record" conditions. At the end of the job, all. "as- constructed" information shall be transferred to a clean set of reproducible sepias and given to the Owner's Representative for record and maintenance purposes. The Drawings shall record all deviations from the Contract Documents. These changes shall be accurately dimensioned from the building lines and reflect the depth from finish grade or finished floor. H. Guarantees: Furnish written guarantee to Owner for period of one year from time of restaurant opening and covering all defects in material and workmanship. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and material and correct the trouble promptly and without any additional cost to the Owner. Refer to General Conditions. 2.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Furnish three copies of complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Architect - Engineer for approval and for the Owner, on all equipment and systems. The manuals shall be bound in hard -back, three ring loose -leaf binders. B. Deliver the manuals to the Architect - Engineer prior to submitting application for final payment. Manual Contents: 1 Title sheet with job name,, and the names, addresses and phone numbers of the Contractor, Subcontractor, Control. Subcontractor, related contractor and material and equipment suppliers. 2. Record Drawings of electrical and control. diagrams.. 3. Test and Balance Report. 4. Copies of Certificates of Inspection. 5. Guarantees, including extended'guarantees. 2.05 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Adjustment, Operation, etc. Adjust all controls for proper operation. Adjust all regulators, faucets, etc. Open and close all shutoff and control valves several times to ensure tight glands. Furnish the services of a qualified person for a period of not less than one day, at a time approved by the Owner, to instruct the maintenance .personnel, correct any defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner, that the entire system is operating in a satisfactory manner and complies with all requirements. 2. Furnish Maintenance Manuals, Operating Instructions and Record Drawings as specified. 2.06 WORK BY OTHERS A. Chases, framed openings and roof curbs other than for roof mounted air conditioning, make -up air and exhaust fan equipment, are by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordination with the General Contractor to assure proper layout, size and location of the above items as related to the scope of the work contained in Division 15 of the Project Documents. B. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordination with the General Contractor and the other trades to assure proper layout and locations of equipment and work provided by other trades in coordination with layout and locations of equipment and work as related to the .scope of the work contained in Division 15 of the Project Documents. C. This includes the coordination and installation of the Air Conditioning and Heating Systems with that of the make -up air and kitchen hood exhaust systems which are provided and installed by a separate kitchen equipment contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION. 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS C PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS C 1.02 STANDARDS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Service weight Hub and Spigot cast iron pipe and fittings conforming to ANSI A112.5.2 or No -Hub cast iron pipe and fittings conforming to ANSI A112.5.2; with compression type gasket fittings or Code approved mechanical couplings. B. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 pipe, black or galvanized, ASTM A53. Black or galvanized malleable fittings. Screwed joints. C. Copper Tube: Hard drawn copper, Types 'L' and 'K' conforming to ANSI H23.1. Fittings shall be wrought copper solder joint . fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall be PVC sewer classification type conforming to ASTM D2239 -88, with gasket type joints conforming to ASTM D3212 (as approved by local authorities on outside utilities only).. A. Provide Submittals for the following equipment: Valves Unions Thermometers Pipe Materials: Strainers Hangers Air Vents List of all pipe materials A. Reference standards for materials involved include ASTM, FS, UPC, ANSI, etc. Where applicable, provide only products recognized and in compliance with conventional standards for the work included. E. ABS -DWV Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2661 for dimensions and tolerances for pipe, fitting sockets and laying lengths. Products shall be labeled with the UPC Shield. Solvent cement shall comply with ASTM D2235. (ABS materials shall be used only if approved by local authorities) 2 02 VALVES A. General: Commercial grade valves manufactured by Grinnell, Jenkins, Kennedy, Powell, Walworth, Crane, Nibco, Stockham, Hammond or Lunkenheimer are approved. Model and number are listed as basis for type and quality. Pressure ratings indicated are "working steam pressure ".. B. Gate Valves: 1. 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 psi working pressure, nonrising stem. Nibco 113. C. Check Valves: 1. 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 psi working pressure, swing check. Nibco 413. D. Ball Valves: 1. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, full port, 150 psi . working pressure, lever handle with stops, threaded or soldered ends to match pipe and bronze stem and ball. 2. Seats and seal shall be Buna -N for service of maximum 150F. For water service over 150F or gas service, seat and seal shall be ethylene propylene or Teflon.. Valve seat replaceable without disturbing piping either by swing away or top entry method. Nibco Model 595W for below 150F, Model 595Y above 150F. Apollo, Grinnell, Watts approved. E. Pressure Relief Valve: ASME construction. Set for pressure specified. Bi- metallic thermostat element. Size to meet, equipment capacity. McDonnell - Miller, Watts, Bell & Gossett, Cash -Acme. C C F. Gas Cocks: (gas cocks shall be approved type, for natural gas service) 1. Interior; 7 " -13" w.c. delivery pressure: a. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, tee or square head, pressure rated to 25 psi. McDonald 10552 or 10554. Hays approved. b. 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger: Iron body, bronze trimmed, flat head or square head, pressure rated to 100 psi. McDonald 10685B or 10686B. Hays approved. 2. Exterior: a. 1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, bronze trimmed, flat head or square head, pressure rated to 100 psi. McDonald 10685B or 10686B. Hays approved. 2 03 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES A. Thermometers: 1. Immersion type, with separable wells for all applications except HVAC duct installations. Commercial grade; straight, angle or adjustable mounting pattern. Vertical, liquid filled tube type or round dial with bi- metal or bourbon tube sensor type; glass or impact resistant plastic face cover. Media contact parts shall be of corrosive resistant materials 2. Each type shall be constructed and rated for the service application intended. Range: Domestic Hot Water Service: 30F to 240F 3. Ashcroft, Palmer, Trerice, Weiss approved. B. Gauges: 1. Commercial grade, similar to above requirements for thermometers; excluding well devices. Round dial, bourbon tube type, 3 inch diameter minimum size. 2. Range: Domestic Cold Water Service 0 psi to 250.psi Compressed air 0 psi to, 15 psi 5050, - 3 RECEIVED ::'.. CITY '. OF;, TUKWIl.A M AR '0 6 1998 PERMIT- CENTER. 3. Provide gauge cocks at gauges for service pressures to 60 psi, ball valves for service pressures above 60 psi. 4. Ashcroft, Palmer, Trerice, Weiss approved. 2.04 VALVES, SPECIAL SERVICE A. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, ASME /AGA rated. Sized to meet BTUH and Code requirements. Manual lever operator. ANSI listed. Stainless steel or thermal bond coated thermostat tube. Watts, Cash -Acme or approved. 2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES, ACCESSORIES A. Strainers: "Y" pattern, minimum 125 psi working pressure. Bronze, cast brass, cast iron, ductile iron, semi -steel body, threaded or flanged ends. Brass, monel or S.S. screens, maximum screen /pipe diameter area ratio relative to perforation size. Provide blowdown valve on strainer. Hoffman Series 400. Armstrong, Hayward, McAlear, Mueller or approved. B. Unions: 1. Copper Tubing Unions: 200 psi rated. Bronze body, solder joint ends. Ground joint type for piping 2 inch and smaller; flanged end type for piping 2 -1/2 inches and larger. 2. Steel Piping Unions: 150 psi rated. Malleable iron construction with brass to iron seat on ground joint type. Steel or cast iron construction with flat faced gasket seat on flanged joint type, threaded or welded ends, black or galvanized to match piping material. 3. Insulating Unions: Malleable steel or malleable steel /bronze construction. 250 psi rated, ground joint type. 175 psi rated, flanged type. 2 inch and smaller ground joint type, 2 -1/2 inches and larger flanged type. Nonmetallic insulating gasket material, rated to 210F. Electric current rating below 1 percent of galvanic current. Epco, Victaulic Clear Flow or approved. C. Escutcheons: Brass material, chrome plated finish. Size sufficient to cover all pipe openings through wall, floor or ceiling. Set screw or spring to secure to pipe. Do not provide hinged units. C 2.06 HANGERS AND INSERTS A. General: Michigan figure numbers are indicated but comparable products manufactured by Elcen, Kinline, Globe, Grinnell, Super Strut and Unistrut are acceptable. Pipe Hanger, Size 3 Inch and Smaller: Adjustable ring hanger. Black malleable, UL listed. Michigan No. 111. Carbon steel, electro- galvanized; Michigan No. 100. Copper Plated; Michigan No. 101. C. Pipe Hanger, Size 3 -1/2 Inch and Larger: Adjustable clevis hanger. Black steel, UL listed. Michigan No. 400. Copper Plated; Michigan No. 402. D. Riser Clamps: Black steel clamp; Michigan No. 510. Copper coated; Michigan No. 511. 2.07 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. General: Motors shall meet NEMA Standards and shall be suitable for the service and location shown or required. Motors shall be dripproof induction type with ball bearings unless otherwise specified. Electric motors must operate efficiently on applied line voltages varying from minus 5 percent to plus 10 percent of nameplate rating without exceeding the full load nameplate temperature rise. Refer to Division 16, Electrical, for nominal system voltage expected for this project. B Protection: Motors without built -in protection shall have separate thermal overload devices with low- voltage release or lock -out as required. Hermetically sealed motors shall have quick trip devices. Provide built -in thermal overload protection in motors not otherwise protected by external devices. C. Rating: Rate motors for continuous duty under full load. Horsepower rating shall be without service factor for the specified load. Voltage rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. Verify with Electrical. D. Manufacturers: Motors shall be Wagner, Reliance, U.S. Motors, General Electric or Century. Each motor shall have the manufacturer's identifying nameplate permanently attached. RECEIVED . CITY :OF:TUKWILA ; MAR.0 6 :1998 ; PERMIT CENTER 2 08 STARTERS A. Furnish for single -phase motors a manual across- the -line starting switch having toggle- operated switch pilot running light and built -in thermal overload device with heating element rated not more than 115 percent motor full load current indicated on name plate of motor to be protected. Starters shall be surface mounted. Provide NEMA -1 enclosure. Starters shall be Allen Bradley "Bulletin 600" or comparable manufactured by Square -D, General Electric, Furnas, Westinghouse or approved equal. B. Where interlock of single -phase motors with other equipment is indicated on Drawings or specified, furnish an enclosed magnetic across - the -line starter with thermal overload and low voltage protection. Starter shall be Allen Bradley "Bulletin 709" or comparable manufactured by those listed in previous paragraph. C. Furnish for 3 -phase motors an enclosed combination type magnetic across- the -line starter with thermal overload and low voltage protection and "Start- Stop" push button, except where automatic control is indicated on Drawings or specified. Starter shall be Allen Bradley "Bulletin 709" or comparable manufactured by those listed in first paragraph. D. All starters for three phase motors shall have overload protection in each of the three legs, with external manual reset. E. Where automatic control of 3 -phase motors is noted on Drawings, or specified, furnish starters with "Hand- Off -Auto" selector switch: Allen Bradley Bulletin 709, Form 3 or comparable manufactured by those listed in first paragraph. F. Unless indicated on Drawings or specified otherwise, furnish motor starters with a neon pilot light. Neon lights are required for all exhaust fan switches. G. All 3 -phase magnetic starters shall be equipped with integral 120 volt transformer and coil for control circuit. All starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts as necessary to perform the control functions of associated equipment. H. All motor starters for equipment not installed in Division 16 "Motor Control Center" to be provided and installed by Mechanical Contractor. 2.09 PIPE SLEEVES A. Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves in concrete, 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves in other construction materials. Sleeves sized to provide 1/4 inch minimum clearance around bare or insulated piping or as otherwise required by applicable Code regulations. B. Sleeves through exterior walls below outside finish grade level shall be external waterstop type and shall be internally sealed watertight with resilient, adjustable materials. Link Seal "CS" or "WS" sleeves with "LS" Series internal seal assemblies approved. 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Provide foundations, equipment pads and vibration isolation supports, bases and other necessary components for all motor driven equipment and other components of the mechanical systems as required to prevent the transmission of vibration to any part of the building. Isolators shall have a minimum of 96 percent efficiency. B. The manufacturer of specific items of equipment shall recommend the appropriate isolation requirements, based on evaluation of the application. Data shall be submitted to Architect for approval. C. Where equipment is bolted through isolators to foundation or other support, isolate bolt head from equipment base with resilient washer. Also use resilient bushing for bolt hole in base. D. All vibration and seismic restraint components shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be manufactured by Mason Industries, Consolidated Kinetics, Korfund or California Dynamics. E. Ductwork and Piping Seismic Restraint: All mechanical piping . and ductwork shall be braced against lateral movement as detailed in the document "Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems ". It is published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund and the Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc. of Los Angeles, California. 2.11 ACCESS PANELS (REFER ALSO TO SECTION 15400) A. Steel 24 inch by 24 inch (or required and approved size) complete with steel frame, hinged locking door and prime coat finish. Milcor or approved. Where access panels are located in fire rated areas of structure, they shall be rated accordingly. Install ceiling access panels in kitchen area as required to service and maintain all plumbing and HVAC systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. General: 1. Install unions in all nonflanged pipe connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, traps and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing, so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. 2. Run all piping parallel to the building structure and support it sufficiently to prevent sagging in accordance with code requirements. 3. Install all piping to vent or drain as required. 4. Support all piping independently so that its weight is not carried by the equipment or other pipe tests. 5. Screwed joints shall have the pipe ends reamed, dope applied to male threads only. B. No -Hub Cast Iron Pipe: Conform with applicable State Plumbing Laws and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute recommendations. C. Soldered Copper Tubing: 1. Clean outer surface of tube ends and inner surface of fittings as well as ream and deburr ends of pipe. Apply flux as recommended by manufacturer. All domestic hot and cold water and condensate pipe above grade shall be soldered with soft solder, 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, Allstate Silver Bearing Solder. No. 430 or other approved solder alloys which do not contain lead or cadmium. 2. All copper piping below grade including underground water service shall be brazed with "Phos -0" or "Silfos -5" filler material. Remove bonnets and nonmetallic seats on all valves and cool body with damp cloth while soldering or brazing. Remove excess flux from completed joints. Expansion and Flexibility: Install all Work with due regard for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to the piping, ductwork, equipment and the building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, approved type expansion joints, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and to minimize pipe forces. E. Install valves on each side of all equipment and where shown on the Drawings. Full size of pipe unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide neat appearance and easy grouping with all parts easily accessible. Valve stems shall be installed in a horizontal or upright position. 3.02 PIPE SLEEVES A. General: Lay out Work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set sleeves necessary to complete the Work. B. Floor and Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete floors or wall. Extend sleeve 1 inch above finished floor. Fire rated area penetrations shall be sealed with 3M Fire Barrier caulking sealant. Caulk around pipe penetrations with silicone type caulking compound. 3.03 UNIONS A. Pipe Unions: Install where indicated on Drawings and on each side of all pieces of equipment to permit easy removal of the equipment. B. Insulating Union: Place in line in piping systems where two dissimilar metals are joined. 3.04 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install on all exposed pipes passing through walls, ceilings or floors, and on fixture stops and waste connections to the wall. Pipe Spacing Cast Iron Soil Pipe At each joint and at intervals not to exceed eight feet Steel Pipe - 1 Inch and Smaller 7 Feet Steel Pipe - 1 -1/4 Inch and Larger 10 Feet Copper Tubing - 1 -1/2 Inch and Smaller 6 Feet Copper Tubing - 2 Inch and Larger 10 Feet Pipe Sizes Rod Sizes 1/2 inch to 2 inch 3/8 inch 2 -1/2 inch to 3 inch 1/2 inch 4 inch to 5 inch 5/8 inch 6 inch and larger 3/4 inch 3.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Provide adjustable hangers on all pipes, complete with adjusters, swivels, rods, etc. 2. On hot pipe lines where expansion and contraction occurs, provide swivel joint at top or bottom of hanger rod. 3. Provide hanger within three feet of all changes in direction. 4. Branches six feet or longer shall have separate hanger. 5. Plumbers tape is not permitted for pipe hangers. 6. Hanger Spacing: 7. Hanger Rod Sizes: B. Furnish and install trapeze or bracket hangers where required . by architectural or structural conditions for ductwork, piping and equipment to provide support in lieu of rods and hangers called for above. 3 06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A Cutting, patching and repairing required for the proper installation and completion of the Work specified in this Division, including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry Work and painting shall be performed by skilled craftsmen in these respective trades, all at the expense of this Contractor. Holes which are cut oversize shall be filled in so that a tight fit is obtained around the pipe, duct or object passing through. Refer to Section 01045, Cutting & Patching, and other applicable material Sections of these Specifications. 3.07 STRAINERS A. Install ahead of pressure reducing valves or where indicated. on Drawings with blow off drain valve to floor drain or other approved location. 3.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Labels: All new pieces of equipment, valves, starters, disconnects and control apparatus shall bear a permanently attached identification plate, listing the manufacturer's name, capacities, sizes and characteristics. In addition to the manufacturer's identification plate, provide nameplates of black phenolic resin laminate, and identify equipment by name and number, 1/4 inch high letters; attached to equipment, with corrosion resistant screws or bolts. B. Valve Directory and Tags: Submit in duplicate for approval, listing all numbered valves, their location, normal position and function. After approval submit three copies to the Architect. C. Provide label for the plumbing and mechanical systems located in conspicuous place in Mechanical Room stating: "INSTALLATION BY" Name, Address and Phone Number of Contractor. 15050 3.09 ACCESS PANELS A. Install access panels to provide access to all concealed valves, fans, motors, fire dampers, terminal units coils and all items needing service.. 3 10 PAINTING A. All Exposed Ductwork,. Supports, and Grilles as well as all Ducts Above Roof: After completion of mechanical ducts, grilles and supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, primed and painted with enamel paint of colors to be determined by Architect. B Machinery: 1. In a Mechanical Room, on the roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with enamel shall _. receive two coats of primer and one coat of .rustproof enamel, colors as selected by the Architect.. 2. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting. C. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting. D. Piping: Exposed piping on the roof or at other exterior locations shall be cleaned, primer coated and painted with coats paints suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 15250 INSULATION I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Workmen: Use proficient Journeyman Insulators and Supervisors in the execution of this portion of the work to ensure proper and adequate installation of insulation throughout. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Before insulating materials are delivered to the job site, submit complete data in accordance with Section 15010 showing insulation materials proposed to be furnished and installed. B. All materials shall be in strict conformance with the Applicable local Code and Washington State Energy Code minimum requirements. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect insulation materials before, during and after installation.. B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. 1.04 FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION A. Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation construction as installed shall be not more than a flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50 and smoke developed of 50. B. Pipe insulation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15 ". C. Duct insulation shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and bear the UL label. 15250. .1 ,RECEIVED' CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER Thickness Sound Absorption Coefficients at Frequencies of: Inches 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 1 0.18 0.54 0.58 0.80 0.86 0.83 0.70 1.05 SEALANTS A. All void, cracks, holes, and spaces around ducts and pipes penetrating fire rated walls shall be sealed using 3M brand "Fire Barrier" caulk CP25 or Putty 303. Under normal environmental conditions the material shall be noncorrosive to metal. When exposed to flame or heat, it shall be capable of expanding up to ten (10) times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Owens - Corning, Schuller, PPG, Armstrong, Certainteed or approved. 2.01 PIPE COVERING MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Sectional Pipe Installation: Thermal conductivity of 0.24 (BTU *in) /(hr *sq.ft. *deg. F) at 75F mean temperature. Minimum density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. Jacketed with white barrier laminated of aluminum foil and white Kraft reinforced with glass fiber strands. Jacket shall have factory applied self- sealing lap. B. Foam Plastic Insulation: 1 inch thick, flexible elastomeric closed cell pipe insulation. Thermal conductivity of 0.25 (BTU *in) /(hr *sq.ft. *deg. F) at 75F. 2 inches thick on pipe below grade. C. Duct Wrap: Fiberglass duct insulation complying with HH1 -558B Form B Type 1 Class 6 with thermal conductivity of 0.23 (BTU *in) /(hr *sq.ft. *deg. F). at 75F mean temperature. Minimum density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. Factory applied flame retardant foil reinforced Kraft vapor barrier facing. D. Duct Lining: Acoustical duct liner with thermal conductivity of 0.26 (BTU *in) /(hr *sq.ft. *deg. F) at 75F mean temperature. Minimum density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. Based on a No. 6 mounting in accordance with Test Method ASTM -423 liner shall have sound absorption coefficients as follows: E. Pipe Fitting Insulation Covers: PVC performed molded insulation covers. 25/50. Zeston or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Domestic Cold Water Pipe: Cover with 1/2 inch fiberglass sectional pipe covering. B. Domestic Hot Water Pipe: Cover with 1 inch fiberglass sectional pipe covering. C. Supply and Return Air Duct, Make -Up Air Duct, Outside Air Duct: 1. Cover with 1 inch duct wrap except where noted on the Drawing for duct to be lined, or where fiberglass ductboard is used. Cover with 2 inch duct wrap for duct in unheated attic space. Provide waterproof jacket on all ductwork exposed to weather. 2. Line with 1 inch duct liner as noted on the Drawings. Do not line make -up air duct. D. Refrigerant Suction Piping: Cover with foam plastic insulation, 1 inch for indoor piping, 1 -1/2 inch for outdoor piping. E. Roof Drain Piping and Underside of Roof Drain Body Inside Building: Above grade, cover piping with 1/2 inch fiberglass sectional pipe covering. Cover drain body with 1/2 inch thick sheet foam plastic insulation; attached with adhesive and supported externally with 26 gauge galvanized flat strapping anchored to structure. F. Handicapped Lavatory: Cover hot water, trap and tailpiece with 1/2 inch foamed plastic pipe covering. Provide piping and fitting covers for all handicap lavatories on exposed waste and water supply piping (hot and cold). Cover material shall be 1/8 inch vinyl plastic to comply with ADA requirements. Brocar Products Trap Wrap, Scauld Guard, or approved substitute. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be continuous through .walls, floors, . partitions and sleeves except where noted otherwise, 15250 3 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0; 6 PERMIT. CENTER B Fiberglass Sectional Pipe Insulation: Apply insulation to pipe and seal with self- sealing lap. Use self-sealing butt strips to seal butt joints. Insulate all fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers of insulation and cover to match pipe or use preformed PVC molded insulation covers. C. Foamed Plastic Insulation: Insulation shall be slipped on the pipe prior to connection. Butt joints sealed with manufacturer's adhesive. Fitting shall be insulated with miter -out pieces. All insulation exposed to the weather and under -grade shall be covered with two coats of finish as recommended by manufacturer. D Duct Liners: Apply to ducts indicated by note on the Drawings. Apply with fire resistant adhesive to flat sheet with 100 percent coverage, For widths over 20 inches, additionally secure the liner with mechanical fasteners at 15 inch centers. Coat exposed and leading edges of transverse joints with suitable fire resistant adhesive. E Duct Wrap: Cover supply, make -up air and outside air ducts . except ducts internally lined and where noted on the Drawings not to insulate. Wrap tightly with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of two inches. Adhere insulation with four inch strips of insulating bending adhesive at eight inches on center. On ducts over 24 inches wide, additionally secure insulation, with suitable mechanical fasteners at 18 inches on center. Circumferential and longitudinal joints . stapled with flare staples on six inch centers and covered with three inch wide foil reinforced tape. F Cover exposed to weather make -up air duct with .3 inch duct wrap insulation (thermal resistance of 6.3). Cover insulation with watertight aluminum jacket, END OF SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION f PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide the following. 1. Wet -pipe sprinkler system. 2. Dry -pipe sprinkler system or dry sprinkler heads in areas subject to 40F or less. Antifreeze systems are not permitted. 3. Private fire service main, including connection to existing utility, and piping to the inlet connection inside the building. Provide required valves, backflow preventer, vaults, and appurtenances. B. Provide tamper, flow, and pressure switches. Coordinate location and type of tamper, flow, and pressure switches with the fire alarm system. C. Provide all costs for electrical connections and wiring as required for a complete and operable system. Includes, but is not limited to air compressors, sump pumps, fire pumps, jockey pumps, pump controllers, etc. Coordinate with Division 16. D. Refer to Plumbing and Civil Drawings for additional information relating to the fire sprinkler system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Company specializing in sprinkler systems of similar type and scope with 3 years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Codes: Provide system per the requirements of the following, except as specifically modified herein. Apply edition as enforced by AHJ unless otherwise stated. Comply with state amendments. a. Uniform Building Code as adopted by the AHJ. b. Uniform Fire Code as adopted by the AHJ, RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR .0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER f. NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. g. Listed Components: Provide components UL listed and FM approved, except as modified herein. 2. Definitions: 1.03 SUBMITTALS c. Uniform Building Code and UBC No. 9 -1, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. d. NFPA 13, (1996 Edition) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. e. Uniform Fire Code and UFC, Appendix III -C, "Testing Automatic Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems." a. Code: Where this Specification refers to "Code ", it indicates any or all of the above listed Codes as applicable to that reference. b. AHJ: Indicates all reviewing authorities, including the local fire marshal, the Owner's insurance underwriters, Owner's representative, and any other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance. A. Submit the following for review. Include in operations and maintenance manual. 1. Shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, and component manufacturer's data sheets (as one complete standalone package) to AHJ, Owner's insurance underwriter, and Engineer. Provide proof of approval by AHJ of installed sprinkler system to Engineer on completion of work. 2. Project Record Documents indicating record conditions (one paper sepia, two prints). 3. Test Reports: Underground and above ground piping hydrostatic test, water supply flow test; Code- required acceptance tests; and manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and Record Drawings. t C 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.05 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra sprinkler heads per code, provide suitable wrenches for each head type, and metal storage cabinet in location designated. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. Design Parameters: a. Building Area: Restaurant Service Areas, Storage. 1) Occupancy Classification: Ordinary Group 1. 2) Density: 0.15 GPM per s.f over a 1500 s.f. hydraulically most remote design area per NEPA 13. 3) Area per Sprinkler: 130 s.f. maximum. 4) Inside Hose Allowance: .0 GPM. 5) Outside Hose Allowance: 250 GPM. b. Building Area: Restaurant Seating Areas. 1) Occupancy Classification: Light. 2) Density: 0.10 GPM per s.f over a 1500 s.f. hydraulically most remote design area per.NFPA 13. 3) Area per Sprinkler: 13.0 s.f. maximum. 4) Inside Hose Allowance: 0 GPM. 5) Outside Hose Allowance: 250 GPM. 2. Sprinkler system design to include a 10 percent cushion between system demand point and available water supplies. 15300, . `3 CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 3. Develop cost - effective designs that may include the use of extended coverage sprinkler heads and design area reductions as allowed by NFPA 13. 1.07 FLOW TEST A. Provide materials and labor for a new water supply test on the closest nearby fire hydrants per NFPA 13, A- 7 -2 -1. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all systems against defective equipment, materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year after Owner's acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Provide per AHJ requirements, and as a minimum per below. B. Materials: Domestic Manufacture. 1. Buried Piping: Ductile iron Class 52, AWWA C151 with flanged or mechanical joint fittings; or PVC, SDR -18, AWWA C900. 2. Above Ground Inside Building Piping: a. Pipe size 2 -inch diameter and smaller: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, F442, or ASTM A795; minimum CRR of 1.00 per UL listing or FM approved. Threaded, mechanical couplings, or welded fittings. b. Pipe Size 2 -1/2 -inch diameter and larger: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; wall thickness greater than Schedule 5 (Schedule 5 not approved). Threaded, . mechanical couplings, flanged, or welded fittings. c. Mechanical Couplings: FM approved; Victaulic, Gruvelock, or equivalent. d. All Dry. Pipe System Piping: Galvanized inside and out. 2.02 SPECIALTIES A. General: 1 Fire Department Connection: Free standing type; ductile iron; brass finish; thread size to suit fire department hardware; two way threaded dust cap and chain of same material and finish, 3/4 -inch automatic drip connected to drain; marked "Sprinkler Fire Department Connection." 2 Waterflow Detector: Vane -type with SPDT switches and adjustable time delay (0 to 75 seconds). GEM VSR -F; Viking VSR -F; Potter VSR -F, or equivalent. 3 Tamper Switches: Provide to mount on applicable valve (OS &Y gate, butterfly, or PIV), with SPDT switches to match requirements of fire alarm system. 4. Backflow Prevention Device: a. Two check valves in series with OS &Y gate valves at each end. Provide detector if required by local utility. Entire assembly must be UL listed or FM approved for fire protection service as a unit for fire protection service. Manufacturers: Wilkins, Hersey, Febco or equivalent. b. Utility Vault: Precast concrete underground sized to enclose the backflow prevention device and the fire department connection check valve, with adequate clearance around these items to allow maintenance. Provide a drain sump in the vault bottom, suitable for insertion of a sump pump. Provide sump pump or gravity drain and drain piping to approved discharge locations required by local code officials. Provide all costs for electrical connections and wiring as required for a complete and operable system. Provide all electrical penetrations watertight. Provide all piping penetrations by rubber links which seal watertight by tightening compression bolts, or equivalent watertight premanufactured pipe penetration system. Provide extensions as required for proper depth, and round access manway access with cover, and ladder. Coordinate with Civil and Electrical Drawings. 5 Low Pressure Alarm Switch: Coordinate electrical requirements with fire alarm system. GEM PS40 -2A, Viking A -1, or equivalent. 6. Automatic Ball Drip Valve: Grinnell F789, or equivalent. 15300 5 RECEIVED CITY. OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER 7. Air Compressor: Manufactured for fire sprinkler systems: Englo, Gast, or General. 8. Sectional Control Test /Drain Unit: ASTM A53 pipe, with inspector's test valve, sectional drain valve, sectional isolation valve with tamper switch, restriction union with corrosion resistant orifice equivalent to sprinkler orifice, sight flow connection, and waterflow detector. Grinnell F360/361/362, or equivalent. 9. Inspector's Test Connection: G/J Sure -Test. 10. Pressure Switch: Coordinate electrical requirements with fire alarm system. Potter PS10, Viking A -1, Reliable J54. or equivalent. 2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS A. General: 1. Finished Areas: Glass -bulb, recessed quick- response pendent with white painted finish, and white painted escutcheon. 2. Non- Finished Areas: Glass -bulb, quick- response with brass finish. 3. Dry: Recessed, solder or glass bulb, quick - response, chrome finish with chrome escutcheon. 2.04 VALVES, GENERAL A. OS &Y Gate: 1. 2 -1/2- inches and Larger: Nibco F- 607 -0, or equivalent. 2. 2- inches and Smaller: Nibco T -104, or equivalent. B. NRS Gate: Non - rising stem with post indicator. Nibco. M/F -609 with NIP1A or equivalent for yard use and Nibco NIP2 or equivalent for wall use. C. Swing Check: Iron body, rubber and bronze faced checks. Nibco F- 908 -W, or equivalent. D. Wafer Check: Iron body, rubber seat, spring actuated. Nibco. W- 900 -W, or equivalent. E. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, Nibco WD3510 -8 with . factory- installed tamper switches or equivalent. f t 2.05 SYSTEM ALARM VALVES A. Dry Pipe Valve: Differential type. Provide with all trim as recommended by the manufacturer for variable pressure service, including air maintenance device, electric low pressure alarm switch, priming valves and test, main drain, and pressure gauges. Provide quick opening device when system volume exceeds 500 gallons. Provide air compressor, sized per sprinkler dry pipe valve manufacturer's recommendations to fill system and to maintain system pressure as required per code. Manufacturers: Reliable Model D Dry Pipe Valve, or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other trades. Provide adequate space for installation. B. General: 1. Provide post indicator on buried shutoff valves. 2. Provide listed backflow assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. Coordinate with local utility, conform to their installation requirements. 3 Fire Department Connection: Locate with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. 4. Install pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. 5. Install piping in concealed spaces above :finished ceilings. 6. Center heads in the middle of suspended ceiling tile. 7. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint finish. Remove upon completion of painting. 8. Provide seismic restraints per code. As a minimum, . provide a 4 -way earthquake bracing at the riser and at each change of direction of the main, and 2 -way bracing at 40 -feet on center along the main: 9. Coordinate support of sprinkler pipe 4 -inch and larger with structural engineer. 10. Risers: Provide 2- inches of clearance all around the fire main through the foundation wall and floor. Pack annular space with mineral wool and silicone sealant. Provide bell and spigot rodded pipe assemblies for the . connection between the underground fire main, and the riser, including the last horizontal connection, and all vertical connections to the first connection on the riser. Coat rods for corrosion resistance, or use stainless steel. 11. Sprinkler system control valves to be post indicator valves located a minimum of 40 -feet from the building or wall -post indicator valves or OS &Y or butterfly valves located inside building in 1 -hour rated enclosure with outside door. 12. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 13. Route water supply flow test connections to a location which can accept the flow under wide -open flow and pressure for a sufficient time to assure a proper test, and which will not cause damage, including to landscaping. 14. Coordinate location and electrical requirements of air compressor with Division 16. 15. Provide dry pendant sprinkler heads on pendant drops from dry piping. 16. Provide access panels for all test valves, test drains and low point drains concealed by structure and/or - finish. 3.02 SYSTEM TESTS A. Test entire system per code and AHJ. Provide, arrange, and pay for all testing required by code or AHJ in order to obtain complete and final acceptance. Witness tests by AHJ and Engineer. Notify AHJ and Engineer 2 weeks prior to test. 3.03 FIELD SERVICES Instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system, including main valve position (open or closed) recognition, system drainage, system testing, dry pipe valve reset and the relation to the fire alarm. system. END OF SECTION 15350 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS ft PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS t C A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, General Requirements and Section 15010 are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install system of natural gas fuel piping as required by the Drawings and this Section. B. Provide all gas distribution piping from point of delivery to all equipment requiring same whether furnished under this Section or any other. C. Provide pressure regulators, valves, cocks, all necessary operating and safety controls and other necessary accessories and appurtenances required to operate equipment and /or as indicated on Drawings. D. Provide and install new service with meter . and standard, .7 inch to 13 inch w.c. delivery pressure to serve the interior building system. The Contractor shall coordinate with local Serving Utility Company prior to time building and utility work commences. E. Contractor has option to coordinate 2 pound delivery pressure with local serving utility company and install 2 pound distribution system with pressure reducing regulators at all gas connections as well as reduce size of distribution piping in accordance with UPC Standard criteria. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS . A. Natural gas piping and connections to equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 54, the Uniform Plumbing Code, and the requirements of the local authorities as well as serving utility company. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Piping shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A106 black seamless steel pipe with 150 pound, black . malleable iron threaded fittings up to and including 2 inch and butt welding carbon steel fittings 2 -1/2 inch and larger. All underground pipe and fittings coated and wrapped. Coating shall consist of coat of coal -tar primer, coat or coal -tar enamel. Wrapping shall comply with IAPMO Installation Standard 13 -84 as well as Section 1213(F) of the UPC. 2.02 SPECIAL VALVES A. General: Special valves required for natural gas system include the following types: 1. Gas Cocks: 150 psi nonshock, bronze straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded end. 2. Control Valves; Master Gas Control Valve: Bronze body, packless, single seat, explosion proof, solenoid operated, normally closed, UL- approved. 3. Pressure Reducing Regulators: Provide Code - approved UL listed type, rated for this application and as required by delivery pressure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ISOLATION AND. DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Provide means of isolation in main, in each branch. line and at all items of equipment with gate valve or cock. B. Provide piping disconnecting means at all items of equipment . by ground joint unions up to 2 -1/2 inch and flanges for 3 inch and larger. C. Provide flexible metallic connection. hose for vibrating equipment, 3.02 TESTS A. Gas piping tested by filling with dry nitrogen, carbon dioxide or gas being, used (oxygen shall not be used). Hold pressure of 60 psi without showing pressure drop. END OF SECTION 15400 PLUMBING C PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide plumbing where shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Domestic hot, cold, hot water and return piping systems. 2. Drain, waste, condensate drain and vent systems. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim as shown on the Drawings. B. Related work: Documents affecting work of this Section include, but not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications, and 15010 Mechanical General Provisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following equipment: 1. Plumbing Fixtures. 2. Drains. 3. Plumbing Specialties. 4. Plumbing Cleanouts. 5. Water Heater Equipment. 6. Hose Bibbs. 7. Circulating Pump. 8. Grease Interceptor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workman who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Codes and Regulations: In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 15010. 15400 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER PAT 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 PIPING A. Soil, Waste, Storm Drain and Vent Piping: (ABS piping subject to approval by local authorities and for use . outside the building only). Hub and spigot cast iron pipe for below grade utilities beyond 5' -0" outside building wall. B. Domestic Water Piping: Type "K" copper tubing below grade and Type "L" copper tubing above grade along with wrought copper sweat fittings and silver bearing solder or 95/5 solder joints. C. Gas Piping: Schedule 40 black steel pipe and malleable threaded fittings. D. Condensate Drain Piping for Cooling Coil: Type "L" copper tubing and wrought copper or cast bronze sweat fittings. 50/50 or 95/5 soldered joints. On sizes 1 -1/4 inch and larger, provide "DWV" pattern drainage fittings. 2 02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 pipe, black or galvanized, ASTM A53. Malleable or cast iron threaded fittings to match pipe.' B. Copper Tube: Hard drawn copper, Types "L" and "K" conforming to ANSI H23.1. Fittings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Service weight Hub and Spigot cast iron pipe and fittings with caulked or compression, gasket type joints, or hubless cast iron pipe and fittings with approved mechanical coupling joints; conforming to ASTM A74 and CISPI 301. D. PVC Pipe: See 15050; 3.01, E. E. ABS -DWV Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2661 for dimensions and tolerances for pipe, fitting sockets and laying lengths. Products shall be labeled with the UPC Shield. Solvent cement shall comply with ASTM D2235. .(ABS materials shall be used only if approved by local authorities.) C 2 03 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Provide new plumbing fixtures of the type herein specified and of the quantity shown with all fixtures of one manufacturer. 1. Fixtures: Complete with fittings, supports, fastening devices, faucets, valves, traps, stops and appurtenances required. 2. Exposed IPS Piping and Tubing: Brass, chrome plated. 3. Escutcheons: Brass, chrome plated. 4. Fixture Locations: As shown on Architectural Drawings. 5. Stops: Stops installed in each supply pipe at each fixture accessibly located with wall escutcheons. B. Manufacturers: 1. China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard or Kohler. 2. Flush Valves: Sloan or Zurn. 3. Fittings: Moen, T & S Brass, Chicago, Symmons, Delta HDF or approved. 4. Infrared Fittings: Sloan or Zurn. C. Plumbing Trim: 1. Traps: Provide traps on all fixtures except fixtures with integral traps. Exposed traps chromium plated cast brass or 17 gauge chromium plated brass tubing. 2. Supplies and Stops: First quality, chrome plated. Speedway, McGuire or approved. Stops: Loose key type. 3. Closet Seats: Solid white reinforced plastic, hinge with insert integrally in seat. Olsonite, Church or Beneke. D. Fixture Schedule: See Schedule on Drawings. 15400 -' 3 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 6 1998 PERMIT CENTER E. Kitchen Equipment: The Contractor shall furnish and install all shutoff valves, pressure regulators, shock arresters, P- traps, vacuum breakers, strainers, indirect waste piping and other devices or piping which are not furnished with the Kitchen equipment. Approved, listed gas appliance connectors may be used for final connection to cooking equipment; subject to approval by local Code authority. 2.04 VALVES A. General: Valves manufactured by Jenkins, Kennedy, Powell, Walworth, Crane, Nibco, Stockham, Hammond or Lunkenheimer are approved. B. Gate Valves: 1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 psi working pressure nonrising stem. Nibco Model 113. 2. 2 -1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, 125 psi working pressure, nonrising stem. Nibco Model 619 C. Check Valves: 1. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 psi working pressure, swing check. Nibco Model T -413. 2. 2 -1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, 125 psi working pressure, swing check. Nibco Model F -918B. 3. Nonslam Check Valve: Semi -steel body,. 125 psi working pressure, bronze plug, stainless steel spring. McAlear SCW or SCG. D. Butterfly Valves: Steel or iron body. 150 psi working pressure. Lever handle with position indicator and mechanical stops. Aluminum bronze disc. Wafer or flanged body. Ethylene propylene seat. Crane,, Pratt, Fisher, Worcester, Keystone. Nibco WL- 082 -3. E. Balancing Valves: Bronze or cast iron body, 125 psi working pressure. Meter connections with built -in check valve. Integral pointer to register degree of valve opening. Bell. & Gossett CB. F. Relief Valve: Pressure Relief Valve: ASME construction. Set for pressure specified. Bi- metallic thermostat element. 'Size to meet, equipment capacity. McDonnell - Miller, Watts, Bell & Gossett,. Cash -Acme. 1 G. Gas Cocks: Bronze or cast iron body with bronze plug, plug cook type. 125 -150 psi working pressure. Flat head, square head or lever handle type. DeZurik, Hays, Healey, McDonald, Mueller. H. Ball Valves: Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi working pressure, lever handle with stops, threaded or soldered ends to match pipe and bronze stem and ball. Seats and seal shall be Buna -N for service of maximum 150F. For service over 150F, seat and seal shall be ethylene propylene or Teflon. Valve seat replaceable without disturbing piping either by swing away or top entry method. Nibco Model 590W for below 150F, Model 590Y above 150F. I. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, ASME /AGA rated. Sized to meet BTUH and Code requirements. Manual lever operator ANSI listed. Stainless steel or thermal bond coated thermostat tube. Watts, Cash -Acme or approved. J. Earthquake Valve on Gas Service: As required by local building officials. 2.05 UNIONS III A. Steel Pipe Union: 150 pound malleable iron, brass to iron seat, ground joint, black or galvanized to match pipe. B. Copper Pipe Union: 200 psi working pressure. Bronze body. Solder ends. C. Insulating Unions: 250 psi working pressure. Pipe ends and material to match piping. Electric current below 1 percent of galvanic current. Gasket material as recommended by manufacturer. Epco or approved. 2.06 PIPE SLEEVES A. Minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel in concrete, 18 gauge in all other construction. 1/2 inch clearance around pipe or.. insulation. 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS A. Coated cast iron body, double drainage flange with weep holes, primer connection, flashing clamp device, adjustable strainer. J. R. Smith, Wade or Zurn. See Schedule on Drawings. B. Provide trap primers as required by local building and plumbing inspection officials. 2.08 FLOOR SINKS A. Coated or enameled cast iron body, double drainage flange with weep holes, nickel bronze or heavy C.P. strainer /grate /funnel finishes, flashing clamp device, adjustable or insert typ strainer. Comply with ANSI A112.21.1. Smith, Wade, Josam, Zurn, or approved. See Schedule on Drawings. (Plastic components not allowed.) 2.09 HOSE BIBB A. Cast brass duty hydrant, brass operating parts, renewable seat, hose outlet, vacuum breaker and removable "T" handle. J.R. Smith, Woodford, Zurn, Chicago, or approved. See Schedule on Drawings for types. 2.10 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Shock Absorbers: Precharged bellows or piston type, with integral flow orifice. J. R. Smith Series 5000. Watts, Zurn, Wade, or PPP approved. B. Trap Primers: Cast brass or polypropylene trap seal primer valve with automatic vacuum breaker. J. R. Smith 2699. Wade, Zurn, or PPP approved. C. Pressure Reducing Valves, Water (other than main incoming water service): Bronze body, integral or separate strainer, working pressure /inlet pressure compatible with service and design pressures. Spring actuated diaphragm or piston type. Wilkens, Cash -Acme, Watts. D. Circulating Pump(s): Domestic hot water recirculating pump, all bronze construction, inline centrifugal, 1750 RPM, flexible coupling, sleeve bearing. Bell & Gossett, Paco, Armstrong or approved. Verify electrical requirements. c E. Backflow Preventers: 1. General: Provide shutoff valve and unions upstream downstream of all backflow preventers. Provide strainer upstream of all backflow preventers. and lyi 2. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Watts Model 909QT Series with strainer. Febco, Conbraco or approved. 2.11 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be located as shown on Drawings and as required by the Administrative Authority. Cleanouts shall be the same as the pipe except that greater than 4 inch will not be required. Inside floor type shall have polished nickel bronze tops, and wall type shall have polished nickel bronze tops, and wall type shall have stainless steel covers. All cleanouts shall be Wade, Zurn, J. R. Smith. J. R. Smith numbers used as a basis of selection. See Schedule on Drawings. 1. Floor Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4023 or. 4043. 2. Wall Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4472 bronze plug and stainless steel cover. 3. Outside Areas, Concrete Walks and Paved Drives: J. R. Smith 4880 galvanized cast iron body and top secured with vandalproof screws. In paved, dirt or landscaped areas, install in 18 inch by 18 inch by 6 inch deep concrete pad with grade. Cleanout body and plug inside housing to match piping material and be Code - approved. 4. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4023Y C.I. ferrule with round nickel bronze top with carpet marking type. 2.12 KITCHEN WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT (WH -1) A. General: 1. Provide one Raypak Model R -724 copper fin tube dual temperature hot water supply boiler(s) with a rated input of 724,000 BTU /hr. and a 697 GPH recovery at 100F rise, when fired with natural gas, 1000 BTU /cubic foot. 15400 7 RECEIVED'. CITY OF TLIKVVILA M AR'.0 6 1998'i pERMIT. CENTER 2 The boiler shall be design certified and tested by the American Gas Association laboratories with a listed minimum thermal efficiency of 80 percent and shall bear the ASME stamp and be inspected and approved by the National Board for 160 PSIG working pressure complete with manufacturer's data report. 3 The boiler(s) shall be equipped with a 125 PSIG ASME pressure relief valve, piped by the installer to an approved drain and temperature and pressure gauge. 4. The water tube heat exchanger of the boiler(s) shall be of the single bank, horizontal grid design with integral copper fin tubes, each and of which is rolled into an ASME boiler quality steel tube sheet and sealed to 160 PSIG rated bronze headers with "0" rings, having a temperature rating over 500F. The low water volume heat exchanger shall be explosion proof on the water side and shall bear a 20 year warranty against "Thermal Shock" caused by boiler operation with large changes, not exceeding 150F between the water temperature at the boiler inlet and the boiler outlet temperature up to 23F maximum. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheet by stud bolts with flange nuts to permit inspection and maintenance without removing external piping connections. The heat exchanger shall incorporate "V" baffles, between the tubes, to ensure complete contact of the external tube surfaces with the products of combustion and integral pump mounted to return header. 5. The boiler(s) shall be capable of operating with water temperatures at 180 degrees and 140 degrees simultaneously. 6 The lightweight, high temperature, interlocking castable combustion chamber liner shall reduce standby radiation losses. The corrosion resistant galvanized steel jackets shall be finished with a baked on powder finish, suitable for outdoor installation and shall incorporate louvers in the outer panels to divert air used for combustion, past heated surfaces reducing jacket losses and increasing unit efficiency. 7 The stainless steel alloy burners shall be of the raised port design with fixed primary air ports, capable of quiet ignition and extinction without flashback at the orifice at firing rates between 20 percent and 100 percent, and mounted in a slide out burner drawer for ease of inspection. The boiler(s) shall have a floor loading of 710 pounds /square foot or less. 9. The boiler(s) shall be completely assembled and fire tested prior to shipment from the factory. B. Pilot Control System: The boiler(s) shall be equipped with a 100 percent safety shutdown on loss of pilot flame. The pilot ignition shall be Standard all Model Sizes 514 -1125. An electronic intermittent ignition system with electronic flame supervision having a nominal 0.8 second flame response time. C. Firing Mode: 1. The boiler(s) shall be equipped to provide full . modulation of the gas input to any load condition as low as 20 percent of the full rating of the boiler (5.1 ratio) without flashback, burning of orifices of improper combustion. In addition, all gas control trains must have a redundant safety shutoff feature, main gas regulation, shutoff cock and plugged pressure tapping to meet the requirements of ANSI 221.13. D. Boiler Control: 1. The boiler(s) shall be equipped with an operating limit and an adjustable auto reset high limit control. 2. A flow switch, mounted and wired shall be provided as standard. 3. Additional controls. 2.13 ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW ROOF DRAINS A. Cast iron body, flashing ring, drain receiver, cast iron dome expansion joint and underdeck clamp. Same manufacturer .as:. floor drains. J.R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, or approved. See Schedule for type. 2.14 GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. Prefabricated 3100 gallon reinforced concrete grease interceptor structure in accordance with all state and local agency code standards. Submit shop drawings to local inspectors for review and approval prior to ordering. M.C. Nottingham, Utility Vault Co., or approved. (See Drawings for additional information.) 2.15 CIRCULATION PUMPS (INLINE) A. General: Provide in -line factory tested pumps, cleaned, and painted with enamel prior to shipment. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. B. Type: Horizontal, oil lubricated, designed for 125 PSI working pressure, 225F continuous water temperature. C. Body: Bronze or stainless steel construction. D. Shaft: Steel, ground and polished, integral thrust collar. E. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal face rotating against ceramic seat. G. Motor: Nonoverloading at any point on pump curve, open, dripproof, sleeve bearings, quiet operating, rubber mounted construction, built -in thermal overload protection. H. Coupling: Self- aligning, flexible. I. Manufacturers: Amtrol, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, . Grundfos , Paco, Taco, or approved. 2.16 PRIMER PIPING A. Above Ground: Type "L" hard -drawn copper tubing with wrought sweat fittings and soldered joints. B. Below Ground: Type "L" soft annealed copper tubing with wrought sweat fittings and brazed joints. 2.17 TRAP PRIMERS A. Trap seal primer valve with integral automatic anti- syphon protection. Code approval required. Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith, P.P.P., or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING A. Cutting, patching and repairing required for the proper installation and completion of the work specified in each Division, including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting shall be performed by skilled craftsmen in these respective trades, all at the expense of this Contractor. See Section 15050 - 3.05, C. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Install unions in all nonflanged pipe connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, traps and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing, so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. Provide dielectric couplings, unions or flanges between galvanized steel and copper pipe or tubing. 1. Install all piping so as to vent and drain. 2. Run all piping parallel to the building structure and support it sufficiently to prevent sagging. B. Sanitary Waste and Storm Piping: Slope at uniform grade of 1/4 inch per foot unless noted otherwise. Make changes in size with reducing and wye fittings. Run exposed piping parallel or perpendicular to building structure. C. Vent Piping: Horizontal runs free of drops and sloped to drain to drainage system. D. Water, Condensate Drain, indirect work and Gas Piping: Provide low point drains, cleanouts and sediment "legs" as required for each type of piping. Installation shall conform to approved standards of prevailing Plumbing and Mechanical Codes regarding slope, cleanout locations and other requirements which have not been addressed in the Specifications. E Screwed joints shall have the pipe ends reamed, dope or tape applied to male threads only, with the exception of brass -to- brass joints, which shall be made with Teflon tape only. F For braze type joints, use Fos - Copper rod on wrought copper fittings, or silver brazing alloy with the flux recommended for that particular alloy on all fittings. Clean copper tubing and fittings thoroughly before applying the flux. Remove all copper tubing burrs, ream to full bore and true and round all joints. Apply heating uniformly to secure penetration of the rod and leave a full bead around the entire circumference of the joint to show proper penetration and sealing. Under no circumstances will Fos - Copper be used on cast fittings. Silver bearing solder to be used on refrigerant copper piping. G. No -Hub Cast Iron Pipe: Conform with Plumbing Laws and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute recommendations. 3.03 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Fixtures supported on stud partitions, unless specified with chair carriers, shall be supported on heavy concealed brackets or carrier arms attached to 1/4 inch by 5 inch steel plate supports fastened to studs with bolts. Plates shall be welded to steel studs. Plate shall extend one stud beyond fixture mounting point. 3.04 FIXTURE, EQUIPMENT TEST A. After fixtures and equipment have been installed, test all faucets, drains, valves and other operative devices to assure correct function. Correct any malfunctions, leakage, breakage, etc. B. Equipment connected to natural gas piping shall be energized and tested for proper operation. All ' gas piping and fittings (including approved flexible gas connector devices) installed on equipment beyond the rough in piping shall be tested for leakage using an electronic ionization gas detector. The Contractor shall submit a certificate indicating the completion of the prescribed testing procedure and that all such equipment and piping is free from leakage. t 3.05 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install flush with finished floor. Prime all floor drain traps as required by local plumbing inspectors and prevailing Plumbing Code requirements. 3.06 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. For flush valve operated fixtures, locate shock absorbers in supply pipe in accordance with recommendations of the Plumbing and Drainage Institute PDI- WH2O1. Install ahead of all solenoid valves. Determine size of absorber by the fixture unit value method required at the mounting point, Provide access panel where concealed. See Drawings. 3.07 PIPE TEST A. Notify Architect and local Plumbing Inspector two days before test. B. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with Local Plumbing Code Provisions. C. Water Piping: Eliminate air from system. Fill and test at 150 PSIG for a period of 6 hours with no loss in pressure. D. Natural Gas Piping: 100 PSIG, 2 hour duration with no pressure loss. Use oil free compressed air or nitrogen for test medium. Check joints for leakage with soap and water or approved .liquid leak detector. 3.08 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Debur cuts. 1. Do not ream exceeding internal diameter of the pipe. 2. Thread to requirements of ANSI B2..1. B. Use Teflon tape on male thread prior to joining other services. 3.09 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Support suspended piping with clevis or trapeze hangers or rods (below the ground as required by local soil. conditions). Tube Size Max. Spacing on Centers 1 inch and Smaller 6'- 0" 1 -1/2 inch 7'- 0" 2 Inch 8'- 0" 2 -1/2 Inch 9'- 0" 3 inch and Larger 10'- 0" B. Space hangers and supports for horizontal copper tubing according to the following schedule: C. Support vertical piping with riser clamps secured to the piping and the building structure. D. Provide insulation continuous through hangers. Protect insulation by galvanized steel shields. 3.10 SLEEVES AND OPENING A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and ceilings. 1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is placed. 2. For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through, or provide a minimum of 1/2 inch clearance between inside and outside of the pipe. 3.11 FLUSHING OF WATER SYSTEMS A. Thoroughly flush and backflush all water system piping through all openings to remove dirt, flux, debris and residues until flushing water runs clear. 3.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTION A. Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets with hose connections, and other equipment having plumbing connections, against possible back - siphonage. B. Arrange for testing of backflow devices as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. C. Provide building system backflow device as required by local authorities. See Drawings for additional information. D. Provide soda and beverage equipment backflow. device as required by local authorities. C E. Locate all backflow devices in accessible location as approved by local building department for yearly testing purposes. F. Route waste piping from air gap waste fitting to point of air gap termination at indirect waste interceptor. 3.13 ACCESS PANEL A. Provide access panel to provide access to all concealed valves and equipment. Steel, 24 inch by 24 inch or as required, complete with steel frame, hinged locking door and prime coat finish. Milcor or approved. Type to match building construction and be fire rated where required. Install ceiling access panels in Kitchen to effectively service and maintain plumbing systems in Kitchen area. 3 14 THERMOMETERS A. Industrial grade liquid filled bulb, 7 inch aluminum or steel case, glass cover, angle or vertical.. stem with separable mounting well for liquid services. Variable angle pattern optional. Ashcroft, Marsh /Marshalltown Instruments, Palmer, Trerice, Weiss or approved. B. 3 inch diameter bi -metal dial thermometer, stainless steel case, white dial, black numbers, 4 inch stainless steel stem, brass separable socket. Back or bottom connections as required. Ashroft Al, El, Trerice, Weiss, Palmer,, Marsh/ Marshalltown Instruments, or approved. Service Range Domestic Hot Water 50 to 250F 3.15 EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Mechanical Contractor shall rough in and connect to equipment and fixtures furnished by Owner or others which have waste, water or mechanical connections. Contractor shall provide necessary valves and trim materials to make complete installation. B. Coordinate location of equipment connection with Architect and supplier. 3.16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. General: Perform all necessary excavation and .backfill required for the installation of mechanical work. Any piping or other work damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired at Contractor's expense. B. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Excavations damaged or softened by water or frost shall be reexcavated and filled back to original level with sand, pea gravel or other approved material by the Contractor at no expense to Owner. C. Tests: During the progress of the work for compacted fill, the Engineer or Owner reserves the right to request compaction tests made under the direction of a testing laboratory. D. Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width, removing rocks, roots and stumps. Cost of additional excavation to facilitate utility cross - overs, additional offsets, etc. borne by the Contractor. Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench adequate for proper installation of piping or conduit: All trenches deeper than the footing of any building or structure and paralleling the same must be at least 45 degrees therefrom, unless permission be otherwise granted by the Administrative Authority. E. Bedding: All piping shall be full bedded on sand or 3/4 inch minus crushed rock. A minimum 4 -inch deep layer shall be placed on the leveled trench bottom for this purpose. The fill shall be removed to the necessary depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of the pipe on the bed material for its entire length. F. Backfill: Backfill material shall be excavated material, fill sand or 3/4 minus crushed rock. Backfill material shall be approved by Engineer. All backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding eight inches deep and compacted to 95 percent . of maximum density at optimum moisture content to preclude subsequent settlement. 3.17 ROOF DRAINS A. General: Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.' B. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work. C. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. Set overflow drains at proper elevation relative to main roof drains. 3.18 INSTALLATION OF INTERCEPTORS AND /OR GREASE TRAPS A. General: Install interceptors in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Support: Anchor interceptors securely to substrate, locate so adequate clearance is provided to remove covers and sediment baskets. Set recessed units so top of cover is flush with finished floor. C. Piping: Connect inlet and outlet piping to interceptors. 3.19 CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Install per Manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust flow rate to design point. 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protect all bright finished shafts, bearing .housings and similar items, until in service; no rust will be permitted. Cover equipment and materials stored on the job site or otherwise suitably protect at the direction of, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. If coverings become torn, replace until the equipment is connected and operating. END OF SECTION 15650 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 GENERAT, 1.01 SCOPE A. All work shall be in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. B. All work shall comply with the following Codes: 1. Uniform Mechanical and Plumbing Codes. 2. Applicable State Plumbing Code. 3. National Electrical Code. 4. National Fire Code. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. All pertinent State and local codes. 7. Applicable State Administrative Code. C. Work shall comply with the following standards: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Nations Association (SMACNA). 7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 8. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 9. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section shall comprise all labor, materials, equipment, machinery and service incidental to the installation of a complete heating, cooling and ventilation system as hereinafter specified, and shown on Drawings. B. The Contractor shall lay out his own work and coordinate his own work with that of other trades and be responsible for all measurements. C. All work shall be subject to approval of Owner or his representative. D. Where single point electrical connection is called for, provide additional overcurrent protection and wiring beyond single point connection for heater and fan. E. The Mechanical Contractor shall survey site and study contract documents prior to beginning construction. All problems concerning coordination of differing trades, interferences, lack of ceiling cavity space, or any problems in understanding the Specifications herein and Drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to construction. F. Contractor shall check size of entrance -ways and perform all modifications to new and /or existing building conditions to make sure sufficient space is available for entrance of equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following equipment: 1. Exhaust Fans. 2. Diffusers and Grilles. 3. Dampers. 4. Rooftop Air Conditioning Unit. 5. Filters. 6. Unit Heaters (electric). 7. Duct Heaters (electric). 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be handled and stored in :a manner so as to prevent damage. .Materials shall be stored under cover and above ground. B. All products shall be shipped to the job site in unopened cartons, containers, etc., as received from the'manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, for approval prior to purchasing, catalog cut sheets, literature and . descriptive material of products and materials to be utilized'. on this project. B. All equipment specified in Drawings, schedules, notes, or project manual shall be included in submittal to Architect. Submittal shall describe or be marked -up to reflect exact capacities, voltages, accessories, mark number as called on Drawings, horsepower of motors, and all other items called for on plans and Specifications. Failure to properly and clearly identify equipment relative to Specifications and plans will result in return for submission. C. All submittals shall be in a three -ring binder with dividers separating the different types of products and equipment. Identify part of Specification or Drawing sheet number to which product refers. D. The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of these submittals to the Architect. E. All fans and equipment shall be submitted with performance curves and capacity charts. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract documents. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 15010. D. Record Drawings: Include a copy of the Record Drawings in . each copy of the operation and maintenance manual described below. E. Upon completion of the portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architects two copies of an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of General Conditions of these Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXHAUST FANS A. Range Hood Exhaust Fan: Roof mounted vertical upblast UL approved for grease extraction. Weatherproof aluminum construction. Belt drive motor with variable speed drive. Backward inclined spark proof fan wheel. AMCA certified rating. Integral grease cowl with lid to remove grease and pipe to suitable container. Internal NEMA weatherproof service disconnect in housing and insulated roof mounting curbs. Comply with National Fire Protection Association 76 requirements. Motors, bearings and drives shall be out of the airstream for protection. Steel structural members for reinforcement and firm supports. (Furnished by Kitchen Equipment Contractor and installed by Mechanical Contractor) B. Roof Exhaust Fan: Centrifugal roof type for curb mounting. Weatherproof housing. Motor mounted out of airstream. Ball bearings with lube fitting. Fan and motor isolated. Disconnect switch in housing. Backdraft damper. Birdscreen. UL listed. Weatherproof aluminum construction. Forward curve or backward inclined fan wheel. Exhaust fan for dishwasher hood shall be epoxy coated fan wheel and housing or aluminum construction. Penn, Greenheck, Cook, Pace, Carnes, Captive -Aire or approved. C. Ceiling Exhaust Fan: Fan with backdraft damper; 4.2 sones; 1070 RPM maximum. Cook, Penn, Greenheck, Carnes or approved. 2.02 MAKE -UP AIR UNIT A. Equipment and controls furnished by Kitchen Equipment Contractor and installed by Mechanical Contractor. 2.03 ROOFTOP GAS -FIRED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Units: UL approved of single - package type with combination air -to -air cooling and gas heating. Carrier, Trane. or Lennox. B. Casing: Shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with baked enamel. C. Compressor: The unit shall contain hermetic compressor(s) with suitable vibration isolators and crankcase heater and shall have a 5 -year warranty. Shall have capability to operate down to 18 degree outside temperature. (See Item M. for low ambient equipment accessories.) D. Coils: Shall be constructed of aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. E. Fans and Motors: The indoor air fan shall be of the forward - curved centrifugal type, belt driven motor. The outdoor air fan(s) shall be of the direct drive propeller type. F. Filters: 2 -inch thick disposable pleated media. Provide two sets. G. Heating Section: Provide AGA approved natural gas heater and complete with all safety controls required by Code. Unit to have spark ignition. H. Electrical: Electrical connection to be single point with control power transformer and all interconnection wiring internal to unit casing. 1. Safety Controls: Cooling section shall be protected by fusible plug, high and low pressurestat, compressor motor overloads, crankcase heater, freezestat and a timing device which will prohibit the compressor motor from being subjected to starting current more than once every five minutes. J. Economizer: Economizer shall include return air (RA) and outside air (OA) dampers, outdoor air filter and hood and fully modulating electric control system with enthalpy changeover control and adjustable mixed air thermostat. Economizer control shall be capable of introducing up to 100 percent outdoor air. The control changeover from mechanical cooling to economizer operation shall be fully automatic through an adjustable enthalpy control device. Economizer shall be integrated type capable of simultaneous compressor and economizer operation for maximum benefit of outdoor air. Provide gravity exhaust dampers. K. Controls: Refer to Section 15950 for controls. L. Roof Mounting Curb (Maximum 8- inches high): Mates with rooftop unit to provide support and complete weathertight installation when properly installed. Provide with wood nailer strip. (See Architectural Drawings for detail.) M. Accessories: Provide low ambient controls for equipment operation down to 18F. 2.04 DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES A. General: Diffuser sizing based on air being introduced at 20F temperature differential, and air being diffused at the 5 -foot level to a velocity not greater than 50 FPM. Diffusers selected so as not to exceed the NC -33 curve when the volume damper is 50 percent open. Manufacturer shall guarantee to meet the above performance factors or replace all diffusers where required. B. Types: See Schedule on Drawings for types. C. Approved Manufacturers: Tuttle & Bailey, Titus, and Carnes. 2.05 DAMPERS A. Extractors (EX): Provide at all right angle supply branches, behind grilles by the same manufacturer as the supply grilles. Each unit shall be the same size as the grille face. B. Volume Dampers (VD): Provide in supply, exhaust and return ducts as required for balancing and construct of galvanized sheets not lighter than 18 gauge, reinforced to prevent vibration, equipped at both ends with brass bearing mounts and of sufficient length to provide a complete shutoff of the duct. C. Provide each damper with an adjustment and locking quadrant device as manufactured by Young Regulator No. 403 operator for accessible locations, or No. 315 for nonaccessible locations. Ventlock or approved. Provide operating rod and attaching devices as required for No. 315 operator. D. Fire Dampers (FD): Provide with sleeves in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 90 and local Code, complete with damper blades, fusible links, linkage and stops. UL labeled dampers are to have near 100 percent free area. Advanced Air, Ruskin, Tuttle & Bailey, Action Air, Phillips or approved. 2.06 FILTERS A. Disposable, deep pleated, dry, strainer type filter. Filter media shall be reinforced, nonwoven cotton laminated to a rigid, corrosion resistant steel mesh. Filter pack supported by steel guards and enclosed in a chipboard frame. 30 percent efficiency on NBS Atmospheric Test. 2 inches thick. Aco -Air Products, Model E35 Series 2. Farr, American Air Filter, Type GX. • 1 2.07 FLUE VENT PIPE A. Furnish and install Metalbestos double wall Type "B" or approved gas vent. Vent piping must be UL labeled and be rated for 1 inch clearance to combustibles. Roof cap to match flue type and be approved and suitable for application. See Drawings for sizes. Coordinate installation with all manufacturers and Code requirements and with actual structural conditions. 2.08 DUCT CONSTRUCTION A. Ductwork: Construction from galvanized sheet metal to conform to Chapter 10, Uniform Mechanical Code, Volume II, latest Edition, or latest Edition ASHRAE Guide Table. B. Fiber Glass Duct Board: (Ductboard shall not be permitted in any portion of the Kitchen area or areas in the Dining Room which are exposed to visibility) At Contractor's option, certain portions of ductwork may be constructed of fiberglass ductboard. Fiberglass 1 inch thick Type 475 ductboard which meets the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B; has a factory applied Underwriter's Laboratories UL 181, Class 1 Air Duct listing label; has double density molded M/F slip joint edges, or plain edge when utilizing the Fiber Grip closure system; has a FSK (foil, scrim, Kraft) facing; has a thermal conductance factor of C = 0.23 at 75F mean; has a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 as per ASTM C423 -60T using a No. 6 mounting; and has an air friction correction factor of 1. Maximum at 2,000 FPM. Schuller or approved. Duct board approved on concealed supply and return ductwork, unless noted or specified otherwise. Ductboard not approved for exposed ductwork, make -up air duct and within 10' -0" of rooftop AC unit location. C. Dishwasher Exhaust Ductwork: Construct from aluminum or stainless steel to conform to Chapter 10, Uniform Mechanical Code, latest edition, or 1983 ASHRAE Guide Table. Seal all joints with Ray -Chem "Shrink- Tape" or mastic and slope duct toward dishwasher. D. Range Hood Exhaust Duct: Install per UMC and NFPA requirements. Construct of 16 gauge stainless steel and /or black steel to conform with UMC. Provide all welded construction. (external welds only) E. Flexible Ducts: Galvanized spring steel wire helix covered with continuous liner and attached to liner with spray coating, one inch thickness of fiberglass insulation, plastic vapor barrier jacket sealed at both ends. 0.25 K factor at 75F mean temperature, rated for continuous service at 15 inch S.P. All joints made with 1/2 inch wide positive locking steel straps. UL approved per UL 181. Maximum length of five feet. Manufacturer: Genflex, Thermaflex, Cleavaflex, Flexmaster or approved. 1. Provide flexible duct in fully extended condition, free from sags and kinks. 2. Use only the minimum length required to make the connection. 3. Do not exceed 5' -0" in length. 4. Where horizontal support is required, provide at least 3/4 inch wide banding material hangers at not more than 36 inch centers. 5. Make joints and connections with 1/2 inch wide positive locking steel straps. 6. Flexible duct are not allowed in open or exposed ceiling conditions of the dining and bar areas. F. Factory Made Ducts: Factory -made air ducts shall be Class '0' and '1' per UMC 1004(b) and shall be installed in accordance with the terms of their listing; Section 1002(b) of the UMC. Installation instructions should be provided for the factory -made air ducts as per Section 10.103 of UMC 10 -2. In lieu of instructions, the ducts may be supported as per Table 10 -F of the UMC; Section 1004(d) of the UMC. G. Metal Round Ductwork: 1. Spiral lock seam type. 2. Fittings: Same construction as the duct. Factory fabricated of the type as indicated on the Drawings. 3. The duct sealer shall be specifically formulated for sealing field joints for round spiral lock -seam duct systems. 4. Duct and Fittings; United Sheet, Semco or approved. Uni -Rib or ribbed spiral wound duct are not approved. Sealer: United Duct Sealer, or approved. • 2.09 AIR SYSTEM SPECIALTIES A. Standard Turn Vanes: Nonadjustable 90 degree air turn, 26 gauge galvanized doublewall steel blade, 24 gauge galvanized steel side rail. Vanes 2 -1/2 inches on center. H -E -P High Efficiency Profile as manufactured by Aero -Dyne Company. Standard Flexible Connection: Waterproof, fire resistant canvas. Allow minimum 1 inch slack and 1/2 inch minimum between metal parts. Ventfab or approved. 2.10 KITCHEN VENTILATION HOODS A. All hoods to be provided by Owner and installed by Kitchen Equipment Contractor. 2.11 UNIT HEATERS A. Electric Unit Heater: Electric wall mounted unit heater with integral thermostat and mounting bracket. See Drawings for capacity. (Qmark, Modine, Cadet or approved.) 2 12 DUCT HEATERS A. Slip -in type heater of capacity and size shown on Equipment Schedule. Coils constructed of 80 percent nickel, 20 percent chromium and insulated by floating ceramic bushings. Automatic reset disc type primary overtemperature protection, replaceable link type thermal cutout for each heater stage for secondary protection. Control circuit complete with thermal cutouts and disconnecting break magnetic contactor, pressure differential switch control circuit transformer with . fused primary. Heaters shall be UL labeled and allow zero clearance to combustible surfaces. Adjustable pressure differential built -in switch. B. Manufacturer: Indeeco, Brasch, Tennessee Plastics, Besco, Titus, Warren, Dell (Heatrix) Heaters, or approved substitute. 2.13 LOUVERS A. Provide and install operable louver with built -in rain stop design. Blades set at 20 degrees at 2 -inch center with alternate blades adjustable and gasketed. 51 percent free area with performance ratings based on tests in accordance with AMCA 500 formed of S- shaped extrusion of 6063 -T5 aluminum with minimum section of 0.080 inch with integral caulking recess. Furnish with 1/2 inch mesh PVC coated screen. Screen to be installed in frame. See Drawings for size and minimum free area. Carnes, Vent Products, Metal Form, United Metal Products, Ruskin, Airolite, Industrial Louvers, American Warming & Ventilating, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTERS A. Install complete sets of filters before operation of the furnaces and supply fans. .Fans shall not be operated without filters installed. Remove coils from units and clean if units are run without filters. B. Provide two sets of filter cartridges for each furnace and supply fan. Clean filters to be installed by Mechanical Contractor prior to system balancing. 3 02 DUCTWORK A. General: 1. Erect all ductwork in a first -class and workmanlike manner, true to dimensions indicated, straight and,smooth on inside with neatly finished joints lapped in the direction of air travel. Properly brace and reinforce all ducts with steel angles or other members. 2. Ductwork installation to be coordinated with elements of other Work. Ductwork shall be installed generally as . shown on Drawings with modifications as required to accommodate offsets around fixed obstructions, etc. Do no prefabrication of ductwork from Drawings; ductwork must be fabricated from precise field dimensions. 3. Duct sizes shown on the Drawings are the net inside dimensions. • 4. Access doors in ductwork shall be located as required for service of fire dampers. automatic dampers and other items requiring maintenance or inspection. Provide Ventlock No. 100 latch with No. 150 hinges and felt gaskets. Minimum size 12 x 12 or equivalent area. 5. Seal all joints in ducts with 3M or Schuller industrial grade pressure sensitive tape or 6 inch width of six ounce canvas pasted on with Arabol. Ray Chem Shrink tape approved. 6. Elbows: Standard centerline radius shall equal to 1 -1/2 times width of the duct. 7. Square turns shall be provided with air foil type turn vanes. 8. All ductwork shall be installed in strict conformance with SMACNA Standards and shall comply with U.M.C. requirements. 9. Hang rectangular sheet metal ducts with a cross sectional area of less than 7 square feet with galvanized strips of No. 16 U.S.S. gauge steel one inch wide, and all larger ducts with steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hangers. Support at 8' -0" on center. 10. Install spiral round ductwork in exposed dining areas, supported in conformance with Detail AA /M6. Ductwork shall be installed in a very workmanship manner and painted to achieve an excellent appearance and which is subject to approval by Owner. 3.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Flexible ducts may be used for the last five feet connection to the diffuser on the supply and return air systems only. Flexible ducts are not approved for the make -up air systems, exhaust systems or where not allowed by the Code. B. All joints made with 1/2 inch wide positive locking steel straps. Flexible ducts shall be supported at or near midlength with 2 inch wide 28 gauge steel hanger collar attached to the structure with an approved duct hanger. Installation shall minimize sharp radius turns or offsets. C. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate through any wall or used in any exposed areas. 3 04 FIBERGLASS DUCT INSTALLATION A. All fabrication shall either be in accordance with the latest editions of the Schuller Fabrication Manual and /or the SMACNA Fibrous Glass Manual, Duct Construction Standards, or shall be fabricated by a Schuller Factory Qualified Fabricator. 1. Grooving: All grooves shall be modified shiplap and shall be machine fabricated, except field fabricated modifications, which may be done with hand tools. 2. Stapling: All traverse and longitudinal seams shall be stapled with 1/2 inch minimum outward clinch steel staples approximately 2 inches on center. Staples on longitudinal seam may be omitted if Therm -Lok -R closure material is used in conjunction with Glassmaster's Foldmaster machine, or approved. B. Closure System: All traverse and longitudinal seams shall be sealed with either Therm -Lok -R closure material or a glass fab and mastic closure system, consisting of one layer of open mesh glass tape, Schuller Type GT or equal, embedded in a coating of duct mastic, Schuller Type M or equal, over the stapled flap on the duct joint. Where inaccessibility and safety in the field dictate otherwise, a SMACNA registered pressure sensitive tape as approved be the duct board manufacturer may be used. C. As a Contractor's option, Fiber Grip extruded aluminum channels sealed with Fasson 0805 SMACNA registered tape, or approved, as required by UL to meet leakage requirements, may be used as a closure, reinforcing and hanging system. D. All fittings with butt joints or without staple flaps shall he closed with 8 inch strips of closure material 12 inches on center across the joint prior to sealing over the joint with identical closure material, except where Fiber Grip is used. E. Hanging: Ductwork shall be supported at all fittings and changes in direction. For straight runs support every. 48 inches where duct span is 24 inches or more and every 96 inches where duct span is less than 24 inches. Hanger strips shall be 1 inch by 22 gauge sheet metal to 60 inch span and 1 inch by 18 gauge wire. Suspend in trapeze fashion with 22 gauge 1 inch by 2 inch by 1 inch channels. Fiber Grip channels may utilize the prepunched slots in the vertical portions of the FG -3 and FG -6 members with 12 gauge wire for hangers. 3..05 CONDENSATE DRAIN FOR ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT Provide static trap seal for the condensate drain of AC unit. Trap seal to be two times of the total static pressure. Route pipe to approved terminal. See Drawings for additional information. Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be installed on upstream side of fan discharge. Method of reinforcement shall be . either the Tie -Rod Reinforcement System or Schedule for Reinforcement, Table 1, SMACNA Fibrous Glass Manual. Fiberglass duct shall not be used in exposed areas or in or, around kitchen area. END OF SECTION 15950 CONTROLS f PART 1 GENERAL, 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Provide detailed Shop Drawings of control system showing electric connections of all control devices. Provide complete sequence of operation. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide under this Section a complete system of electronic or electric automatic temperature control as specified. B. All the necessary controls, wiring and installation shall be provided under this Section. System to be installed shall be as outlined in this Section providing a complete system of electric /electronic devices to perform the sequences outlined herein. Provide control accessories and devices necessary to accomplish the desired result whether specifically mentioned herein or not. C. The control system shall be manufactured by Barber - Colman, Honeywell or approved. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall be provided showing detailed electric connections to all control devices. All control devices shall be completely identified with manufacturer's type number and functional description. Devices shall also be coded to labels installed on each control device whose function is not readily apparent. A complete sequence of operation shall be provided on the Shop Drawings. All electric connections of the control system to equipment furnished by others shall be shown. Submit three copies of Shop Drawings for approval before commencing installation. Any work installed before review of Shop Drawings will be done at the Contractor's risk and will be subject to removal or revision at no cost to the Owner. At end of guarantee period, submit four copies with all as -built and operating changes. Diagrams shall be made current with final as -built and operating changes. 1.04 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall instruct operating personnel and provide three (3) complete sets of operating and maintenance instruction booklets. Provide a minimum of eight (8) hours time to instruct Owner's personnel . in operation of the system. 1.05 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE. A. The Contractor shall guarantee the control system installed under this Section of the Specification to be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and provide service for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. Any defects in workmanship or material during . this time shall be corrected by the Control Manufacturer at no charge to the Owner. B. After completion of the installation, Contractor shall completely adjust all control equipment provided under this Contract; place the system in operation, subject to the Architect's approval and instruct the operating personnel in the operation of the system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING A. All control wiring (line voltage or low voltage), required to complete the temperature control system shall be installed by the Mechanical Contractor in accordance with the provisions of Division 16, Electrical Work and all Electrical Codes. All wiring to be in conduit. B. All control circuit boards to be clearly labeled and be covered to protect wiring from being disconnected. C. Provide labels to clearly identify all components and code to designation provided on Shop Drawings as follows: Labels shall be engraved plastic or plastic sandwich attached in a permanent manner. Handwritten or stenciled labels will not be acceptable. r t 2.02 PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT (AC UNITS) A. Provide programmable electric - electronic type thermostat with night time setback, automatic changeover, heat anticipator and Fan -On -Auto switch. Two stage heat, two -stage cool, modulating type. Set thermostat on auto and subbase on fan on to allow cycling of heating and cooling while maintaining fan operation. Honeywell or approved. B. Provide and install all thermostats in clear acrylic locking boxes with ventilation ports. C. All thermostats or temperature indicators, relay switches, etc., as shown on the Drawings shall be wall mounted and meet ADA Requirements. Verify exact location with structural and architectural conditions prior to rough -in. D. Provide means of providing night setback on all rooftop AC units if required and in accordance with local energy code requirements. 2.03 CONTROL DAMPERS A. By rooftop AC unit manufacturer. 2.04 RELAYS A. Electric relays shall be rated in excess of loads handled. 2.05 TRANSFORMERS A. Transformers selected and sized for appropriate VA capacity . and installed and fused according to applicable Codes. Provide wiring to nearest suitable power source as required. 2.06 ROOM THERMOSTATS (DH -1, DH -2) A. Room thermostat shall have concealed setting, blank cover, and no thermostat. Cover on thermostat to be vandalproof with locking screws. Provide adjustable setpoint. 2.06 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Smoke Detection: Electrical Contractor shall provide duct mounted smoke detectors. Mechanical Contractor to install duct mounted detectors in the supply ductwork as per NFPA 90A and Uniform Mechanical Code. The smoke detectors shall shutdown the air handling unit and activate audible and visual alarm when smoke is detected. Provide for all fan systems 2000 CFM and above (all AC systems). Coordinate with Division 16 for exact electrical requirements. Mechanical Contractor to install smoke detectors. Electrical Contractor to power and wire between detectors and fire alarm control panel. 2.07 TIME CLOCK A. Solid state programmable time controller 8 channel control, minimum 7 -day battery or capacitor backup, 365 day programming. Paragon EC70 Series or equivalent. PART 3 EX CUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The control equipment and connecting wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner by trained mechanics. B. Coordinate with unit suppliers to assure complete operable and compatible system. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Air Conditioning Units: Units to start from thermostat. Set thermostat at 75F (adjustable). OSA damper to be closed during warm -up. Sensors to control (via thermostats) night setback (if required), OSA economizer damper, and heating in sequence to maintain setpoint. Set minimum position of OSA' dampers as shown on Drawings. B. AC -1 through AC -4: Thermostat control by Mechanical. C. EF -1, EF -2 and EF -3: Kitchen hood exhaust shall be interlocked with make -up air systems. (Coordinate with kitchen equipment contractor and Electrical Drawings.) D. EF -4: Dishwasher exhaust fan shall be interlocked with dishwasher operation. (Coordinate with kitchen equipment contractor and Electrical Drawings.) • EF -5: Pizza oven fan shall be controlled by a wall switch. (Coordinate with kitchen equipment contractor and Electrical drawings.) F -6 and EF -7 (Bathroom Exhaust Fans): Controlled by 7 -day time programmable time clock located in Mechanical Room. Coordinate start and stop times with occupied hours of facility. . Conduits between exhaust fans and make -up equipment by Electrical Contractor. Provide and install wiring between exhaust fans, make -up air equipment and hood control panel. H. Starters for exhaust fans (EF -1, 2 and 3) and make -up .air units (MAU -1 and MAU -2) furnished by Kitchen Equipment Contractor. (Coordinate with kitchen equipment contractor.) I. MAU -1 and MAU -2: Units to start from thermostats. Set thermostats at 75F (adjustable). Sensor to control (via . thermostat) night setback and sequence to maintain setpoint. Make -up air systems shall be interlocked with kitchen hood exhaust to override thermostat on /off function. J. DH -1 and DH -2: Unit to be controlled from space thermostat . to maintain setpoint. Set thermostat at 72F (adjustable.) END OF SECTION Y R O FTlKWrLq R 'Q 1998 'E fiMlT> CENTER 15990 SYSTEM BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • A. At the completion of the job, the testing, and balancing of the air distribution system shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency who specializes in this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTS A. All instruments used by the balancing agency shall have been calibrated within a period of six months and proof of such calibration shall be submitted to Architect if requested. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the balancing agency all ladders and scaffolds as necessary to make the adjustments. 2.02 REPORTS AND RECORDS A. Submit four copies of complete balancing report on forms which have been approved by the Architect. Provide with each report a complete set of marked Balancing Drawings showing air opening numbers and flow station numbers that correspond to the numbering system in the balancing logs. 2.03 APPROVED FIRMS A. A.B.S. and S.A.S. or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING PROCEDURES - AIR SYSTEMS A. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of all air . handling equipment and air distribution devices. Manufacturer's published ratings on all equipmerit shall be ' used to make required calculations. B. Make all changes in the pulleys, belts and dampers as required to obtain the design air quantities. Where required, new drives shall be furnished by the fan manufacturer or his representative. C. Test, adjust and record fan RPM to deliver within plus or minus 5 percent of air quantity specified. D. All test holes shall be plugged. E. After all air flow measurements have been made, mark final position of balancing damper. F. Record nameplate data and actual running amperes for each fan. motor. G. Test and record all fan system static pressures, suction and discharge. H. Test and adjust each system for design outside air and return air. I. Test and record entering and leaving air drybulb temperature for the heating cycle of each fan system. J. Test, adjust and record each supply zone, diffuser, grille and register to within 10 percent of design requirements. Each supply zone, grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as marked on the balancing drawings. K. Balancing logs must show each successive test. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements. 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 16400 Service and Distribution 16500 Lighting 16721 Fire Alarm System 16740 Telephone System • 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Where the words "furnish ", "provide ", "install" appear in this Division, or a manufacturer is indicated with item or product catalog number listed, install and furnish the item complete and operating for the purpose or function intended, unless noted otherwise. B. All references to power system voltages are RMS per definition in NEC Article 100. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Electrical systems required for this work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete installation of electrical work shown on Drawings, specified herein or required for a complete operable facility and not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications. Among the items required are: 1. Service and distribution equipment shown on Drawings. 2. Feeders to subdistribution and branch circuit panels, HVAC equipment, elevator equipment and specific equipment as indicated on Drawings. 3. Branch circuit wiring from the branch circuit panels for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes, motors, signal systems and other indicated circuits wiring. 4. Luminaires, control switches, receptacles, relays, supports and other accessory items. 5. Wiring and final power connections for motors installed for heating, cooling and ventilation. 6. Raceway systems for special systems, provide cable or conductors only as indicated. 7. Fire Alarm and other systems.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials Substitutions: 1. Submit requests for material substitutions to the Architect in compliance with Contract Document requirements. Concurrently, submit two (2) additional copies directly to the Architect's Consulting Electrical Engineer. 2. Indicate any deviation or non - compliance by an attached letter explaining a proposed change. Approval of submitted material does not grant deviation from the Contract requirements. Include in Bid Sum additional expense resulting from the Contractor's decision to use substitute materials including all costs by other affected crafts. B. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Attach items of like nature to one substitution form. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit in accordance with Division 1. Include physical and electrical characteristics; i.e. dimensions, materials, voltage, phase, etc., of all new equipment. Include installation wiring diagrams for each special system and communication system. 2. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop Drawings and the Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing Submittals are processed by Architect, Design Drawings and Specifications take precedence. 3. Shop Drawing Submittals processed by Architect are not Change Orders. The purpose of Shop Drawings is to demonstrate an understanding of the design concept. D. Office Samples: Submit samples as requested by Architect. E. Project Record Documents: 1. On completion of work, deliver to Architect one set of accurately marked Sepia Drawings. Show all change and variations from Design Drawings and exact routes of all feeders, service conduits and location of all conduits stubbed out for future continuation with definite dimensions and burial depths. 2. Drawings and lettering, neat, clean and legible. 1 3. Order and pay for required sepias. Original tracings, for purpose of producing sepias, provided by Architect at start of project. 4. Maintain one "work" set on project site at all times. Work set subject to inspection by Architect. F. Acceptance Testing: On completion of work, prior to final acceptance, provide testing organization report with a listing of equipment tests, test items, procedures, results, and recommendations. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit the following prior to final acceptance and Contractor's request for final payment for Division 16 work, in conformance with the Project Closeout requirements of the General Provisions: a. Record Drawings. b. Maintenance and Operation Manuals. 2. Provide four complete sets of Maintenance and Operation Manuals including, but not limited to, the following: a. Schematic diagrams, installation wiring diagrams and instructions and Maintenance /Operation Manuals for all communications, special systems, signalling and control systems and equipment. b. Complete luminaire cuts including lamps furnished for all luminaires. c. Shop Drawings and installation /maintenance /operation manuals for all power distribution and control equipment including service and distribution equipment, branch panels, emergency generator system, etc. d. Copies of certificates of Code Authority acceptance, and test data and other special guarantees, warranties, etc. specified elsewhere herein and /or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Assemble each set in standard hardback, 3 -ring binder(s). Do not exceed binder fill of 50 percent; i.e., 1 -inch thickness of paper in 2 inch binder. Use tabular dividers to organize the materials•in the same order as this Specification. Mark each divider according to (sub)section number and name. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Acceptance at site: 1. Do not use scratched, marred or deformed materials. 2. Do not use luminaires, material or equipment in wet cartons or boxes, stored in or exposed to rain, water, dust, dirt or snow. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Cooperation with Other Crafts: 1. Cooperate with other crafts and /or contracts as may be necessary for the proper execution of the work in the construction of the building. 2. Prior to the installation and connection of the Division 16 work for equipment by other Divisions, the Owner, or by other contracts, verify the requirements indicated in Division 16 with the requirements and characteristics of the other Divisions, the Owner, and /or other contractors equipment. Read and understand the requirements of Divisions 0, 1, 11, 13 and 15 which affect the installation of work in this Division. 3. Obtain wiring or schematic diagrams for confirmation and connections. Bring deviations to the attention of the Architect. 4. Consult the Drawings of all other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts with cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, etc. In general, the Architectural Drawings govern. Resolve conflicts with the Architect prior to rough -in. B. Safety: Refer to Section 00700, General Conditions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Comply with the provisions of Section 01730. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Like items from one manufacturer; i.e.; luminaire types, switches, receptacles, breakers,, panel's, etc. • 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical materials of the type and quality indicated, or prior approved substitute, new, listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, bearing their label wherever standards have been established and label service is regularly furnished by them. Indicated brand names and catalog numbers are used to establish standards of performance and quality. The description of materials listed herein governs in the event that catalog numbers do not correspond to the materials described herein. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Special Features and Incidentals: 1. Include special features, finishes, description or requirements indicated in the Contract Documents for particular items or equipment, regardless of inclusion in the item's listed catalog number. 2. Provide and install as part of the Contract work all incidentals, hangers, brackets, supports, framing, backing, signal transformers, relays, etc., not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings, but required to complete the system or systems, in a safe and satisfactory working condition, provided and installed as part of the Contract Work. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop /Factory Finishing: Modify manufacturer's products at the factory to comply with the special requirements noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Bidder is expected to visit site of proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine the conditions that affect this work. 2. Include all costs in the bid price for the work and /or material required to comply with the Contract Documents, based on the actual existing conditions and the information indicated on the Contract Documents. RECEIVED CITY,. OF TW<WILA' MAR 0 6'1998 601 0'ERM1 CENTER '.:: 3. Failure to visit site and verify conditions affecting work of this Division does not relieve Contractor from the necessity of doing any and all work which is necessary to make all electrical installations and systems complete. B. Construction Documents: 1. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic with symbols representing electrical equipment, outlets and wiring. 2. Electrical symbols indicating wiring and equipment, shown on the Drawings or specified in Division 16, are included in Division 16 work unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Drawings indicate general directions and routes of feeders and service conductor systems. Determine exact route and installation of electrical wiring and equipment with conditions of construction and acceptance of Architect. 4. Deviations from Drawings required to make the electrical installation conform to the building's construction design and the work of other crafts are part of the Contract work. Obtain Architect approval prior to executing any deviations from Drawings. 5. Examine the Mechanical and Structural Drawings to avoid systems conflicts. 6. Data given herein and shown on Electrical Drawings is as exact as could be secured but its absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. C. Clarification: 1. Prior to submitting a bid, bring to the attention of the Architect any ambiguous, conflicting or unclear instructions. Such items will be clarified by the Architect in Addendum form. 2. In the event that time does not permit clarification prior to bid opening, the Drawings govern in matters of quantity, the Specification in matters of quality. In event of conflict on the Drawings or in the Specifications, the greater quantity and the higher quality apply. 3. Should the Electrical Documents indicate a condition conflicting with the Governing Codes and Regulations, refrain from installing that portion of the work until clarified by the Architect. Remove and correctly install, as part of the Contract work, any work installed, in violation of the Governing Codes, to • 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Codes and Permits: 1. Comply with the latest Rules and Regulations of the Codes of the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Appraise the applicable Codes prior to commencing work. 2. Furnish all materials and labor required for compliance with these Rules and Regulations. Items in excess of Code requirements take precedence. 3. Obtain and pay for all required permits, plan check charges and certificates. Deliver Certificates of Acceptance from the Code - Enforcing Authorities to Architect prior to request for final inspection and acceptance of work. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in Division 16. 2. Provide journeyman electrician with tools, meters, instruments and other test equipment. Remove and replace trims, covers, luminaires, etc., and test materials, systems, methods and workmanship in the presence of the Architect for final review at completion of the work. 3. In the presence of the Architect, conduct thorough tests of all Special Systems and Communication Systems. Emergency system tests, conform to Code (NEC Article 700) . B. Inspection: Do not close in or cover work prior to review by the Architect. 3.04 CLEANING A. Tools and Materials: 1. Keep tools and materials in an orderly manner throughout the construction period. 2. Upon completion of the work, remove all supplies, materials, tools, etc., furnished by the Electrical Division. B. Dirt, Debris and Dust: 1. Remove dirt and debris of whatever nature caused by the execution of the electrical work. 2. Leave the entire electrical system installed under this Contract in clean, dust -free and proper working order. 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements. B. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work and as specified herein. C. For non - metallic conduit and direct burial cables, place a minimum 3 -inch cover of sand or clean earth fill all around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length. Remove water from trench while electrical conduit is being laid. 3.06 NOISE CONTROL A. Do not place outlet boxes at opposite side of partitions back to back or use straight through boxes, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces. B Do not place contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, mount or isolate in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and require replacement. 3.07 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE A. No interruption of services to any part of existing facilities will be permitted without express permission in each instance from the Owner. Obtain written permission from the Owner for any interruption of power, lighting or signal circuits and systems. B. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work, due . to maintaining continuity of service herein required. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption. END OF SECTION RECEIVED CITY•OF: TUKWILA': MAR a 6 1998 16010 9' "PERMIT CENTER' 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Raceways. 2. Wires, Cables and Connectors. 3. Outlet Boxes. 4. Devices and Plates. 5. Disconnect Switches. 6. Identification. 1.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect equipment, whether furnished by Owner or other Divisions of the Contract, electrically complete. 1.03 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for electrical equipment installed. (Support to withstand four times weight of equipment it supports). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Conduits: 1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): Hot dip galvanized after thread cutting. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC -581 (latest revision) and ANSI Specification C80.1. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot dip galvanized after thread cutting. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC -581 (latest revision).. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot dip galvanized and chromate coated. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC -563 (latest revision) and ANSI Specification C80.3.`- 4. Flexible Conduit: Reduced wall flexible steel conduit. Hot dip galvanized. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC -566. 5. Flexible Conduit, PVC Coated: Hot dip galvanized steel. PVC chemical resistant jacket extruded to core, up to 1 inch trade size. PVC chemical resistant jacket, tubed over core, up to 4 -inch trade size. 6. PVC: Class 40 heavy wall rigid PVC. Rated for use with 90C conductors. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WC1094A and NEMA TC -2. B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Bushings: Insulated type for threaded Rigid. and IMC conduit. Thomas & Betts 1222 Series or O -Z Gedney "B Series ". Insulated grounding type for threaded Rigid and IMC conduit: O -Z Gedney "BLG Series ". 2. EMT Connectors and Couplings: Steel gland, Tomic, Breagle or O -Z Gedney 7000 ST Series, preinsulated type connectors. Set screw type, zinc plated, steel. Provide continuous ground wire with set screw connectors /couplings. 3. Expansion /Deflection Fittings: EMT use O -Z Gedney Type "TX ". GRC use O -Z Gedney Type "AX ", "DX" and "DXX ". 2.02 WIRES AND CABLES A. Copper, 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 14 AWG to 10 AWG, solid or stranded. Conductors 8 AWG and larger, stranded. Phase color to be consistent at all feeder terminations; A -B -C, top to bottom, left to right, front to back. Conductors 3 AWG and larger, minimum insulation rating of 75C. Insulation types THWN, THHN or XHHW. Color code conductors as follows: PHASE 208V WYE A Black B Red C Blue Neutral White Ground Green 2.03" CONNECTORS A. Copper Pads: Drilled and .tapped . for multiple .conductor terminals. 1 c B. Lugs: Indent /compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors. Manufactured by Anderson, Burndy, Ilsco, or Thomas & Betts. C. Solid Conductor Branch Circuits: Spring connectors, wire nuts, for conductors No. 18 through No. 8 AWG, manufactured by Ideal, Scotch -Lock, or 3M. 2.04 BOXES A. General: 1. Luminaire Outlet: 4 inch octagonal box, 1 -1/2 inches deep with 3/8 inch luminaire stud if required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets. 2. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4 -inch square, minimum 1 -1/2 inches deep. Single or two gang flush device raised covers. Raco Series 681 and 686 or Bowers. 3. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install one piece gang boxes with one piece device cover. Install one device per gang. Raco or Bowers. 4. Masonry Boxes: Outlets in concrete, Raco Series 690 or Bowers. 5. Construction: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. 6. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. B. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion - resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with spring- hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including face plate gasket, blank plugs and corrosion -proof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, . gray finish. Bell or Red Dot. RECEIVED : •,CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0:6.1998 1605-0.::- .CENTER. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of the type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. Circle AW, or Hoffman D. Box Extension Adapter: Diecast aluminum construction. Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension to equipment. Bell 940 Series, Red Dot IHE4 Series. E. Conduit Fittings: Provide corrosion - resistant punched -steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each respective use and installation. O -Z Gedney, or Thomas & Betts. F. Floor Boxes - Single Gang: Deep recessed or cast steel fully adjustable before and after concrete pour with all required components for complete activation. Verify required components for application of service fittings, covers, monuments, etc., attached to floor boxes. Hubbell or Walker. Activations: 1. Flush: Provide brass duplex or single signal cover, hinged with set screw lock. Carpet or tile finish ring. 2. Monuments: Provide stainless steel monuments with power receptacle or data grommet as noted. G. Floor Boxes - Multiple Gang: Deep steel, fully adjustable before and after pour. Equal to Walkerboy Omnibox multi- service floor box with carpet plates, device covers. Verify color. Partition for different power or signal applications. Provide required power receptacle devices and signal grommets or receptacles as noted. 2.05 WIRING DEVICES A. Wall Switches: 1. Characteristics: Toggle type, quiet acting, 20A, 120/ 277V, UL listed for motor loads up to 80 percent of rated amperage. Hubbell Series 1221 -GRY. 2. Pilot Light Switches: Lighted handle, toggle type, red unless noted otherwise, neon pilot lamp. Pilot lamp energized when load is energized. 20A /120V, Hubbell Series 1221 -PL; 20A/208 -277V, Hubbell Series 1221 -PLF. 3. Key Switches: 20A/120 -277V, black key guide. Hubbell Series 1221 -L. Key for lock type switches, Hubbell 1209. 4. Finish: Grey finish unless selected otherwise by the Architect. Provide Architect with optional colors for selection prior to ordering. 5. Manufacturers: Hubbell, General Electric, Leviton, and Pass & Seymour. • B. Receptacles: 1. Finish: Same exposed finish as switches. 2. Characteristics: Straight parallel blade 20A, 125V, 2 pole - 3 wire grounding. Hubbell 5362 -GRY or same manufacturer as wall switches. 3. Ground Fault Interrupter.: Feed through type, 20A, 125VAC, specification grade. Hubbell GF- 5362GY or same manufacturer as wall switches. 4. Damp Locations - Weatherproof duplex receptacles installed in damp locations: Same manufacturer as wall switches. 5. Wet Locations: Weatherproof receptacles installed in wet locations, approved for location and use, Course -Hinds WLR Series. Equip utilization equipment connected to wet location receptacles with barrel type plug similar to Hubbell 5266 -C. Provide continuous use cover with cover capable of closing over energized cord cap. C. Finish Plates: 18 percent chrome, 80 percent nickel, Type 302 stainless steel, satin finish, beveled metal. Provide 3/ 4 inch diameter hole with grommet for telephone /signal system device plates. Hubbell S Series. D. Surface Covers: 1. Material: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2 inch raised industrial type with openings appropriate for device(s) installed in surface outlets. 2. Cast Box and Extension Adaptors: Aluminum, with gasket, blank. Single gang, Bell 240 -ALF. Two gang, Bell 236 - ALF. 2.06 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS A. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches: 120 volts, single pole, 20A, 1 HP maximum. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoors. B. Manual Motor Starters: Quick -make, quick - break. Thermal overload protection. Device labeled with maximum voltage, current and horsepower. Square -D, Class 2510, Westinghouse, Siemens, General Electric, Cutler- Hammer, or Challenger. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 3R enclof for outdoors. cll OF TUKW MAR 061998 16 r MIT CENTER C. Safety Switches: Heavy duty, fused type, dual rated, quick - make, quick -break with fuse rejection feature for use with Class "R" fuses only, unless other fuse type is specifically noted. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoors. Switches clearly marked for maximum voltage, current and horsepower. Equip enclosure with defeatable cover interlock. Switches rated for maximum available fault current. Manufactured by Challenger, Cutler - Hammer, Square -D, Siemens or Westinghouse. 2.07 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Hangers: Kindorf B- 905 -2A channel, H -119 -D washer, C105 strap, 3/8 -inch rod with ceiling flange. B. Pipe Straps: Two -hole galvanized or malleable iron. C. Luminaire Chain: Campbell Chain 75031, 90 -pound test with steel hooks. 2 08 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Engraved Labels: Melamine plastic laminate, white with black core, 1/16 -inch thick, manufactured by Lamicoid. Engravers standard letter style, minimum 3/16 -inch high letters, all capitals. Drill or punch labels for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Use self tapping stainless steel screws. B. Conductor Numbers: Manufacturers standard vinyl -cloth self - adhesive cable and conductor markers of the wraparound type. Preprinted black numbers on yellow field. Manufactured by Brady or approved substitute. C. Branch Circuit Schedules: Provide branch circuit identification schedules, typewritten, clearly filled out, to identify load connected to each circuit. Numbers to correspond to numbers assigned to each circuit breaker pole position. D. Circuit Breaker Identification: Provide permanent identification number in or on panelboard dead -front adjacent to each circuit breaker pole position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. Verify electrical characteristics of equipment prior . installation of conduits and wiring for equipment. • • B. Coordinate HVAC voltage requirements with Mechanical Drawings prior to rough in. 3.02 MOTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Do not install electrical equipment or wiring on mechanical equipment without approval of Architect. B. Provide moisture tight equipment wiring and switches in ducts or plenums used for environmental air. C. Connect motor starter branch circuits complete from panel to motor as required by Code and manner herein described. D. Motor starter and control devices and wiring provided by other Divisions unless noted on Drawings. 3.03 APPLIANCE /UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT A. Provide appropriate cable and cord cap for final connection unless equipment is provided with same. Verify special purpose outlet NEMA configuration and ampere rating with equipment supplier prior to ordering devices and coverplates. 3.04 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT A. Food Service Drawings take precedence in matters of location and electrical characteristics. Electrical Drawings take precedence in matters of electrical connection and branch circuit provisions. B. Prior to energizing Food Service Equipment, review all equipment connections with Food Service Equipment Contractor. C. Comply with "approved" Food Service Equipment Shop Drawings for location of electrical rough -in. D. Motor starting switches for Food Service Equipment supplied by Food Service Equipment Contractor. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR . q . 61998 16050 7 • PERMIT CENTER 3 05 INSTALLATION A. Conduit: 1. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and secure to boxes, panels, luminaires and equipment with fittings to maintain continuity. Provide watertight joints where embedded in concrete, below grade or in damp locations. Seal PVC conduit joints with solvent cement and metal conduit with metal thread primer. All rigid conduit connections to be threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal) . 2. Conduit Placement: Install continuous conduit and raceways for electrical power and signal systems wiring. Exposed conduits are permitted in Mechanical Rooms or spaces where walls, ceilings and floors will not be covered with finished materials. Where Documents permit exposed conduit install parallel or at right angles to building lines, tight to finished surfaces and neatly offset into boxes. Do not install conduits or other electrical equipment in obvious passages, doorways, scuttles or crawl spaces which would impede or block the area passage's intended usage. Do not install conduits on surface of building exterior, on top of parapet walls, or across floors. 3. Maximum Bends: Install Code sized pull boxes to restrict maximum bends in a run of conduit to 270 degrees. Conduit bodies, scandalize,, not permitted in feeders. 4. Conduit Terminations: Provide conduits shown on Drawings which terminate without box, panel, cabinet or conduit fitting with not less than five (5) full threads. Bushings and metal washer type sealer between bushing and conduit end. 5. Flexible Conduit: Install 12 -inch minimum slack loop on flexible metallic conduit and PVC coated flexible metallic conduit. 6. Conduit Size: Size as indicated on Drawings. Where size is not indicated, provide conduit in minimum Code permitted size for THW conductors of quantity required for complete operation. Minimum trade size 1/2 inch. 7. Conduit Use Locations: a. Underground: GRC, IMC or PVC. b. Cast -in -place concrete, masonry, damp locations and subject to mechanical damage: GRC or IMC. c. Dry, Protected: GRC, IMC, EMT. 16050 • • d. Sharp Bends and Elbows: GRC, EMT use factory elbows. e. Install pull wire or nylon cord in empty raceways provided for other systems. Secure wire or cord at each end. f. Large Radius Bends and Elbows: Use telephone ells where linking sections of receptacle raceway for installation of Video or Data Cable. g. Motors, recessed luminaires and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration, use flexible metallic conduit. h. Motors and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration and subjected to any of the following conditions; exterior location, moist or humid atmosphere, water spray, oil or grease use PVC coated liquid tight flexible metallic conduit. 8. Concealed Raceway System: Conceal raceway systems throughout. 9. Branch Circuits: Do not change the intent of the branch circuits or controls or combine homeruns without Architect's approval. 10. Feeders: Do not combine or change feeder runs. B. Sleeves and Chases: Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceiling or walls. Maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies at penetrations of walls, ceilings or floors. Fire Wrap: Provide continuous one or three hour fire blanket where required by code or noted. Provide wrap for fire pump feeders per NEC and NFDA. Use endothermic ceramic fiber blanket, UL- listed with all required mounting apparatus as directed by system manufacturer. Interam- Ceramic or approved substitute. D. Foam Sealant: Foam sealant for use around conduit penetrations to prevent passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water. Maintain seal before, during and after fire. In and around conduit for thermal break at penetration of barrier between heated and unheated spaces. Chase Technology Corporation CTC PR -855, Fire Foam, Thomas & Betts. E. Wires and Cables: 1. Conductor Installation: Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer during installation. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors and raceway entrances after conductor installation. Do not use pulling compounds for installation of conductors connected to GFI circuit breakers or GFI receptacles. 2. Conductor Size and Quantity: Install no conductors smaller than 12 AWG unless otherwise shown. Number of conductors in a conduit run indicated on Drawings with diagonal hash marks on conduit run are for association of the wiring intent. Provide all required conductors for a fully operable system. 3. Conductors in Cabinets: Cable and tree all wires in panels and cabinets for power and control. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards. F. Connectors: Retighten lugs and connectors for conductors to equipment prior to substantial completion. G. Boxes: 1. Location: Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. 2. Round Boxes: Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter through side of box, which would result in a difficult and insecure connection with a locknut or bushing on the rounded surface. 3. Anchoring: Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. 4. Special Application: Provide weatherproof outlets for locations exposed to weather or moisture. 5. Knockout Closures: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. 6. Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and fittings as required for a complete installation. Include but not be . limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, bushings, locknuts, and all other necessary components. 7. Code Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings and size boxes according to NEC Article 370, except as noted otherwise. 16050 10 4 .• 8. Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. H. Wiring Devices: 1. Wall Mounted Receptacles: Install with long dimensions oriented vertically at centerline height shown on Drawings or specified herein. 2. Vertical Alignment: When more than one outlet is shown on the Drawings in close proximity to each other, but at different elevations, align the outlets on a common vertical center line for best appearance. Verify with the Architect. 3. Device Outlets at Counters: Install outlets above countertops with long dimension oriented horizontally. 4. Provide all NEC required disconnect switches whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not. Provide disconnect switch at each motor location within 5' -0" unless otherwise noted. Coordinate fuse ampere rating with installed equipment. Fuse ampere rating variance between original design information and installed equipment, size in accordance with Bussmann Fusetron 40C recommendations. Do not provide fuses of lower ampere rating than motor starter thermal units. T. Supporting Devices: Verify mounting height of all luminaires or items prior to installation when heights are not indicated. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls. Provide independent supports to structural member for electrical luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls or in void spaces and /or over furred or suspended ceilings. Do not use other crafts' fastening devices for supporting means of electrical equipment materials or luminaires. Do not use supports and /or fastening devices to support other than one particular item. Support conduits within 18 inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections. Maximum distance between supports not to exceed eight (8) foot spacing. Securely suspend all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from the floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying. J. Electrical Identification: 1. Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations and designations used on the Drawings with equipment labels. 2. Conductor Identification: Apply markers on each conductor for control, signaling and communications circuits. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA 0 1 0 A R 1 6 1 , 1 9 9 8 PERMIT, CENTER 3. Install an engraved label on each major unit of electrical equipment, including but not limited to the following items: Disconnect switches, relays, contactors, time switches, override switches, service disconnects, distribution switches, branch circuit panelboards, and central or master unit of each electrical system including communication /signal systems. 4. Install engraved branch panelboard identification labels on the inside of flush panels, visible when door is opened. Install label on outside of surface panel. 5. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Wiring Device Tests: Test wiring, devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test receptacles for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring. B. Feeder Test: Test conductor insulation for conformity with 1000V megger. Minimum insulation resistance acceptable is l megohm for systems 600V and below. END OF SECTION 16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metering Equipment. 2. Grounding. 3. Main Distribution Panelboard. 4. Branch Panelboards. 5. Fuses and Circuit Breakers. 6. Contactors. 7. Time Switches and Photo - Electric Switch. B. Fees: Pay all fees levied by Serving Electric Utility to provide service to this project. Obtain fees from Serving Electric Utility prior to submitting a bid. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Service: 1. Utility Company Requirements: Comply in every respect with requirements of Serving Electric Utility pertaining to equipment installed by Division 16. 2. Service Lateral Raceways: Provide service lateral raceways terminated at current transformer section of Main Distribution Panelboard. 3. Metering Equipment Enclosure: Provide equipment physical size and internal support structure as required by Serving Electric Utility. 4. Meter Base: Provide flush Electric Utility. 5. Provide service lateral Drawings. B. Grounding Design Requirements: 2. Ground all metal raceway systems. mounted as required by Serving conductors where shown on 1. Provide grounding and bonding of electrical service, circuits, equipment and special systems as required by Code and indicated in the Contract Documents.`. 3. Bond all junction or pull boxes to feeder ground conductor or grounded metal raceway. 4. Establish a building ground electrode (Uffer) in building concrete footing. 5. Performance Requirements: Supplement the grounded neutral of the secondary distribution system with an equipment grounding system to properly safeguard the equipment and personnel. Install equipment grounding such that all metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits operate continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. C. Panelboard Design Requirements: 1 Provide integral current transformer compartment for installation of current transformers and termination of secondary service lateral conductors at Main Distribution Panelboard. 2 Provide Main Distribution Panelboard with Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating greater than available fault current, as determined by Serving Electric Utility, at the current transformer line terminals. 3 Minimum Branch Circuit Panelboard Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating, 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at service voltage less than 250VAC. 4 All Field Replaceable Lugs: Compression type, no set screw lugs allowed. 5. Cable and tree conductors in panelboards with plastic ties. 6. Provide all panels and . circuit breakers UL Series rated. 7. If series rating is used to provide required fault current interrupting capacity, identify all equipment as required by NEC. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data socket. for meter socket enclosure and meter B. Submit Shop Drawing of metering equipment.. enclosure,, include with Main Distribution Panelboard. • C. Panelboard Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings of panelboard assemblies including dimensions of enclosures and flush trim covers. Indicate top and bottom conduit entry areas. D. Overcurrent Protective Devices Product Data: Provide instantaneous let- through current curves and average melting time current curves for fuses supplied to project. Provide product data and time /current trip curves for circuit breakers supplied to project. E. Submit product catalog cut sheets for contactors, time switches and photoelectric switches. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Meter Base: Flush mounted meter socket enclosure. Provide energy /demand and reactive energy /demand meters as required by Serving Electric Utility. B. Metering Equipment Enclosure: Construct as an integral part of the Main Distribution Panelboard. C. Ground Rods: Characteristics: Copperclad steel, 3/4 -inch diameter, 10 feet long, tapered point, chamfered top. Manufactured by Weaver. D. Grounding Connectors: 1. Ground Rod to Horizontal Ground Conductor: Hydraulic compression tool applied, Burndy YGLR -C or Thomas & Betts. 2. Ground Rod to Vertical Ground Conductor: Hydraulic compression tool applied, Burndy YGHP -C or Thomas & Betts. 3. Exothermic Welding Process: Cadweld. E. Pipe Grounding Clamp: Mechanical ground connector with cable parallel or perpendicular to pipe. Burndy GAR, O -Z Gedney, Thomas & Betts. F. Main Distribution Panelboard and Branch Panelboards Construction: 1. Siemens, Square -D, Cutler- Hammer, Westinghouse, Challenger, General Electric, or approved substitute. RECEIVED CITY. OF TUKWILA MAR: 0 6")998 16.400: 3 PERMIT CENTER 2. Standards: Comply with requirements of UL 891, NEMA PB2 and NEC Article 384 in construction of Main Distribution Panelboard. Provide short circuit current rating (Integrated Equipment Rating, IER) for panelboards. Furnish panelboards with UL label. 3. Main Distribution Panelboard Enclosure: Free standing, dead front with front accessibility required. Framework constructed of formed, Code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation bolt steel base channels to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. Provide each section with individually removable top plate and open bottom to permit installation and termination of service and /or feeder raceways. Provide full height barriers between sections. 4. Main Distribution Panelboard Bussing: Plated copper or extruded aluminum plated by ALTAN 70 or 80 process. Bus supports, connections and joints bolted together with hex -head bolts and Belleville washers. Full length of panelboard ground bus, 5 percent of phase bus capacity. 5. Fusible Switches: a. Provide fusible switches quick -make, .quick -break with fuse rejection feature for Class "R" fuses up to 600 amps and group mounted in panel -type construction. b. Provide switches of 30 -200 amperes with plug -on line side connections and built in fuse pullers (30 -100A units) . c. Provide each switch enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure will employ a hinged cover for access to the fuses which will be interlocked with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover when the switch is in the "ON" position. Construct this interlock so that it can be released with a standard electrician's tool for testing fuses without interrupting service. d. Provide the units with padlocking provisions in the "OFF" position and the operating handle position giving positive switch position indication, i.e.: red for "ON ", black for "OFF ". 6. Provide switches which pass industry,. standard, I withstandability tests and fuse tests suitable for use :as`. service equipment. • 1 7. Branch Panelboard Enclosure: Flush panelboards rated 400A or less provide maximum enclosure depth of 5 -3/4 inches. Paint all surfaces with medium light grey finish applied by electro- deposition process over an iron phosphate pre- treatment or galvanized metal. 8. Branch Panelboard Bussing: Copper or aluminum bar with suitable electroplating (tin) for corrosion control at connection. Provide ground bar to accommodate specified terminal lugs. Pre -drill bus for bolt -on type circuit breakers. 9. Branch Panelboard Cover: Front cover with hinged door, flush lift latch and lock. Provide two keys per panel. Key all branch circuit panelboards alike. Paint all surfaces with medium light grey finish suitable for field painting to match wall finish. Surface panels to have metal trim covers with no sharp edges or corners. Surface panel enclosure finish to cover finish. G. Fuses: Dual element, time delay, current limiting, non- renewable type, rejection feature. L Class RKS, 1/10 -600A. rovide fuse puller(s) for complete range of fuses. Manufactured by Bussmann, Gould - Shawmut, Littelfuse, or approved substitute. H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. One, two or three pole bolt on, single handle common trip, rated 15A- •800A, 250VAC as specified on Drawings. 2. Overcenter toggle -type mechanism, quick -make, quick -break action. Trip indication is by handle position. 3. Calibrate for operation in 40C ambient temperature. 4. 15A -100A Breakers: Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 5. Greater than 100A Breakers: Variable magnetic trip elements set by a single adjustment. Provide push -to- trip button on cover on breaker for mechanical tripping. 6. Provide all circuit breakers series rated and when series combination ratings are applied, identify all equipment enclosures as required by NEC 110 -22. 7. Manufacturers: General Electric, Square -D, Siemens, Westinghouse, or approved substitute. I. Fuse Cabinet: Provide metallic cabinet surface mounted, with internal shelves, trim cover with hinged and latched door. Size cabinet such that spare fuses required by these Documents do not exceed 50 percent of cabinet volume. Provide engraved label to identify as "Spare Fuse Cabinet ". Manufactured by Square -D, Siemens, or approved substitute. J. Lighting Contactors: 1. Manfacturers: Asco, Square -D, Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, Westinghouse, Siemens, or approved substitute. 2. Lighting Contactors: a. Continuously rated 20 amperes per pole for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting and resistance loads, do not de -rate for use on high - inrush loads. b. Contacts: Double break, silver - cadmium- oxide. Auxiliary arcing contacts not acceptable. Convertible Contacts, N.O. or N.C. Contact status, N.O. or N.C., clearly visible. c. Approved per UL 508. Design in accordance with NEMA ICS2 -211B, rated for application to 600V maximum. d. Electrically Held Contactor Coil: Continuously rated and encapsulated. e. Mechanically Held Contactor: Encapsulated latch and unlatch coils, coil clearing contacts. 3. Enclosures: Provide NEMA enclosure suitable for location and use, flush or surface mount as indicated on Drawings. K. Time Switches: Double pole, single throw; one N.O. contact, one N.C. contact. 24 hour dial. 10 hour spring wound reserve. Provide enclosure with separate hinged door, recessed or surface as indicated on Drawings. Manufactured by Paragon, Tork, Sangamo, or approved substitute. L. Photo - Electric Switches: Hermetically sealed light sensitive element installed in diecast weatherproof enclosure. Adjustable external light level slide. Swivel adjustable enclosure. 20VAC, 1800VA, connected for pilot duty unless otherwise indicated. Manufactured by Paragon, Tork, Precision, or approved substitute. • s PART 3 EX CUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Meter Bases: Locate to provide acceptable access for meter reading and maintenance. Locate to minimize risk of physical damage. B. Metering Equipment: Install current transformers supplied by Serving Electric Utility. C. Verify utility requirements prior to bidding and provide all associated work required by the local utility including but not limited to: Service underground primary including conduit, pull cord, excavation and backfill. Underground pull vaults. Pole risers. Transformer pads, vaults, etc. Secondary service lateral including conduit, and conductors. Grounding of transformers. Service metering equipment. D. Building Ground Electrode: 1. Coordinate placement of ground rods and interconnecting conductor in base of building footing prior to placement of concrete. 2. Install 60 feet of No. 3/0 stranded bare copper conductor in base of perimeter footing. 3. Layout conductor in a workmanlike manner to provide maximum exposure to earth in the perimeter footing. Do not fold conductor. 4. Bond to driven ground rods on 15 foot centers. 5. Tap at center ground rod and extend ground electrode conductor to Main Distribution Panelboard. Install ground electrode conductor extension in PVC conduit with steel ell for physical protection. Stub up into Main Distribution Panelboard. E. Service Grounding: Bond building ground electrode and water service pipe to Main Distribution Panelboard ground bus. Connect to water pipe on utility side of isolating fittings or meters. F. Raceway Grounding: 1. Ground all metallic raceway systems. Bond to ground terminal with Code size jumper except where Code size or larger grounding conductor is included with circuit, use grounding bushing with lay -in lug. CITRECEIVED F UKWILA 164 1 R - 7 1 998 PERMIT CENTER 2. Connect all metal raceways, which terminate within an enclosure but without mechanical connection to the enclosure, by grounding bushings and ground wire to the grounding bus. 3. Install ground bushings on all metallic raceway terminations in pull boxes, panelboards and motor control centers for service and feeders. 4. Install ground bushings on all metallic raceway terminations in pull boxes, panelboards and motor control centers for circuits with overcurrent protection set at 60A and greater. 5. Where equipment supply conductors are in flexible metallic conduit, install stranded copper equipment grounding conductor from outlet box to equipment frame. 6. Install grounding conductor, Code size minimum unless noted on Drawings, in all non - metallic raceway systems. G. Feeders and Branch Circuits Grounding: 1. Install continuous copper ground conductors within the following circuits; feeders, circuits for computer systems and other circuits as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where installed in a continuous solid metallic raceway system and larger sizes are not indicated on the Drawings, provide ground conductors for feeders and branch circuits sized in accordance with Table 250 -95. Provide copper conductor of size indicated for aluminum. 3. Install isolated ground conductors for electrically sensitive equipment. Install isolated grounding conductors isolated from the equipment ground system except at the common ground connection at the service equipment. Provide isolated ground bus in panelboards isolated from the equipment ground system. H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures and Panelboards Grounding: Bond grounding conductors to enclosure with specified conductors and lugs. Install lugs only on thoroughly cleaned contact surfaces. I. Motors, Equipment and Appliance Grounding: Install Code size equipment grounding conductor from outlet box to (motor) equipment frame or manufacturer's designated ground terminal. J. Receptacle Grounding: Connect ground terminal of receptacle to equipment ground system by No. 14 conductor bolted to outlet box except isolated grounds where noted. Self grounding nature of receptacle devices does not eliminate conductor bolted to outlet box. K. Main Distribution Panelboard: Install equipment in conformance with work space requirements of NEC Article 110 -16. Locate equipment in rooms or spaces dedicated to such equipment, NEC Article 384 -2. Coordinate with other Division of work. L. Branch Panelboards: 1. Install Branch Panelboards surface or flush mounted in accessible locations as indicated on Drawings. Maintain or exceed minimum clearances required by Code. 2. Where flush panels are installed, verify available recessing depth and coordinate wall framing with other Divisions. 3. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug terminals wherever practicable. Feeder conductors, except ground and neutral, not to exceed 45 degree deflection from raceway entry to feeder phase lugs. 4. Paint panel cover and surface mounted encloser (if surface allowed) to match finished wall color or finished spaces. 5. Where panels are installed flush, provide (1) spare conduit for each 4 connected conduits from panel to accessible space above and below the panel. M. Fuses: For each class and ampere rating of fuse installed, provide the following quantities of spares for quantity of fuses installed: 1. 1 -24 Provide 6 spare. 2. 25 -48 Provide 9 spare. 3. 49 and above Provide 12 spare N. Contactors: 1. Provide vibration isolation mounting pads for electrically held contactors installed within or on walls which are common to occupied spaces. Isolate terminals and operating mechanisms from enclosure. 2. Install contactors and relays to reduce noise such that it will not create a disturbance or distraction in the areas in which such equipment is located. 0. Control Devices: 1. Install time switches and other automatic control devices in accessible locations near the source of power or grouped at a common location in Mechanical,.Rooms or similar spaces. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILp AR 09 6 1998 PERMIT CENTE 2. Install photo - electric control devices at such locations as necessary to be most effective. Avoid locating photo- electric devices in or at locations where they can be influenced by other than natural light or under eaves. , Verify location of equipment with Architect. P. Exterior Lighting Control: Control exterior lighting . and interior atrium lighting using photo- electric switches to energize contactors controlling lighting circuits. Time clocks used to de- energize lighting at any pre-set time if desired: END OF SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide all lighting indicated on the Drawings with a luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for the location. Where outlet symbols appear on the Drawings without a type designation provide a luminaire the same as those used in similar or like locations. 2. Provide lamps for all luminaires; luminaire design to govern type of lamp required. 3. Provide luminaires with bodies and trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed without leaks or gaps. Where necessary, install heat resistant non - rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between parts luminaire and the surface to which they are mounted. 4. Form luminaires to prevent warping and sagging. Provide housing, trim and lens frame true straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed. 5. Provide wireways and fittings to accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 6. Mechanical Safety: Retain luminaire closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) in a secure manner by screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance. 7. Provide all luminaires with a specific means for bonding their metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor. 8. Minimum 20 gauge (0.035 inch) housings except minimum 22 gauge (0.029 inch) housings will be acceptable provided they have strengthening embossed rib and break formations and meet the rigidity test requirements of Federal Specification W -F -1662. 9. Installed luminaires and lens door assemblies, free of light leaks. CITY RECEIVED 1650 - 1 99 8 PERMIT CENTER 10. Provide hinged door closure frames which operate smoothly without binding when the luminaire is in the installed. position. Otherwise indicated, latches function easily by finger action without the use of tools. 11. Provide exterior light poles with concrete bases and which are structurally supportive of pole under design loading. Provide bases extending 24 inches above grade in vehicular areas and 6 inches above grade elsewhere. 12. Provide exterior poles clean and scratch free with base bolt covers to match pole and fixture finish. 13. Provide poles with polebases rated for a minimum of 100 mph wind EPA ft loading for the quantity and type of luminaire it supports with a 1.3 gust factor. 14. Provide poles with gasketed handholes, stainless steel tamper hardware and ground lugs. 15. Provide ballasts rated for specified lamps, i.e., T -8 rated ballasts where T -8 lamps specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings, Record Drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, lenses, louvers, lamps and controls. 3. Submit reproducible transparency Shop Drawings and two prints of all custom built luminaires not less than 60 . days after Contract Award. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All luminaires specified in Division 16 must be acceptable to the Code Authority for application and location as indicated in the Contract Documents. Manufacturers listed must meet these requirements or decline bidding. 2. Comply with applicable American. National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards pertaining to lamp materials, lamp ballasts and transformers, and luminaires. • 3. Comply with applicable NEMA standards pertaining to lighting equipment. 4. Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM) standards and carry the CBM label. 5. Provide luminaires and lampholders which comply with UL standards and have been UL listed and labeled for location and use indicated. 1.04 WARRANTY . Comply with Code (NEC Article 410) as applicable to installation and construction of luminaires. 7. Comply with the fallout and retention requirements of Chapter 52 of the Uniform Building Code issued by the International Conference of Building Officials, for lenses, diffusers, baffles, louvers, etc. 8. Luminaires installed under canopies, roof or open porches and similar damp or wet locations, UL approved and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations. A. Ballast Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. Not less than two years, based on date of manufacturer embossed on ballast, current with installation date. 2. Warranty includes normal cost of labor for replacement of ballast. B. Lamps: 1. Lamp Warranty: Thirty (30) days for incandescent, six (6) months for fluorescent and HID lamps. 2. Provide labor for lamp installation for thirty (30) days. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Luminaires: Refer, to description and manufacturers in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings. p C � 1yR 0P Tur o vo . 165'06R -0 3J 1998 ' RMr covreq B. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Unless otherwise noted, 3500K minimum C.R.T. 75, length and wattage as noted in Luminaire Schedule. General Electric. No exceptions. 2. Provide lamps by the same manufacturer. C. Incandescent: Inside frosted, 130V rated; General Electric. No exceptions. D. H.I.D.: Lamp types as specified in Luminaire Schedule; General Electric. No exceptions. E. Compact PL Lamps: Unless otherwise noted; Quad Tube, 3500K. 2 02 MATERIALS A. Metal Finishes: 1. The manufacturer standard finish (unless otherwise indicated) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Luminaire finish, free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering or flaking. 2. Interior light reflecting finishes, white with not less than 85 percent reflectances except where otherwise indicated. 3. Exterior finishes indicated in the Luminaire Schedule or on the Drawings. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to the Architect for resolution prior to release for fabrication; provide as directed. B. Light Transmitting Components: 1. Firmly retain light transmitting components in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking. 2. Plastic lenses, molded or extruded of 100 percent virgin acrylic as manufactured by Rohm and Haas Company of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, DuPont, or American Cynamid, meeting the requirements of Grade 6 or 8 ASTM Specification D788, "Methyl Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compound ". 3. Prismatic acrylic, extruded, flat lenses,. 0.125 inch overall thickness, unless otherwise noted. C. Fluorescent Luminaires: 1. Lampholders: a. Silver plated spring brass or bronze lamp contacts, with copper wire leads, factory (socket manufacturer) soldered, welded or brazed to lamp socket contacts with recessed or binder type No. 6 screw terminal connections. Pressure lock sockets with stranded pre- tinned leads (0.005 inch minimum solder deposit) by the following manufacturers are acceptable in lieu of screw terminal connections on sockets; Bryant 4400 and 4000 Series, General Electric or approved substitute. b. Provide all open lamp luminaires without diffusers or guards with turret type, spring loaded sockets. c. Provide special circuit disconnecting lamp sockets for luminaires with dimming ballasts. 2. Electronic Ballasts: a. General: 1) Provide electronic ballasts which meet the requirements of UL 935 and bear the appropriate UL label. 2) Provide electronic ballasts of domestic United States of America manufacture. b. Submittals: Provide manufacturer's data for each type of electronic ballast installed. Provide nationally recognized independent test laboratory data verifying compliance with the specifications herein. c. Warranty: Warrant electronic ballasts against defects in materials and workmanship for five years. The warranty includes complete replacement, including labor, by an agent of the manufacturer. d. Mechanical Construction: Provide electronic ballasts with the same physical dimensions and mounting arrangements as those of their core and coil counterparts. e. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Provide electronic ballasts which withstand input power line transients as defined in ANSI C62.41 and IEEE Standard 587. RECEIVED ' CITY OF TUKWILA 6 501A 6 6 • PERMIT CENTER 2) Provide power factor of 90 percent or higher with the lamp current crest factor measuring 1.7 or less for rapid start ballasts and 1.85 or less for instant start ballasts. 3) Provide electronic ballasts Class "A" sound rated and UL Class "P" thermally protected. 4) Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast not to exceed 20 percent of the input current. 5) Electronic ballast comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference and RFI (radio frequency interference). 6) Provide lamp starting sequence consistent with lamp manufacturer's recommendations without degradation of rated lamp life. Provide capability of operating remaining rapid start (T8 or T12) or slimline lamp(s) if one or more companion lamps fail or are removed. 7) Provide the average Ballast Factor (BF) a minimum of 88 percent under ANSI C82.2 conditions using energy saving lamps. 8) Mark ballasts with manufacturer's name, part number, supply voltage and range, sound rating, power factor, open circuit voltage, current draw for each lamp type, UL Listing and for National Energy Law Compliance (where appropriate). f. Performance Characteristics: 1) Provide the electronic ballasts with an input wattage that does not exceed 85 percent of the corresponding value for energy efficient core and coil. 2) The electronic ballasts start and operate standard lamps at 50F and energy savings lamps at 60F with the ballast case temperatures not exceeding 25C rise above a 40C ambient. 3) Provide the ballast with an internal fuse to protect the electrical power supply from internal component failure. Short circuit protect the ballast in the event of miswiring. 4) Provide constant light output throughout nu.nirnum input voltage variations of plus or minus 10 percent from nominal 120V or 277V, g. Products: Electronic ballast equal to Advance Mark V. D. HID Luminaires and Lamps: 1. Ballasts: a. Provide minus 20F minimum starting temperature. b. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) types equal to Advance 73B Series except, high leakage - reactance high power factor (HX -HPF) equal to Advance 72C Series acceptable for up to 100W high pressure sodium lamp. c. Provide ballasts for luminaires installed indoors, and where otherwise indicated, encapsulated core and coil type or otherwise specifically designed by the manufacturer for quiet operation. Where luminaire is noted as "potted", provide the factory encapsulated ballast potted with appropriate compound, by the factory, into the ballast housing. 2. Lamps: a. Where the lamps are used in open luminaires, equip mercury vapor and metal halide luminaires with an integral approved shield or self - extinguishing lamps. b. Lamps, coated or clear as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer, unless specifically noted on. the Drawings, to provide for maximum luminaire efficiency in the luminaire used. All mercury or metal halide lamps used indoors in finished spaces, color improved, deluxe white type. c. For interior use, all metal halide lamps installed in a common area of the building are of the same manufacturer's production run. Color discontinuities after initial "burn in" are unacceptable and Contractor is to replace at no cost. d. Install high pressure sodium lamps in luminaires designated for high pressure sodium. E. Ballasts, General: 1. Thermal Protection: Internal UL Class P with automatic reset. 2. Power Factors: Not less than 90 percent unless otherwise indicated. CIN T K�I�yu MAR Q 6 1998 1550.0 7 PERMIT, CENTER 3. Capacitors: PCB and other environmentally hazardous fluids not permitted. 4. Sound Ratings: A, except where A ratings are not available as standard products from any manufacturer. Provide the quietest ratings available. 5. Accessibility: Serviceable with luminaire in its normally installed position. 6. Input Voltage: Match branch circuit supply voltage; refer to Drawings. 7. Mounting: Bolt to luminaire housing with not less than two captive bolts or studs through opposite ends of ballast; use lock washers or locking type nuts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify ceiling construction, recessing depth and all other construction details prior to release of luminaire for shipment. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to the Architect for resolution prior to release of luminaires for shipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Products: 1. Coordinate fabrication and installation of luminaires with the ceiling installation and the work of other trades to provide a complete system which fits properly and is of neat and orderly appearance. 2. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain approved luminaires are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hanger clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed. B. Installation: 1. Install luminaire of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to ensure that luminaires comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with NEMA, Code and NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to installation of luminaires. 2. Comply with special installation requirements in the • Luminaire Schedule and /or on the Drawings. 3. Align, mount and level the luminaires uniformly. Use "ball hangers" for all suspended stem mounted luminaires. 4. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the indicated locations for the luminaires conflict with the locations for equipment, change the locations for the luminaire by the minimum distances necessary as directed by the Architect. 5. Suspended luminaires, mounting heights indicate the clearances between the bottom of the luminaire and the finished floors. 6. Where necessary, install heat resistant non - rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks and to prevent moisture and insects from entering between luminaire parts and /or the surface to which they are mounted. 7. Provide wire lamp guards on all exposed lamp fluorescent luminaires. 8. Do not install recessed fixtures in spaces or ceiling types restricted by NEC or local codes. C. Luminaire Supports: 1. Provide support for all luminaires. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling. 2. Maintain the luminaire positions after cleaning and relamping. 3. Support the luminaires without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. 4. Provide proper leveling and alignment of luminaires. 5. Support industrial luminaires with channel equal to Kindorf G -975M. 6. Comply with Section 16190, Supporting Devices. 7. Provide concrete footings for pole mounted lighting units and bollard lights at locations shown on Site Plan Drawings. Provide concrete footings as shown on Drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer if not shown on the Drawings. Minimum base height in Automobile areas is 36 inches. Verify base height with Architectural. CITDECEIVED 8. Provide pole base covers finished to match pole. Y of TuKWllq MAR a. 6 1998 16500 9: PERMIT CENTER 9. Rate light poles for 100 mph wind loading for installed luminaires, with additional 1.3 gust factor. D. Recessed Luminaires: Type of frame to be installed for each luminaire depends upon the ceiling material installed at the particular luminaire location. Check with ceiling applicators and provide the proper trim, frame and modify the luminaire to fit the location and ceiling material. E. Wiring: 1 Recessed luminaires to be installed using flexible metallic conduit with luminaire conductors to the branch circuit conductors in a nearby accessible junction box over the ceiling. Junction box fastened to a building structural member within six feet of the luminaire. 2 Install luminaires for lift -out and removal from ceiling pattern without disconnecting conductors or defacing the ceiling materials. 3. Flexible connections where permitted to exposed luminaires; neat and straight, without excess slack, attached to the support device. 4 Install junction box, flexible conduit and high temperature insulated conductors for through wiring of recessed luminaires as required. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Upon completion of installation of luminaires, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. 2. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjusting: Focus and adjust the floodlights, spotlights, and . other adjustable luminaires, with the Architect, at such time . of day or night as required. 3 CLEANING Leave luminaires clean and operational at the time of acceptance of the work. Clean and protect the luminaires from dirt, dust, paint, debris, etc. If luminaires are dirty . at completion of the project, clean them at no additional cost. END OF SECTION • 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design, furnish and install a complete non -coded supervised voice evacuation fire alarm system. Refer to Drawings for equipment and device layout and system riser diagram. Initiate the following operations following actuation of any non -coded manual alarm station, flow switch or other approved normally open contact device. 1. Energize appropriate zone annunciator lamp at fire alarm control panel. 2. Broadcast voice evacuation message via speaker system. 3. Energize strobe devices. 4. Mute background music system and /or transfer source from music system to fire alarm system. 5. Provide alarm signal to Division 15 control system or equipment. 6. Activate dialer, transmit alarm message to central receiving station. B. Interface with duct ionization and smoke detectors provided in Division 15. C. Actuate a zone trouble lamp in response to operating power failure, open circuit or ground in system wiring. Lamp remains energized until system restored to normal. D. Provide battery back -up, complete with charging system, as an integral element of fire alarm control panel and voice evacuation panel. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings :and :product Section 16010. B. Indicate system components, size of components and location. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions and maintenance and repair data. E. Submit complete device and wiring diagrams on architectural sheets at original drawing scales with indication of device type and physical location, battery calculations, and component description to the Architect, Engineer, and to the local Fire Authorities having Jurisdiction, for approval, prior to construction. F. Submit, prior to final acceptance, a letter confirming that all inspections have been completed and the system is installed and functioning in accordance with the Specifications. Include manufacturer representative's certification of installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. 1991 Uniform Building Code, Section 609, Fire Alarm Systems. 2. 1991 Uniform Fire Code, Section 14.104 (b) (1 -3), required fire alarm system installations, Group A, Division 2.1 occupancies. 3. 1991 Uniform Fire Code Standards, 14 -1 and 14 -2; design, installation and maintenance of fire alarm systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm System: ADT, Gamewell, Honeywell, Kidde, Pyrotronics and Simplex. B. Dialer: Silent Knight. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Alarm Control Panel: 1. 24 VDC system complete with necessary switches, relays, indicator lamps, wiring, terminals, etc., required for . complete operation, supervision and control. Similar to Simplex 4001 Series. 2. Control Panel Functions: a. Green power "on lamp . b. Facilities to initiate transmission of alarm or trouble to remote central receiving station. c. One spare signal circuit. d. Zone annunciator lamps, one red alarm and one yellow trouble for each zone. e. Trouble lamp and buzzer. f. Power supplies as required for system alarm initiation and alarm signal devices and accessories. g. Relay for Division 15 control. h. System battery back -up to meet performance requirements of Code and Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Voice Evacuation Control Panel: 1. Provide supervised systems of amplifiers and speakers for distribution of voice evacuation message. 2. Provide digitally recorded programmable read only memory (PROM) evacuation message. 3. Transfer relay to select background music source or voice evacuation message source. 4. Voice evacuation message initiated by alarm signal from fire alarm control panel. 5. Continuously repeat message until manually silenced. 6. Provide system battery back -up to meet performance requirements of Codes and Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Speakers: 1. 8 inch cone, maximum 5 watt (RMS) complete with 25V transformer. Baffle, 24 gauge perforated steel, round, finished in white semi -gloss baked enamel. Simplex No. 2902 -9705. 2. Speaker back box, cylindrical with patched jute lining, undercoated. Simplex No. 2975 -9158. 3. Tile bridge at T -bar installations, 24 gauge metal with iron phosphate coating. Simplex No. 2905 - 9936. c�,�„�RCEF IVED 16721 MAR 0 1998 PERMIT cant D. Visual alarm strobe, wall mounted, 100 candela - second xenon flash, clear lamp cover, white and red base with red letters. Simplex No. 4904 - 9501/4904 - 9105. E. Weatherproof bell, vibrating, 6 inch diameter, red finish. Simplex No. 2975- 9008/2901 -9002. F. Cable, suitable for installation conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 3.02 APPLICATION END OF SECTION Furnish and install in •accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for erection of a complete system. Comply with requirements. of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. Typical wiring consists of four conductors looped through each device of a common zone. Acceptable wiring methods include open cable in accessible building void spaces or individual conductors installed in conduit. A. Provide trouble signal only in response to Division 15 duct detectors and kitchen hood fire suppression system. B. Ceiling speakers in public spaces, Dining, Buffet, Hall and Toilets may also be used to distribute background music. Coordinate with background music system installer.' for provision of music signal at transfer, relay in voice evacuation control panel and . muting of background music throughout during a fire alarm. 16740 TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERATE 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Telephone Raceway. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide an empty telephone raceway system for the building telephone system wiring as indicated on the Drawings as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. As applicable under related work. B. Device plate provided by telephone equipment installer. C. Furnish and install all plywood black formica faced terminal boards sized as shown on Drawings. Plywood is 3/4 -inch. Hold plywood up 2 inches above finished floor. D. Wiring, instruments and equipment will be furnished and installed by the telephone equipment installer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical work in main Telephone Equipment Room as shown on Drawings and coordinated with the telephone company. B. A11 sleeves having cables installed and /or empty are filled with an approved fireproofing sealer to maintain the fire integrity of the floor slab. C. Bush all conduits. D. Provide a No. 6 grounding conductor at all terminal boards bonded to the main Equipment Room ground grid. END OF SECTION. PUBLIC TOILETS • WC. URINALS SINKS OTHER MEN, REOE 2 2 2 PROVIDED 2 2 2 WOMEN: RE0'0 4 PROVIDED ' GENERAL NOTES 7 .21 N BEURE. "B-m CF F cON RA CTORTo L L[ NC. 1 GONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR ALL EXPENSES REPAIR OR REP.ACEMENT UTILITIES TwE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERA' LOCATIONS ALL 7 00C SERAEE w COORDINATE LOCATION ...LOOR F.00R DRAINS SLAB DEA...BONS AND RASED CAA. EwECTR AND PLWENG ST-BOATS, AND AA- CY-ER WW2< UNDER TwISSEOPE OF RESACNSIBIL TIES RELA TO "HIS EQ4IPAENT 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROADE WYER POWER AND 7 0107 FACILD ES AS 4 W/EE E <ND UNE✓`o z ,oY ee E ETE BE BE LEFT In ABROOM cLEANLCONDrTN417nLL ,XP THE 0vTR4OT N l SHALL AKE 4CEBBAR P C-.JT.ONS EN9-RE THE 6GFE *Y 6 T+ OC -u AVTB ND W RS AT NE ALL TI' CONSULTANTS ARCHITECTS: STRUCTURAL: MECHANICAL c ELECTRICAL: FOOD SERVICE. INTERIOR. LANDSCAPE. c(ry 1S i11 E P°'lu Frn 1 1 T2S NE CONTRACTOR WALL FIELD vBRIFY AL. CONDITIoNS ANC DINE... PRIER 10 ANT WO. AND SHALL BE ...BIBLE FOR ALL 1.12., AND MATERIALS INCL.,. 7.OSE FURNISHED BY SUBCONTRACTORS, TAKE PAC = ci's nL : .PED o ,,," DIxREPAU_Y PRIDR rD ALL GWENS10715 ON FLANS A. FROM FACE STO2 OR CENTE,NE LNLESS 72. CONTRACTOR 64,1_ REPORT 70 NB ARGAITECT ANY ERRON.25 NOWSISTENDES OR eE AP RDVEC er <RE c`wcecEr4NS of cora rnw Aur ERRDa B+4LL Fl r HE GENERAL B R1Ire 9Hel RMIi 6c A BED An FOR THE EE SUB DiREC Lr ResPONBIBLE L BE _ I. D I B. - . ..o,rwcroR ALL I NI D CITY AE DOOR COUNTY LICENSE SHALL BE ACQuIRED AND PAID FOR BY THE OF oORK, • AGAROVED PLANS 6. G.- BE KEPT N L BEE,. A.A. AND 2944-LL NOT BE uSED WORKMEN 1 CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPW5 B.E NWT ALA SUBCCHIRLOTORS CONSTRUCTION BETS REFLECT SWE INFOR,L TwE EEMIRACTOR SLIALL ALSO • CARE On THE JO B ORDERS, 5E5 ES. .ESE ARE OBE FF1 1, 7 09 \ J\ 45 645733 M-1P +,E,9 VAN LOM,EDWLRDS A.IA..P.C. 34 yW. FIRST AVE,'., SUITE 309 ON 9120e TEL1503J 226.0590 G...242502, .z 2 _T +AMMOAT, D LKERCILORETOWTOUNIE INC V.LANIETTE PARK PEA. 6.220 SW MACADAM AVENUE SUITE 360 oRT2AND, OREGON 91401 TEL :,5031160.3930 xTS03J 168 -39x9 ATTN: BOB WALKER INTERFACE ENGINEERING. INC. 6544 SE, LAKE ROAD MILWAUKIE. OREGON 91224 TEL:(503) 659.6394 AXT6E39) 659-9029 AT, ROB MATTE9ON ROBERT F. SMITH , 45500141E5 E 122ND. AVENUE O Dt OREGON 91436 1E FAMI503, 161.94'2 ATTN: BOB SMITH ASSOCIATED DESIGN CONSULTANTS SW. SECOND AVENUE SUITE 900 PORTLAND, OREGON 91204 TEL 45031444 1 6 9 9 ATTN: SAM TAYLOR CHRISTOPHER FRE914LEY 1020 8.W• TAYLOR SUITE 395 PORTLAND, OR 91209 4 031222 -9851 ATTN: C +RS FRESHLEY FLWE SPREAD CLASSIFICATION OF INTERIOR FN.. SHALL CONFORM 70 T. GOVERNING BUILDING CODE NO CASE LE55 'DAN IS, UB.C. CHAPTER 42. GO FIRE - vERIFY REOUIREDENTS AND LOCATIONS AS SHOW2 Ca PLANS 211, SIRE MARSHAL FIELD INSPECTOR PROVIDE ADDITIONAL E.INWP,E. 45 PHONE COMPANY PROVIDE ROW., REWIRED IN CONNECTION 1.0. THE FOOD SERVICE EQUIP 70 PONDS INDICATED ON DRAAUNGS ANC FINAL CONNEETION F.2 R01.14-IN POINTS TO THE VARIOUS PIECES EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE ALL .CESSARY MATERIALS AS DISCONNECT SOTO, P0CEPTACLE CAPS TO PATCH .CEPTACLES, Tr PIN POLYVINYL TAILRIEGES, SITTINGS, ETC, FOR A COMPLETE, OPERATING SYSTEM. GYP.. WALLBOARD AND SUSAENDED GEEING 87.97EYS SHALL OGN.724. 70 THE GOVERNING BOLDING CEDE, IN NO CASE LESS IMAN ISSA LB.C. MATER/ALS 142 142S, G CFRPART IWO 92 NO CA. LESS 7..1994 LLB. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR AND SAALL REPLACE OR REMEDY ANY FAULTY, ONE 21, YEAR AFTER 7. COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF 7LIE WOR4 UNDER - .IS CONTRACT EXCEPT/OK Y.-IE ROOFING co, A pERIoc OF 71,0 r4/ oR ro AINAINT. ROOFING IN WATERT CWON CO-SaNED By THE OIO 7LIE BOLDING, ALL ELECTR < n_„+<. C41. AND PLUMB NG WORT 5.A0 CONFORM +O THE CON RACTOR ....v. BACK NG OR B.00KNG R.07. RED .OR 'DINT m B00,5 AROGJGE A WATERT G47 SAN TART SEAN 9 COMPLETE DESIGN AND DOCU•104 SPRINKLER 0.1 ee Rec,IIRED FOR DIRECTORY PROJECT DATA BUILDING DEPARTMENT, 'NG ZONING DEPARTMENT WATER DISTRICT: SEWER DISTRICT: HEALTH DEPARTMENT, FIRE DEPARTMEN, GA5 /ELECTRIC COMPANY, PEUGET SOUND ENERGY TEL: 1•000 •321 -4123 CITY OF NI., STORE LOCATION: BUILDING PERMIT CENTER 6200 4 CENTER BLVD. TUKWILA. . 6111 100 ATTN KELCI_ PETERSON RESTAURANT OWNER: LANDLORD, CI, OF TUKWILA COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT SUITE 100 UKW ILA Wq 9 R LVD B 6 610 ATT OO J NORA PLANNER TUKWILA WATER 600 MINKLER BLVD. TUKWILA, WA 96100 1E1,206/ 433 -1863 DAVE GRACE TUKWILA 5EISER 600 MNKLER BLVD. TUKWILA WA 9000 TELT206) 433.064 ATM JOHN NM/AT KING COUNTY DEPT, OF PUBLIC HEALTH 14350 SE EASTGATE WAY B 4:3206 E. WA 96001 T L TM n06)496 -5141 : MIKE BRATCHER TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT PREVENTION AND INSPECTION 4AND0 ANDOVER RK EAST TUKWILA WA e TELT206)515 -4A01 US WEST COMMUNICATIONS L. (2061 -3399 ATTN. KEN STONER TOILET CRITERIA: (PER KING 004511Y DEPT PUBLIC HEALTH TABLE 25 -A (30 5F. PER PERSON) • (I) ADDIT1pNAL UNISE)l RESTR001111205(DED IN EMPLOYEE AREA (FOR EMPLOYEE USE QNL, EMPLOYEES MAY AL50. USE PUBLIC RE5TRG4'15.. BUILDING CODE: 1994 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS OCCUPANCY: RESTAURANT / LOUNGE A -2,I CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 5 -N SPRINKLER.) (5 •1141R) BUILDING SIM STORIES: SEAT COUNT, PARKINGI STANDARD ABBREVOTIoNS GA ▪ AT ANCHOR BOLT GALV ACOUSTIC TEE AnF A00..21812 FLOOR A.=PRdx ea HATEELY BEAD CB CA704 BASIN CJ CLa CEILING OLR CLEAR CHB CONCRETE MASONRY WITS CLEAN OUT co, COLUMN GONG CONCRETE CONST CONSTRUCTION CON7 CONTINUO.. CNT CARPET COLD WATER DEG DEGREE DIA DIAMETER A WIN DREG DR FOOTING FIRE TREATED OT 5T4NFORD6 RESTAURANT 2 BAR, INC, 1165 860 1IR LOOP, SUITE 250 110011.460.006 91225 A AX.(503)520 -6149 TTN: MARK COLCORD MBK NORTHWEST LTD, 1690 912 NOWA:IK STREET TUALATIN, OREGON WOW TB -4503) 691 -9500 03)60 -1212 41120 ATTN: MASON FRANK 1556 50 tar 556 BF,' SERVICE ENCLOSURE 1 STORY DINING BAR- 90 PATIO (SEASONAL) - 52 BEE PARKWAY 845500EN MASTER PLAN OCCUPANT LOAD, r galifg9D ' UrAZA '" . 2 1.2 Dan. OCCUPANT LW,. 1:1 0.72.00 LOAD. EXIT WIDTH, onws FAIT 0012.11 . ell s_- 11 111111oll 6u nlulllll II1)151; 11lllu11111111111 7 ',III I IOOffar61 WIB*BY 117 1 6R 1 ■Liir r 030341Utl p l E lrr o mrt PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RESTAURANT PAD, PARCEL p TUK W LA w ASHVNGT®N ABBREVIATIONS MED EL. 2 EL ELEVATION FD FLOOR DRAN FI FL LION P FIN FLR SOO FACE O° OF CONCRETE PSI FOE FACE OF FINISH PT FOB FACE C4 STUD PIP 11300 SOJTHCENTER PARKWAY PARKWAY BUPERCENTER RESTAURANT PAD PARCEL NO: 262304.9019 2623049019 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON HoR GLOSS 2SEE GAUE GLUE LAM Grp." WALL BOARD OISPOIM WALL BOARD H O. BIB HOLLOW CORE !HANDICAP, HOLLOW METAL NORSE PO.. LOUR HOT WATE AR ETER INSIDE DIMENSION) INSULATION K ILOWATT MATERIAL A L EDIT c MISCELLANEWS POJOSINa OIST RESISTANT GAB METAL NUMBER NATURAL NOT IN CONTRACT NOMINAL NOT TO SoALE CENTER OUTSIDE ARE E DRAIN O OVERALL C HENS N PLnBTICp AglI TE PLANS) POUNDS PER BOUARE F007 POUNDS PER SOJARE INCH PAINT OR PRESSURE TREATED POL E VM L CHLORIDE OUARRT • RADIUS RB RUBBER BASE REINS REA:FORCED RE00 REQUIRED ROOM wom ▪ RIGHT OF WAY SC SOLID CORE eCHED SCHEDULE 61-171.1G SHEATHING 6,4 • 2EIL•tZSgrTSZT:11 BSI SIMILAR SPEC SPECTIICATIONS SO SQUARE ST STAIN • STO STANDARD TL STEEL TREADS T. TOP SOTTOM uNo VB VCT VERT TWEE STEEL UNLESS NOTED BUILDING STANT s TILE VERTICAL VERNCAL GRAN vENT TO ROOF wATT wATER CLOSET 000D WITHOUT WALDeD FABRIC VICINITY MAP l VNII"01IiI PARKWAIY;, SUPERCENTER LAST REVISED M.I M1 M3 M.4 S SITE PLAN - PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN HVAC DETAILS - PLUMBING 4 HVAC SCHEDULES - PLUMBING B HVAC: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • IND KEY, • DRAWING ISSUED TO CITY C5 COVER SHEET SP.1 SITE PLAN AND DETAILS C.40 SITE GRADING PLAN C5D SITE UTILITY PLAN L.I LANDSCAPE PLAN AND DETAILS 4.1 FLOOR PLAN Al REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 43 ROOF PLAN 4.4 PATIO PLAN AND DET 4.5 SCHEDULES AA EXTERIOR ELEVATION 4.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A.! WALL SECTIONS AS WALL SECTIONS A.10 MISC. DETAILS A.11 DOOR 4 WINDOW MT 4.17 TRIM DETAILS A.13 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.14 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.15 DETAILS 5.1 NOTES 4 SCHEDULES 5.2 FOUNDATION PLAN 53 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 8.4 FOUNDATION DETAILS 8.5 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS PARATE PERMIT RE0UiREO FOR: ❑ MECHANICAL 13 ELECTRICAL O PLUMBING O PIPING L3 ITY OF TUKWILA UILOING ON1810N 6.1 81TE PLAN - ELECTRIC -L E2 FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E3 FLOOR PLAN - POWER E.4 SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL E5 ONE -LINE, ROOF PLAN, DETAILS 6.6 DETAILS, PANEL SCHEDULES C11Y OF TOAWILA 3550430 JUL 1 5199 8n AS NOIEO., EUILOR:G DO/111 1.1 FURNITURE PLAN 11 FLOOR FINISHES AND DETAILS 13 PATIO PLAN AND DETAILS 1.4 BAR PLAN AND DETAILS 1.4 DETAILS KI KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN K.I4 KITCHEN PLUMBING PLAN K.IB KITCHEN ELECTRICAL. PLAN K.2 BAR FLOOR PLAN K24 ° BAR PLUMBING PLAN K25 BAR ELECTRICAL PLAN K3 BASE PLAN K4 MECHANICAL PLAN K1 P.O,S, AND. PHONE COMM. KB BAR - ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS K.5 SERVICE STATION IC10 SERVICE STATION DETAIL AND SECTION KII CHEF'S, COUNTER AND BROILER K12 PICK UP COUNTER KID 11180. DETAIL KI4 COOKING LINE K15 COOKING LINE SECTION K16 COOKING LINE SECTION / DETAILS KPI PREP AREA KIS BACK WALL PREP AREA KIS D181-1 ROOM • K20 DISH ROOM SECTION / pETAIL8 K11. BAR PLAN AND DETAILS;'' 2e rve2 K22 H000' AND DUCTTI.4YO7IT• 6111 2(112xwu •1.224 HOOD AND DUCT L4YQU,T, • MAR ,5 5 1084 K28'. BACKIN0',ELEVATIO148 FBV0122E5165 ) K26 ENLARGED KITCHEN „., • 11 1 11 0 1 111i 1 11 4,i n / FILE t untlerstoll 2110 Plan Onec, .FP' 0 12 nro subj. to orroro and omlaolona trot appro. of plans 020 not aut.. the (22.223 1 2/2 adopted coda c! ...nom W 5052020, coY of 2521 .'¢tl pb11 11 KITCHEN FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE DRAWING FILE N0. SHEET N0. CONECTION SFM 004JM01 811.90L FDO(FE 0414 CW I1W W !A W V REMARKS I WALK -IN COOLER - - - - 1' 50 EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 6 PREP -SINK I () I/O' 1/2' I -1/2' 2' 64 EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK' 10 HAND SINK 3/4' I/O' 1/2' I -I/2' EXTEND TO FL00R. SINK I -1/2' PRE -RINSE SINK 15 OVEN (2)3/4' - - - - - (2) 55 MBH EACH 17 RANGE I' - - - - - 150 902 178 ADD- A-UNIT 1/2' - - - - - 40 MBH 19 KETTLE - - - - VERIFY - 20 FAUCET - 1/2' 1/2' - - COL0 PAN 24 SINK - 1/2' I/2' I -1/2' - I -1/2' REFRIGERATOR 28 FRYERS (3)3/4' -_ I' - _ - (3) 122 MBH EACH 29 HOT PLATE 3/4' - VERIFY - - - 120 MBH 30 SALAMANDER 3/4' - - - - - 66 MOH 31 REFRIGERATOR - 3' - - VERIFY - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 32 GRILL 3/4' CONEC100 STE 855661 MIRE 62.5 LEIH 36 BROILER I/2' - - - - - 20 MBH 3B REFRIGERATOR I/O' - - - 1' EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 39 HOT FOOD - - - I -1/2' 1' - EXTEND,TO FLOOR SINK 41 REFRIGEMTOR - - - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 48 DIPPER WELL - 1/2' - - VERIFY - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 49 HAND SINK - 1/2' I/O' I -1/2' - I -1/2' - 50 ICED TEA BREWER - I/O' - - - - - 51 ICE BIN - - - - 1' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 52 WATER FILLERS - 1/2' - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 54 COFFEE IMKER - I/O' - - - - - 56 SOUP UNIT - - - - (5) 1' - MAN1FOLD, EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK STANFORD'S RESTAURANT AND BAR DRAWING INDEX DRAWING FILE N0. SHEET N0. DESCRIPTION 004JM01 MI SITE PLAN - PLUMBING 004J1.902 042 FLOOR PLAN - WATER, GAS, WASTE & VENT 084.0103 M3 FLOOR PLAN - HVAC 084JM04 M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS 084.10405 M5 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES KITCHEN FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE ' RABOL FDTUFE 40NECITON S OAS CW - 14V W M. W V lB.OFIOT 57 ICE MACHINE - I /2 (2) ' - - (3) VERIFY - EXTEND TER TO FLOOR SINK. PROVIDE BACKFL0W PREVEN 50 3- C0/PT. SINK 2) I () 2" - I -1/2' 64 DISHWASHER - - 3/4' - : y 3 3:„ . -- EXTEND TO FL00R. SINK 65 PRE -RINSE SINK - 3/4' 3/4' - I -I/2' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 65 HAND SINK - I/O' I/2" I -1/2' - 1 -I/2' 66 DISPOSER - I/O' - 2' - I -1/2' 71 STEAMER - I/O' - - VERIFY - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK, PROVIDE PRESSURE REGULATOR 79 COL0 PAN - - - - 1' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 80 REFRIGERATOR - - - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK III REFRIGERATOR - - - - VERIFY - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 118 WALK -IN COOLER - - - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 134 JANITOR SINK - I/O' 1/2' 3' - 1 -I/2' SS-1 BAR FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE CONEC100 STE 855661 MIRE LAS CW NW W HL W V P134APKB 85 SINK - I/O' I/O' - I -I/2' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 87 ICE PAN - - - - I -1/2' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 90 JOCKEY BOX - - - - 1 -1/2' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 91 DIPPER WELL - 1/2' - - I -1/2' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 93 COFFEE MAKER - 1/2' - - - - 95 GLASS WASHER - I/2' 1/2' - VERIFY - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 89 GUTTER - - - - I/2" - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 101 GLASS FILLER - 1/2' - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 103 BEER TROUGH - - - - I' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 105 BACK BAR - - - - 1' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK 10B ESPRESSO - I/O' - - 1' - EXTEND TO FLOOR SINK GENERAL NOTES A CONDIT0N5 SHOWN ON THE PLANS RELATIVE TO THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED ARE BASED ON THE BEST INFORMATION AVAILABLE BUT ARE SUBJECT TO VERIFICAIIOU, VERIFY LOCATORS AND ELEVATIONS 00 LITOTES TO BE CROSSED CR CONNECTED. CORRECT DEFI:ENOES CAUSED BY FAILURE TO PERFORM SUCH VERIFICATIONS AT NO EXPENSE TO OWNER. IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF CONDITION IN COUFUCT. NTH THE PLANS. B PROVIDE PIPING, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS IN ACCORDANCE NTH APPLICABLE PLUMBING CODE REGULATORS AND STANDARDS. AU10900TIE5 HAVING JURISDICTION, AND AS O)IIER015E RECOMMENDED OR DIRECTED BY MANUFACTURERS C PROVIDE GAS SHUTOFF VALVES, PRESSURE REGULATORS 0440 UNI0N5 (OR CODE APPROVED APPLIANCE CONNECTORS) AT CONNECTIONS TO ALL CAS -FIRED EQUIPMENY. PROVIDE REGULATOR RE4EF VENT PIPING TO ATMOSPHERE WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF PIPING BELOW AND ABOVE GRADE NTH STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND OTHER SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS E PROVIDE 0EAN OUTS FOR SANITARY WASTE AND ST0RA1 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS WHERE SHOWN AND AS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY 0000. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. F COdR01NA10 FINAL CASE FLOOR SINK AND COLD WATER LOCATORS FCR REFRIGERATED CASES NTH REFRIGERATOR CONTRACTOR AND REFRIGERATED CASE 9UPPUER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, REFER TO REFRIGERATION ORAWMGS FOR O9EN9ON5 AND LOCATIONS, COORDINATE DUCT LOCATION OF COOLER/FREEZER BOX COL DRAINS NTH GNERAL CONTRACTOR NS0*1100). SUPPLIER OF COMER BOXES ONNER AND REFRIGERATOR AND FREEZER DOVES ( CONTRACTOR. 0 C O, NOT SCARE THESE DRAWINGS. OBTAIN CONCERNING DIMENSIONS, LOCATIONS S ROM REQUIREMENTS OF G STORE FIXTURE; DRAINANS, . EQUIPMENT. ETC, FROM OWNER FURNISHED FIXTURE OUER/Fl%TH T9ERE LAYOUT PLANS AND ARCHITECTURAL pR11ECTUR DRAWINGS. N AIL VENT PIPING RCM= TROUGH ROOF TO BE INSTALLED PER ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS AND DETAIL 0/184 N LOCATE ALL VALVES FOR SERVICE ACCE59814TY, VALVES INSTALLED ABOVE CEILINGS SHALL. BE WITHIN 10 G CEILING. 4 NO WATER,.8LY,FR, OAS OR VENT PI0NG SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN ANY SWAM COOLER OR FREEZER WALL K INSTALL ALL OVERHEAD PIPING AS CLOSE TO STRUCTURE AS POSSIBLE RI AREAS NTH E116OSED MCP STRUCTURE, L REFER 1O MECHANICAL S 501100110015 FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT REWOEENTS FO ALL MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. M CODAOWAIE DEMOLITION, 1TTINO, PATCHING, ETC. NTH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND FASTING FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING CON ON CONTRACT SUS SEE SPEGACATONS, GENERAL P RO 1975 NOT ALL PIPING IS ILLUSTRATED. O RAWER 10 004068 S FOR EXACT LOCATION OF DRAINS NO ALSO MIPMENT BEENG SUPPLED BY OWNER. NECHAIC*L OCNTRACTOR ' TO FU NI91 AND INSTALL ALL VALVES. TRAPS. BTRIJNITRS,TBACTI PREVEN1ENS, ETC, NOT FURNISHED BY EQUIPMENT • SU - NEEDED NEED FOR PROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION. P BEER 1G' AR014I1EC111RAL DRANNGS FOR HANDICAPPED REOUIREM0T1S. 0 COR1RAC1OR SHALL COORDINATE ROOTING OF WASTE PIPING AS WELL AS 011 SLEEVE AND/OR 8L0CK -GUT REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING PASSING ' 1160UDI ITONCRETE, FOUNDATION FCOIINOS AND 8101 WALLS PRIOR TO H D FTXNDAIION POUR. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRANNGS FOR Cry . STEM WALL ff RS 9 AND. =ATO FEAT 7. 7999 M 'W ) - QQL R ALL BELOW SLAB DRAIN ONES WITHIN 1110 BUILDING SHALL BE CAST IRON OR OTHER APPROVED MATERIAL PLASTIC NOT APPROVED. 5 ALL CASE DRAINS. FLOOR SINKS AND OTHER INDIRECT WASTE RECEPTORS SHALL BE LOCATED WHERE THEY ARE READILY ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND CLEANING. T PART ALL EXPOSED CAS PIPING NTH ONE COAT G RUSTOLEUM PAINT. U FIXTURE FURNISHED BY OWNER. ALL DIMENSIONS FCR EXACT • CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT SHALL BE 91PPUE0 BY OMER. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL DISPOSALS AND HAND SINKS. ROUGIhIN AND CONNECT COMPLETE. ✓ PROVIDE SPEEDWAY STOPS AND SUPPLIES FOR GINNER- FURNISHED AND INSTALLED THETAS. PROVIDE SHOCK ARRESTOR AND SOLENOID VALVE AT DISPOSAL W PREP SINKS ARE INDIRECT WASTE 'OTHERS ARE DIRECT WASTE UNLESS NOTED OINERWSE X PROVIDE PRESSURE GAUGE AT ALL ICE. MACHINES WATTS 25AU0 -00. SET AT 25 PSI. Y AT ALL HAND SINK5, (H5) AND RE58R00M LAVATORIES PROVIDE SYMMONS 4-108 IEMPEFING VALVE ON HOT AND COD WATER SUPPLY SET AT 110F. Z REFER TO 10001101 CONSULTANT DRAWINGS (K) FOR EXACT LOCATION OF AL FIXTURES AND EXACT DESCRIPTION AND ROUGH -IN REQUIREMENTS OF ALL KITCHEN EQUIPMENT BEING CONNECTED TO AA SHUTOFF VALVES TO BE INSTAl1ED IN All WATER AND GAS PIPING AT LOCATORS SHOWN, AND WHERE NEEDED 10 PROVIDE ADEQUATE ZONING FOR SERVICING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. PROMO* ACCESS PANELS IF CEILING AND STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS DO NOT ALLOW NORMAL ACCESS. COORDINATE EXACT TYPE AND LOCATION NTH OYMER AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. BB CONNECTION SZES TO INDIVIDUAL PIECES G KITCHEN EQUIPMENT TO BE AS SHORN ON KITCHEN CONSULTANTS SCHEDULE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 11110 SHEET. CC REFER TO KITCHEN CONSULTANT DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION O DRAINS AND EQUIPMENT. DO ALL FLOOR SINKS SHALL BE ORDERED 091H I/O OPEN GRATES OR AS INDICATED ON KITCHEN DRAWINGS EE ALL INDIRECT DRAIN ONES 114 F000 SERVICE AREA AND EXPOSED TO BE COPPER WITH CHROME PANT FINISH. FF PROVIDE GAS COCKS ARID PRESSURE REGULATORS ON ALL GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT. VENT REGULATORS AS REQUIRED TO A1M05PNFRE AND TO LOCATION APPROVED BY ARCHITECT. COORDINATE NTH ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT. BAS REGULATORS FURNISHED BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. 00 CONNECTOR SUES TO INDIVIDUAL PIECES OF KIT0104 EQUIPMENT TO BE AS SHOWN ON KITCHEN CONS SCHEDULE UNLESS OTERNSE NOTED THIS SKEET. H H LOCATE 'ALL .YR A MINIMUM OF 10' -O' FROM OUTSIDE AR OPENINGS OF ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT, II ALL FLUOR DRAINS SHALL HAVE TRAP PRIMER CONNECTORS IN ACCORDANCE NW THE STANDARDS G LOCAL AUTHORITIES. PIPING AND SYMBOL LEGEND WASTE PIPING BELOW GRADE WASTE PIPING BELOW GRADE. GREASE COMBINED WASTE A VENT PIPING STORM DRAIN PIPING BELOW GRADE STORM DRAIN PIPING ABOVE GRADE OVERFLOW DRAIN PIPING ABOVE GRADE ENT APING 001.0 WATER PIPING HOT WATER PIPING HOT WATER RETURN PIPING m F10 CAI 1 0N AOX IMUI ATDR 0 ® ® 0 401 001W -' 40 33,LESIDAt 3/4" 3/4' 1 -1/2' 0 -1/2' 1 -1/2' 3/4' NM NOTE FA APPROVED SERVICE CO. TO DO START UP G BOILER SYSTEM AND CHECK FOR PROPER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION, 9A11'ml GRADE' UV AA, MODEL .0 OM 'A' ON T' 0114 ON Re VADERD8fl5101 moo 363 - 012-08 , r - 4 W‘11. A0.V5r TO GRADE VENT FIFES { -� 1_. 111!, i ! M '. - - - - 1_ CO WA P j IL SAM PLING BO% Issao�l oc6 000 9 ,. i �. a c RI LEE ' a „ 11PICAL - +. TEET~C CLEAR ACCESS OPENING -7 E 24', OIA. HEADY DUTY TRAFFIC LOCKING , PLACES COVER, AIR A OAS TONT GRADE R IMM "C' 2 . -8 . x681 I' -O L SLOT 0011Ii.'9DE5 SAMPUN0. B0% DI M'A 8EC3ON VEW A -A 3 3100 GALLON GREASE INTERCEPTOR 24' DIAL NEAVV'DUTY ' ' 1RAFFIC LOC(OOOARNIE k COVER AIRA 048 T01T. OUTLET CITY 0) IOEWIA APPROVED JUL 151998 AS N01E0 24' BUO.OP) DIVISION FIRE SPRINKIFR RISER PHONE PANEL -F / J -1/2' IRRIGATOR STIKR PROVIDE BALL VALVE AND TUNECTION BY CAP LAN DSC FU APE RE CCN 0 -1/2' RFIVIOFD PRK911(F BAHFI08 P8FOSNTF0 PROVIDE UN1518UT MOUNTING CHANNEL AND MOUNT 840(FLOW PREVERIER BOLTED TO CHANNEL ALONG WALL ROUTE DRAIN UNE TO 1 • / 02 GLEAN OuT ATA 1- WALL CLEAN 005 11 - HOSE BIBB Y@ o VENT TIM ROOF DO BALL OR GATE VALVE V RACKET.OW 006100TER NATURAL GAS PIPING COD WATER, BACKPLOW BELOW GRADE PIPING FIRE SPRINKLER Ms FLOOR DRAIN ESN FL00R SINK Al DV REGULATOR ® NE CONNECTION TO W 511E U0UTES 2 PARTIAL MECHANICAL ROOM PLAN IERITATON 00N1Rn11 FB rA k 1 SITE PLAN 1/20' -' 1' -0" 4' SANITARY' SFWFR Ee 98.05 2 I/O' DO NOTES THIS SHEET Ot 6EE LOB FOR CONTINUATION. R DA AS S 0 804, 91 UTT --06? VALVE, REGULATOR ,0440 UNION 072* ,L AIBN BEPU''J U SEE 24(0 FOR' CONTINUATION. ' ' Q TIE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE MD MAKE ARRANGEMENTS MTH "THE LOCAL GAS CRUD! OIMPARFPOR INSTALLATION OF THE NEW 045 METER AND SERVICE,) COORDINATOR 91011 BEGIN AT THE THE 111E ( '. INSTALL GAS -HRFA WATER' 14410 Ap'1HEAMAL EIPAN901 TANK 101 AGDOIDANG 0410 MPU CAABB�1E 558 AND L00 00044 ARID MANUFAC1EA S. NECOMMEN04619N5 , 080040E NECEIS4167 0V,NRA 8B RESIRD 0A BY MAANNU )1111 B, UIERATUR5 ROUSE 0080' PIPI 10 61.000 SINK IN ACCORDANCE )1111.1' STANCARDS O' LOCAL 4010 0 5EE 1•491 FOR CONTINUATION. �' 1 i 'ORDER EXACT SZE 06 ARE MAN TO BE DETERMINED BY FIRE p801EGTON CONTRACTOR (4' MINIMUM). OONNEOT BUIU)IN0 STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEVER, DOMESTIC COLO AID •0R • FIRE SPRINKLER UNE PIPING TO STYE UTILITY SYSTEM: REFER TO 91E UTU1Y IMPROVE/SENT ORARROS FOR.CONTNUATON. VERIFY EXACT 9ff, DEPTH, AND LCOA OF ANY NEW PIPING. 0/314118 WHIN 6UIIDINO. , INSTALL HOT WATER 8E1URN 0310 895001110 VALVES Al.'" WALL AND SI00000.NTH UNISIRVT M NTNG CH4NNEL 10 ,PR041DE. AND INSTALL BARE CLACK (BY MECHAN10AL). FOR COU4680L OF E.11 AND '8002 PARAGON OR EQUIVALENT, ® PRE - MANUFACTURED CONCRETE GREASE INIEBCF WIT 108 IN ACCORDANCE .WTI RUC RAL FOUNDA STAN0MOS TOR 02 100AL AU1HO61E5EXCAVATI ON. CCORONAIE INBTALLA H 'STTU PRIOR TO g . CONNECT O' BELOW GRADE' VENT APING TO GU1ET LINE AS WEL. AS INTERCEPTOR VAULT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARDS OF LOCAL AU3HORm[5, TTI e{UKWIIA NAR 0 6.1998 , PROJECT NO 00 -084, Lm giFA[F TA51AET41,W. lvll ilIpITTN''lxxl v1O1NM1 2. m, O, IOVo ' 8-10-BB I W O • Z V Z. W to GROUP DINING 3 / 4•C W (FILTE RY O THERS ) CEO o CO o oc 3 /a• Hw Ie9 1/4' 50 SO.F1. T Y - 1 1/4•— - - 11 1 -1 /2 !; ..j( Fdd / � 2 VENT UP TO L. I' S RVE ID CEIUNC SPACE EC air III ■uIi PII I�cl! it W ®1 mil y l_ I /z' wl. 3/4 1I.l ..� NY 1 �.1 - I IN OW WALL . SNONN HALL HERE FOR CLARITY L31] !)JOO MRE 03 REA�3120 50, DINING I PIZZA g LOBBr y I O�D 3 . 4 �il∎loll ®Oil I -1 /4 HW 4 "PO_I � LIGU OR' I ' M� 2 -I /2" CW REAa21)0 SLOPE a IF 50. FT. S ® RAGL' PHONE 4" HOMEN'S FL,EGTR, T AL AAN LO -- 3483.5 MBH TOTAL DEVELOPED LENOT1■125FT. 20 OAS SEANCE COORDINATE LOARCN OF METER SEANCE C W11H URUtt ECH4N9JAL I 3 OIn'OFTU792, CIS ./ V ^/ FEE I' 1999 M I S u, 3 Pau. CENTER E ®Rr ` tlB =l® 0 O 0 m 0 NOTES THIS SHEET 0 ROPE r0M,q 4• maw xaN FPO N BMA. O x R R COMM. m 5q �Im O,Vw Mmm ® 0 B MMam; SIVT-OP MAW AT OCR 031.001. M iww • Na W "o uuml Om asr.. Ml O x R w wl m a u rawrm m wow w.xraa 0 9. cr. �1. YAM MO M. AS ROMEO. wescnw 10 ® MU/MOW MOM r M0721dd Pall mw x WALL PA axmrul m O nom lies nor /PPP r •00R KW MOM. m t.-3 O =T =TX 0. wlw mw mw x wtum COMM m IMMO O P NW InL M. 0pl 0 'R5 tt "pam wN uo TO rsl RCM Raa m NO P. xm 0 -I FOR aNlwnBw ML r Res OM MO Ana= 5RMaln .mNR OWL NAM 0 uraIaTN WON MO PROW MOO. WRIV MOT L.A1101 MO ( 00 3 5 11 0 50 10 0 00 10 50 10 5 10 M O nourcms mom. um invou. FM coo.. wool LOW100. wa4 U u SNOT NI PROWL n IMO WIN TO MOW ORA.. NM MOT WO COM OW • Rom we or now ron 0241.0.11 TO IOW. MM.. MO MI NNW. BMW, MO PROWNAL COMM Pt. TO F0201-M. PROWL PMATION aarmo AOCOTAMB MO MOW MO MOO a.m. Of POW ROWED MOW OM OW MO 2104. WOW AMY O oo-z vo n to r, OWL PROM MMT-OBr VAMP PM VC= • ROMEO FOR a' WINO rauunot WO 1.0.1101 OORMO701 PRO. M MITNAL 201.7. 1)1M COWIN motor PPIN2 UP BMW O vm mw002410ROw win NOMA ® nom /20 PIONL OAR coat on awn onn-orm 92.100 BMW POO= 0.010 MIAMI PM WWI FM OM MOM TO OS ORO OMMOIN PRIOR TO 11011011-M. 0 nom e MEM POW N MP IMO. ROW FOR MOM INSTAI.7.1 OF 11.1001ABON POW WIT LOCI SO W PO Me IOW O Q IONANI. ROW x.q,AP q BmaMRrq 0 AND N; R w m p/ M m M p� 4 y . /MOO WOO ARCM AT �MM niO V ' VI WPM W r6 AT 87 Of LW ROM MB FOR 0210710610 O 10.0 IIaM PIN OPCm O. MOImI M SP cam= N m m M OO TO BB COCIONATID RI T. MO MI-UP MO 70 m %m OTOWN CRAW. FOR COOT WM. MO =MM. ncommons: O 11 COMO u _ ROMP rwY' =won.. MY M n 0 PROM. IM MO NM m ®OM woo row N 1m1 -IA Y0."Im R0 o. NR coloconcoo TO O 07111.11011 WlM[ MM ® OOO imrt x/MOONRM 0 10 ROW010 00. XI O w"RO 0 s M OR WORM MO ORAN 00111. 1R CRAM m NORM n-1 AI MOM ® wales AT WOMB m MP Mt PROM. AMMO .0 MR OMAN MIO MOM nom mom MAN OUT M 1C11011, ® IMO /MCP AT IWO al Moo ADM NM MOM 0 PROWL MO WIW1au MMl -07 Ma PROM RM.* x942.110 ROM ® P Rs.m 07TO OW IN MOW. non. DAM. MOO nsl wa 0 07101111,0 20 MIT POW M LW 544 u max m MU won 50 ® mI AROMA uam Mo Bur - ar COW Rr RMN 5RM4 Ilan ® WOO 'MCP M 5031 WACC OM 0000011011 m 10. 105 -07 1 i. 11 . PLAN PLAN - PLUMBING ED URY 01' 1414112 50410410 JUL 15 AY 1101.11 S 0,40:11, Orin1Dl : PROJECT NO;: 90 -004 Onrvl llnp Dula. PM nARd 61998 P204lr COMP; ICTIZEIN 10x18 10010 111 1111E t1 4'0 -4 CD -1 207114 L ®J� �_w' 1.1.11111i■ v `aat■ MN I I 111 ■u•111 20X12 P010 11 •• LCD111B 11 1 MI MI ■I 4 �, It �I F..: I ON 1100 (1050 LBS.) , k' p � . ■v pg • .I I 1� EYJ NG I �� '� �NGE I f44JJ MO i...._ IIIMPM111011M1111111111i111111111121111111111111=1.11.1111111111 1111111.11INTE MMIIIIMiN■ a .. ■� °� 4MWIPIf — - '1■ =li ■ i .4.)•13■ H�- 51.� 1 1 � y1. ELECTRICAL ON R00 CFJUNC MOUNTED LUNCH SCULLERY ROOF (1100 LBS.) (1100 LBS) 42014 1/4" = 1' -0' 1 FLOOR PLAN - HVAC WOMEN'S m® LIQUOR ■ PHONE STORAGE , ® ' MOWN 12 - B0 .•, Ega N 5 111 I E �IU 14.0 . 11 MG DRY STORAG WOOD STORAGE LIJ G�_ARBAGE r - - - 1 r - r KITCHEN AREA MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SUPPLIED BY'OTHERS: MAKE-UP AIR U MAU -2).. EXHAUST (EF -1, i , EF -5). MECHANICAL CONTRA INSTALL ALL -MAKE- P AN'- XHAU INDICATED ON KITCHEN DRA NGS. UIPME T T - ITS (MA J -1 i& F -3, E -4, AND °VIDE AND DUCTWORK AS 00000 AND INSTALL T —SEAT SERVING ROC .OP AC' UNIT. PROVIDE IN AC0URDANCE 41111:EWIPME11T MANU— FACTURERS RECOYMENDATONR PRO7ECT SPECIFICATIONS AND: AO.A MOUNTING HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS. PRONOE T —STAIN LOOKING CLEAR ACR17.1CCOVER B0% ANE -21 AIR UNIT ST OTHERS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY. SEE KITCHEN O0AMN05. O RW1E B•0 SUPPLY DUCT 00NN TO CO-5 AND PROVIDE VOIIIE OAYPW UN WCT DROP. O 0 ROUTE )Y0. METALRESTW TYPE •R' FLUE PIPE UP IN RATED 1 HRWGI R00I N LO AS APPROWD WNT CAP: TER0NATE VENT CAP AS H AU. WOE ALLOW 21 REQUIREMENTS SHALL WIRY MTII ALL STATE AND LOCAL REWMEIAENI4 © ROTE 6 EXHAUST DUCT UP TO ROOF ' NT. 0 ROUTE ISMS EXHAUST DUCT UP THROUGH ROOF FOR WM- 17E0110N TO CURB MOUNTED ROOF EXHAUST FAN. DETAIL 2/114. IIsi ltlingDjYiSion Nolcs Cnndilinns tor PNm review nppmr Nleel Permit N BM -11042 X.)41717(11412.4: IIVAC'. system:Audi helquiIPed with aulmmnlie em,lrols oo1ohlo of ueeomplisl :Imo it reduction of (ne mm use IUro„ Rk cm/1n,1 selIaek m' eRUlpaUVnt shtildl *n during Periods of non -use or ulleri use of the spay,: served by 111e system. Thy autom lm,, n minimum 11eVen.d:T clock and he eapIUle or U4n0 se1 for seven different day 01177 per week. NOTES THIS SHEET O INSTALL PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR 630 0ONINO IT W MTH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS REC1AYE11DA UN PW5 AND ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PLAN AND HOOFING OVALS. O COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF SPACE THERMOSTAT MTH STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH-111. OP TERMINATE RETURN AR DUCT AS SHOMN. INSTALL I /4 BIRD— SCREEN ON OPEN END Ci DUCT ABOVE OPEN MOOD JOIST CE RO. *000001 ODOR 0/4• FOR RETURN AIR FROM ROOM. RW1E 94001.0 AND RETURN AN DUCT DROPS 1110 RWROP AC UNIT SAME NSI AS UNIT CONNECIW 9ZE 440E TURNING VANE AND TRANSITION TO DUCT AS 910 C 05 AND 0001 STRUCTURAL ROOF PENETRATION DUCT 50006 MT1 SIWKIRAL O PRONU0 SQUARE TO ROUND UUNSI1ON AT EXHAUST GSL1E SET 0TEN 941 au*ST TO MNOOW FOR W 00*1 TFIROW DOM4 10WM05 LEADNG AND SET 100 RENANING 5015 FOR HOIZWTAL THROW. 104 E INSTALL (1) 30•x20. 204015106 AIN IdIWR IN DOPR USTMN -tY ai THIS R0 AND INSTALL Il) 20•x20• CW2UI5006 O PR AIR LOUVER WA'S DOOR MTIIN 12' 6 FINISHED FC C ACH I 6 C o W. FT. MINIMUM FREE AREA fGR AOI LOUVER. CRANE Y ODEL iFIA • NSTA1 EECOIC UNIT HEATER u W WALL &RA CKE0 S AS NIW AS POSSIBLE ANO IN ACCONANCE MiH MANU— FACIPERS RECWMENDA10N5 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION 411H ARCHITECT. ME METAL 1/011 O PURPOSES ONLY. SEE KITCHEN DRAMNCS C00600AIW O MOUNT DIFFUSER 12 ABOVE TOP OF OPEN WOOD JOIST. O MOUNT THERMOSTAT ON INSULATED SUS -0X2 e ROUTE 14 DOYN TO CEC-1. PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPER IN DUCT DROP. LOt ROUTE DUCTWORK UP IN BETWEEN STRUCTURAL TRUSSES l4 ROUTE oucrooRIf THROUGH OPEN MFR STRUCTURAL TRUSSES • AS REWIRED. • © ROUTE 100 SUPPLY DUCT DOMI TO CO -1 AND PROVIDE `PLUME DAMPER IN DUCT DROP. e DUCT WORK TO 1T SEMEN SOFFITS (APPRDMMATLY. SS• CLEAR BETWEEN SKIDS). GENERAL NOTES 0 4 A ALL WOO PERFORMED AND MATERIAL SPPUED SHALL 00449041 TO ALL STATE ANC LOCAL CODES AND AL OTHER 411900206* LAN AND STATE REW1A00NS ,N0Y0N0 APPI1CA91E SEISING ZONE REQUIREMENTS. MANTAN 10' -0 MINIMUM SEPAMII0N FROM AL 04190E AI E SPENIN05 AND ALL ANICAL VEI4110 PLUMBING 1(1115 AND DIIAIST�, A KITCHEN -0*6 EXHAUST ) FAN S 1 1 ! 0 M A ] U KITCHEN ME 00 80 0100. 9 Fdt 00610 P W09E5 NLY. 24000*A1E EXACT LOCATION OF'A1L CEILING GNUES AND 0FFU5ER5 MM ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING RAN, UGH1N0, AND STRUCTURAL CCNDI10N0 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION' OP THERMOSTATS MIN ARTWORK, SI013, ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL CONO1060 PRIOR TO RWGI —N, INSTAUA0ON CP ALL THERMOSTATS SHALL COMPLY MN ALL A.D.A. XEOU*EMENTS SEE 3/114 AND WAS FOR TYRCAL DIFFUSER MO GRILLE MAIL AL DUCITIORK ABOVE OPEN WOOD J010 CARO 91ALL es 6X90500, MO) AND 0106100 MM MT BLACK COLOR BOUND WCIWRX SNAIL BE ROOMS SPIRAL TORE. DUCTS IMMEDIATELY ASOMS DY6 JOIST COUNG NEED NOT TO BE TERNALLY INSULATED. INSULATE OUCTMORK AS S SHOW DUCT 111140 INSULATE IN ABOVE Y SHOW 6 CONCEALED OE01N0 WACE. H WC08NA10 INSTALLATION CR DUCTWORK UP 11 BETWEEN 5111460 x0 1)460101 RE TRUSSES M1H 401 FlRE 9PRI00ER 1RUSSE6 CON1RAC0OR, 0 OPEN WCT MWN100 9.1041E 0610000X5 (SD), 9RON0E0 SY ON30N 14, 1X5141100 BYON90N IS WCT WOR LAYOUT 15 100OURA00 N NA1WK. OEN0R46 00141RACT0R TO 000601X416 EXACT CITY OF R 0111 APPROVED JUL 151998 AS 50111 SULONO 1041/1011 GTJ'o @ E.M98R • vERINT CENfpq PROJECT NO.: 138 I:6:22)ACE 1ATA%FNMt LAC, noulliep Nimes SIZE TANK HGT ABOVE ROOK NO. OF STRAPS LOCATOR 68 CAL OR LESS 12' OR LESS 1 BETWEEN TOP 1/3 AND 1/2 OF TANK 66 CAL OR LESS MORE THAN 12' 2 TOP -IN TOP 1/3 OF TANK BOTT014-3' ABOVE OR BELOW ACCESS PANEL 66 CAL TO 100 12' OR LESS 2 TOP -IN TOP 1/3 OF TANK BOTTOM -3" ABOVE OR BELOW ACCE55 PANEL 86 GAL i0 100 MORE THAN 12' 3 TOP -IN TOP 1/3 OF TANK BOTTOM -3' 66100 ACCESS PANEL MIDDLE- CENTER OF TANK HVAC UNIT - RUBBER GASKET PRE -FA8 CURB BY AC -UNIT MANUFACTURER. NOTE: COORDINATE EXACT DETAIL WITH HVAC UNIT MANUFACTURER RECEIVED CTIYOFTURWIA FH 1 1 1999 PERMI10ENIER SECURELY EASIER CURB TO ROOF DECK AS REWIRED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATONS. NOTE PROVIDE ROOF LEVELING CURB AS REWIRED. BIRDSCREEN CWNIERFIASH (1) 2X6 CURB FLASHING ROOFING ROOF DE CANT STRIP DUCT SIZE TO FIT FAN. TRANSTIONS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE MIN. DISTANCE AS REQUIRED BY 0006. 8101E' PI ASTFRFO CFII 1140 DETAIL SIAM AR NOT TO SCALE SUPPORT CHANNEL - INTEGRAL TO AC UNIT. PROVIDE 8' VIDE X 8' LONG 16 GAUGE BENT SHEET METAL STRAP. SECURELY FASTEN TO CURB AND AC UNIT. PROVIDE ONE STRAP PER SIDE FOR UNITS UP TO 5000 LEIS. AND TWO STRAPS PER SIDE FOR UNITS OVER 5000 UM FASTEN STRAP SECURELY TO CHANNEL AND TO NAILER STRIP. NAILER STRIP FLASHING RIGID INSULATION ROOFING CANT STRIP LEVELING STRIP ROOF DECK ROOF FRAM NG 1 AC UNIT CURB DETAIL NT5 BACKDRAFT DAMPER 2 ROOF EXHAUST FAN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 034 3 TYPICAL CEILING DIFFUSER AGA APPROVED VENT TOP STORM COLLAR CONE ROOF FLASHING ROOFING ROOF DECK CAS VENT ROUTE PIPING UP THRU ROOF VAIN -16 THE PERIMETER OF THE MOUNTING CURB. SECURE CHANNEL 10 WALL 01606) U AS REQUIRED. (TYPICAL) aITEwRUA: ryas DETAILS CM RODRII0 STBROI SEE AROR01TUREL DRAWS PE7Alnl =WAN N ENDS OF SYSTEM loh liiiir WALL DRAIN W/ 2' CONNF01100 MAXIMUM 2 -' ,P 2" TALI PIFf1 l BEDUC�E 2 " AND /OR 4' P -TRAP 3 /FR 4' WASTE 1INF_ 5 DRAIN DETAIL AT CWV SYSTEM NOT TO SCALE 6 PLUMBING VENT FLASHING NOT TO SCALE 7 GAS PIPE ROOF PENETRATION NOT TO SCALE 8 SLEEVE FOR SODA SYSTEM NOT TO SCALE 2101E: MNNTAIN C TO COM8U 160 S REWIRED BY MANUFACTURER. 0102E NON CpM 440 116 A5 SP MINIMUM MANUFACTURER CLEARANCE AT WATER HEATER AND STORAGE TANKS PROVIDE 'SPACE MAKER" BRAND S95MI0 RESTRAINT SYSTEM (OR O MEET R FOR ZONE 4 SEISMIC INSTALLATIONS. EARTHQUAKE BRACING (WATER 4 GAS VENT BUILT -UP ROOF PENETRATION 9 HEATERS AND STORAGE TANKS) NT5 W5 -08 NOT TO SCALE 0281 488062 NIg - ay3 DO NOT INSiN . R.E DUCT LONGER MAN 8 FEET 116100, FOR AI 2 1 rum DUCT W INCLINING LINEAR 9DTS 1 f1ETIBLE DUCT CONNECTION NOT ALLOYED 61 ARMS CF OPEN EXPOSED WOW MST CEILINGS TO STRUCTURE SHEET METAL CONNECTION ONLY. 10 FLEXIBLE DUCT • CEILING AIR INLET /OUTLET NOT TO SCALE NOTE: PROVIDE COMPLETE ASSEMBLY AS REWIRED. REGULATORS- NOT REWIRED AT ALL LOCATIONS, VERIFY PRIOR TO ROUGH -I . AS SHUTOFF V UNION DRIP LEG 11 GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE 0124 DEVICE DUCT HANGER ATTACH TO SIRUCNRE ABOVE CENIERUNE' NOT LE55 THAN 1.5 FOR ALL ELBOWS DUCT CLAMP WR INLET /00001 `- -CDDNG r-- CONNECT TO. EQUIPMENT " IA-- UNION REDUCER (A5 REQUIRED.) SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR EXACT SIZE. PRESSURE REGULATOR VENT TO OUTSIDE AS REWIRED BY CODE COORDINATE ROUTING. 12 DISHWASHER CONNECTION DETAIL ORF 5RIFS 065 IRE RFDUCNO' Emu ATOB 2/4" NOT TO SCALE AMIRW EXPANSION TANK /ST -25V (AWE) PROVIDE AND INSTALL 1 -1/2' REDUCED PRES5U BACKFLOW DEVICE (WATTS /809) 1 AI MFR MOOR NO. 34AI Wr aMEI 3/4" )40' FIN SIPPIY 3/4 1 -1 /2" NOTE: L /I PIPING 10 BE SAME NEE A5 AC UNIT 06NN. - 2'DNAIN PIPING TO BE COPPER OR ALTERNATE MATERIAL APPROVED BY LOCAL CODES, 14 CONDENSATE TRAP NOT TO SCALE If MAX PLUG TYPICAL NINES V M 00 - 0ING) C WATTS ON 1ROl N0. ACV V 115. 1 - 1/2" AUTOMATIC JUST R A ST AS'REQUIRED TO MEET FUALLL VE SYSTEM DEMAND. 2 RELIEF VALVE CASH-ACME. WATTS, ASAIE RATED 3. ANCHOR ENTIRE ASSEMBLY TO WALL ,ro aLOC: \` 2 -1 /2' 3'0 PRESSURE GAUGE RELIEF VALVE VALVE SET AT 80 P9 CAPPED TEES. • "� (FOR FUTURE PRESSURE REDUCING PRY) VALVE ANO 5TR0NER 2 -1/2" ASSEMBLY. UNION , , . GATE VALVE (TYPICAL) / -0010 WAT / FROM ER SITE 15 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION 040 SCALE VALE 1410 FLOW SWITCH (TYP.) VALVE. TPICCR*1. FORM WET AND DRY 615ERS 10C 16 FIRE SPRINKLER RISER DETAIL 1402 TO SCALE TEMPERAIURE AID PRESSURE 1mEF YKK NSO4NDD F1.4. SOF AS PER IRSR MIB POUR TO now was ABOVE cEUNa J WET SPRINKLER \ N R W SWITCH 00AU06 FE 2" MAIN ORAIN (1VP.) OR 14 TO ATMOSPHERE OR CWTR8 PANEL 600110* AC UNIT TER OUTLET OVER SPLASH PLATE 18918'. 418, SHEET LEAD HOT MOPPED CNTO ROOF CITY OF NKWILA APPROVES JUL' 151998 AS NOTED W N -1 ( 724,000 BTU4) ADJUST BOILER MODULATNO OAS VALVE TO 069460 TEMPERATURE AT DISHWASHER NOV MAX) c11Y IVAR . a:6'tgg� PERMIT CEryRp' PROJECT NO:'A0 -004 Cie Z 1 ,1 Z V W a. od o . OP5111:4 • EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 3F160L. '.OiION '. ELECTRICAL �:IAF P0042050 ROOFTOP A/C UNIT WITH OM HEAT: 4000 CPU Al' 0.60 IN, E.5.P.. /500 CM MIN, OUTSIDE AIR. MIN. COOLI4D: 139.6 *04 TOTAL; 101.3 IoM SHC -AT 76.9 DEGREES F EOB, 65,1 DEGREES F EM, 95 00840E F-N0IENT. V 750.STAGE HEATING; 235 USN INPUT; IEB IRS OUTPUT; PROVIDE 000F 002.1WNLMIZEII ROAR EDAM LW MBIENT CONTR01. NO EXHAUST DIAPER. APPROXIMATE OPERATING WEIGHT: 18 P0105. LENNIX MODEL LOA 150 (5) (TRANS OR CARRIER) 2054/5 65 MCA. 3 HP PO4 *0500 (0.0 EER,B.SIPLV) AC-2 INTERIOR DINING - P0006S ROCFTGR A/C UNIT WITH 005 HEVTI 4000. CARAT 0.6 IN. E.S.P., 1400 ISM MIN, OUTSIDE AIR. 01N. COOLING: 139.5 MS TOTAL; 109.2 1/01 SIC AT 79,2 DECREES F ES, 54.9 DECREES F ERB. 95 DEGREE F 7104555. T= STAGE HEATING: 235 MU INPUT; 182 164 OUTPUT: P00040E 500E CU0,EDINMIZER, PODS EXHAUST LOW 4*016NT COV1R01. 010 EJOIAU9T OIIPER, . APPROXIMATE OPERATING WEIGHT: 1650 P0005. 0(400 MODEL LOA 150 (5) (!RATE GR CARRIER) . 2000/3 65 MCA, 3 IP FAN ROTOR (9.0 EER.9.SIPLV) AC-3 SEMIS DINING 5/ DINING 25 PA0OGED RO4TGR A/C LSE WITH OAS HEAT: 3500 CAW AT 0.60 IN. E.S.P., 1000 COINIX. OUTSIDE AIR. MIN.. COOLING: 122.7 *00 TOTAL; 88.9 MN RIC AT 77.6 DEGREES F FOB, 64.4 DEGREES F ES, 95 DEGREE 4104011. - TWA STAGE MATING: 235 MBH 1HOU1; IBS MGR ORPUT: 14074050557005,440011055, POKER DISUSE 1011 0404041 WIMP. AO EXHAUST CANER. APPROXIMATE [MATING MIGHT: 1450 POUNDS. 14405 =EL LOA -120 (H) (1RAXE GR CARRIER) 208V/3 57 MCA. 3 H' FAN MOTOR (II.00ER, 11.81PLV) AC-4 L0080/ ENTRY P000040D WEFTS A/C WIT MTH OAS HEAT: ' 1365 CM AT 0.50 IN. E.5.P., 450 01 YIN. STRIDE AIR, MIN. COOLING: 48.4 1011 TOTAL; 37.7 MS SIC AT 79.54 DEGREES F EMI, 04,04 DEGREES F LOB, 95 UEGR6E - F 5045NT. MIN. HEATING: 75 MTH 14001: 58 MBH OUTPUT: PROVIDE ROOF. DEG. ECDNWIZER, RAVER EDRIST, LOW MOTES CONTROL Ala EJ5W0ST DANE.. APPROXIMATE. AERATING MIGHT: 750 PONDS. LENNOX DOOM 0516-080 -75 (TARE WOARRI50) 2000/3 22 MCA. 3/4 HP FAN MOTOR (10 SEER) 01-1 UNIT HEATER: (SERVES IMMAITCAL ROOT) WIT HEATER WITH INTEGRAL FACTORY INSTALLED THERMOSTAT; WALL MINTING BRACKET 1.614-5. QUARK MOREL MRI05-81 2064/3 5 KW EF -I RDOF MAST FAN : (SERVES BROILER HOW) 8000 CAI' C.1KOEI WV 210 2000/3 3 IP EF -2 31 4 EXHAUST FM: (SERVES PREP RCM) 3400 CF ML 195R8B 20 (7 ROW EXHAUST FN4:(6LRVES MAIN ROCCO 4825. Cell COCK MODEL 194958 SARI IFD BY XITOHM .7.2 ASL INSTAIIFO BY AVRANICAI INDTRAC.TOR x080/3 2 1P (7-4 . ROOF EXHAUST FAN : (SERVES DISWNBEN 160) 1200 CM COCK MOREL 13408 OPPLIFO BY WirNEN 81N1RN'TGR Ala UNCOIL W NY LFCHWIML WMRACTER 42O7/1 1/4 HP EF; 0 ROOF E5MU5T FAN: (SERVES PIZZA OVEN) -: 600 CFO COOK .EL 120428 W0PLIN 900 KITCIFH COO507500 AD 1001241 PO BY WCHNNIC41 CONTRACTOR 1157 /I I/O W 4 Z 0 �-A1 EF-4 WILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN: (0RVE5 FIPLOY5E 6ES100014) 100 CFI AT .25 1N, E.S.P. WITH SCRAMS' DARER; 4.2 SORES; 1070 RPM TXIUAI. COOK WDEL LITRE CPI 11 APPROXIMATE MIST: 15 P0005. 1207/1 60 WATTS EF -7 001510095/ ROOF ()005040 FA1 WITH ALWIM.Y 4054404 ( SERVES 409590022) 600 CFM AT .075 IN. E.S.P. WHIN 800045 7 044052; BELT g41V 1390 RPM; 8.4 50165 MANIMN. SOCK IDOL 40OCL6 APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 95 POUNDS, 1204 //1 I/6 w 4140-1 ROOFTOP MUSE -UP AIR UNIT: (SERVES KITCHEN) ' 5 CM OB NIX M00EL 1411424, RC0110 440400 PPI INT EN XI TCHFN CORW:TGR AND 14050105 PT 1070441041 0AISA1740 208V/3 2 If MAUI -2 ROOFTOP MAKE-UP AIR WIT: (SERVES KIT0011) 6540 05 PHOENIX TOWEL 411424, MOD. 450400 WPPI IFD BY XIMINN CONTPAM14 Ala INCTAII FD BY YttNM17M CONTRAf 2080/3 2 w TITUS 50I 01-1 0 1 NEATER, E150TR1C; SLIP IN TYPE 0 KN FGR 10X10 OIICf 2 ST AGE 2054/0 6 NW 0 1 - 2 0007 HEATER, 51525510; SLIP M TYPE - 501470410410050.265400 2007/3 6 AW NOTE: MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL' EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS: MAKE -UP AIR UNITS'(MAU -1 & MAU -2), EXHAUST FANS EF -1, EF -2, EF =3, EF -4, AND EF -5. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL MAKE -UP AND EXHAUST DUCTWORK AS INDICATED ON KITCHEN DRAWINGS. • DUCT LEGEND EfM a A13IGE_NO �wr ARUmNW Rom 11.4osTAT �:IAF I!I �Ww 't: MUMENT 6711. P q suPVLY OURET AE1U101/EMUS NRT 90OA ONE E 50.11l20 2--6 ... 0011155 01711555 2024.1000E PPCR41FR; T -6M. I�L� 7 } =4 BR ourw WHITE : FD 60400 TYPE 3 SOFT 40-2 55-3 0-I U-2 L -1 L -2 LJ 541 0.41 FO-2 IRl FD-2 FS-I F9-2 5811 P-I P-2 NPI 40 HN GT -1 AD-1 01-1 RBP-4 IW-2 CEILI54 01FFIRFR 24024 MODULE ' _ MD T 0005000 IFMw r 5.00 ir 1rAOln 11vW 4.--J `W Q '-F OULVS 1 pU AuiO M.VIM 444 ace 1 4- 07-3P CEILING 0IIF 60AKp1 t --o-- -F Iowa Raw SURFACE III --RT G0a5 64117E' � Oe Aw 4 MAX 3O TMa- G: ' mMMew 2 ' r W "°" i4 u FLEA1�°' I' • DMnWNL Nrt CE 0-1 4 Z 0 �-A1 751W4 4700 DIFFUSER REGISTER AND GRILLE SCHEDULE: EfM TIP! IPA99 ' AVA6' q/Af91 RSI , ;: 501006 N0. 50.11l20 CO-I 0011155 01711555 2024.1000E PPCR41FR; T -6M. 015 WHITE : , ' TITUS 705 60400 TYPE 3 SOFT 40-2 55-3 0-I U-2 L -1 L -2 LJ 541 0.41 FO-2 IRl FD-2 FS-I F9-2 5811 P-I P-2 NPI 40 HN GT -1 AD-1 01-1 RBP-4 IW-2 CEILI54 01FFIRFR 24024 MODULE ' SFCUIED �: 0005000 . HOE WHITE 'U TITUS PCS 680(4 0076 T' 07-3P CEILING 0IIF IUUVf1E :. SURFACE MORE 64117E' TITUS TEC ROOFTOP AC UNIT CE 0-1 CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE 751W4 4700 AMFAEE NONE 400455 TITUS PM INFRARED HEATER 009-0 CEILING EIOOU GRILLE EOBCRA7F SUOACE NONE SMITE :, TITUS 50I MAKE-UP AIR UNIT CRP .CEILING PEIIAN GRILLE ' /PERFORATED T-545 NONE WHITE' TINS PAR BROILER GRO.2 25(1I823 RETAIN POBDNTE0 STEAM NONE 00111E 117115 PM ' HOT PLATE $30.1 910EWAll 07fAY. 'GRILLE ` 4KW1201TN. 7, 9950 ' 5 -1 /4' MADER NONE 54111E TITUS 301 F1 MO 01104.E ,REFLECTION. 50-4 40JU5TA7E LION SLOT OIFFV�({ J-R07 NAOM'S NONE MITE T1712 3,1100E1 IAaO 3/4'.91.47131 OGROER,7YPE.I41 g 3 5 . a MS - caar3 0500050 FEN 1 7 199) 405 5M1059IE9 AIR SYSTEM BALANCE CHART ITEM AD-4 ROOMOP AC WIT sowoo LOOPY A 1805 GM WIT NA7-1 RAPE H00p5P AIR WIT SERVING I1.41-2 1107F7UP WILE -up AIR DNB SERVING KITCHEN EFL Era DESCRIPTION LOUSE AC UNIT RAINS 4000 011 WIT ROOFTOP M WIT SERVING INTERIOR DINING MM CN WIT ROOFTOP w INN 49101110 EXTERIOR DINING 5AD 25 3600 ON WIT NG ROOFTOP E 18000P EXHAUST FM SERVING KITCHEN Iwo HOCO ROOF. MAST M WRONG DISNI.ER .21X4 FOUST FM SE 0010) HOOD CEILING EMWST FIN SEINING OBLATE RESTRmI ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN SERVING RESIROOME EXHAUST 6000 am Noo c17,1 M25 CFR 1207 cm 000 CFR 100 EFL 600 ON SUPPLY BIN 36.7710SA•. 1560 CM BIN M.OA OMB 1400 GM BIN 21.440&• IOW COI mix 21.0X OSA• WO CM A500 011 MOO CM TOTAL BUILT. EMMST AIR: 16.525 TRIAL WMILORD lU3EiP 5041 1 - 600 CM • OU1L01N0 I9 FOSITIYE IN 675 ON CI11 0 WIlA JUtj :I5 1998 IyM01EM Howes 5.10 -56 I GAS D CHART PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ITEM DESCRIPTION LOAD INPUT CONNECTION SIZE EMI 04000T1DN w tCEl , >3� LYY AC-1 ROOFTOP AC UNIT 235 MBH 3/4' SOFT 40-2 55-3 0-I U-2 L -1 L -2 LJ 541 0.41 FO-2 IRl FD-2 FS-I F9-2 5811 P-I P-2 NPI 40 HN GT -1 AD-1 01-1 RBP-4 IW-2 WA1 TON CLOSET: FLOOR 1 0RWTED, 1.5 130, FLUSH VALVE, ELOGATED BURL, VITREOUS DMA, SIP JET ALMS, 1-1/2' TOP SPUR, MIT CAPS. 41 2234.015 'MARS TE AMERICAN 90410 W: SEAT: WMERIAL ICHT HEAVY -001T SOLID PLASTIC, OPEN FROM, STAINLESS STEEL CHECK HINGE, WHITE, WITHOUT COVER. 1180 9300C. AOTET S L O A N R O Y A L 1 1 1 10 4 1 5 # 5 0 U 5 0 , WATER CLOSET: FLOGR NXNTEO, 1,5 CPF, FLUSH VALVE. ELONGATED 18' HIGH BOW, VITREOUS MINA, SIP0 JET RATION, 1 -1/2' TOP SPIID, BOLT CAPS. HERMAN STANDARD 3043.102 'ELDERLY NEW CADET ADAMEEM. SEAT: 000ERCIAL MIGHT HEAVY -0UEY SOLID PLASTIC, OPEN FRONT, STAINLESS STEEL CHES HINGE, WHITE, WITHOUT DOVER. 0 95000. 057 VALVE: SLOW ROYAL 111 WATS SAVER. WATER CLOSET: SAE AS W: 2 EXCEPT WITH 0LSOIITE 00.407 SEAT WrtR. URINAL: SIPHON JET, 1 .0 0f, VITREOUS CHINA, FLUSH RIB, 3/4' TOP SPUD, WALL HANGER. MERI4AY SEAWARD 6341.132 'MLWiCM' LNG PLUSH V:VE: 5 L OAN ROYAL 188.1 SYSTEM', INFRARED SENSOR. FLOOR WONTED, HANGER PLATE. 1415. MIEN AS APPLICABLE, TO RESIDENTIAL. URINAL, SIREN JET, 1.0 WE. vITREOLS CHINA, FLUSHING RIM, 3/4' RCP SP. WALL HANGS, AAERICAN STANDARD 8541.132 'ALLIPoCK.' PLU91 VALVE: SEM ROYAL 186.1 'OPTIMA SYSTEM', INFRARED SENSOR. CARRIER: FLOOR MIMED, WAGER PLATE. WITH AS APPLICABLE, w RESIDENTIAL. SPECIAL IDUMING HEIOIT FOR HADICAPPW. LAVATORY: OLDER COMER, FRONT OVERFLEW, VITREOUS 01150. UNDER WIINTE4 DONS 19'x15% OVAL, SEALANT, FAUCET HOLES V CENTERS. AFRICAN ST1 049-.012 .. 1 -1/4 P FITTMDS: 1 -I/4' 4 1 -1/2' -0004.TRAP. SUPPLIES MD SLOPS. FAUCET' LEVER HAMS TYPE, 4' CENTERS, P.B. WIAL MOLE, 3 /8' O.D. COPPER TUBE INLETS, VNA START AERATES, NO LIFT ROD HOLE, POLISHED GRASS FINISH GRID 0600,1 STRAINER. KOILER 0-15198 SLID. BRASS FINISH, LAVATORY: 604E 00 1 -1 ROVE, EXCEPT H00ATE HOT WATER AND P -TRAP PIPING. FALSE LEVER 14204E TYPE, 4' COMERS, P.B. LETM HANDLE, 3/8' 0.6. COPPER VIBE INLETS, VADN - RESISTANT AERATES, NO LIFT ROO HOLE, POLISH. BUSS FINISH GRID GILER K -13190 POLISH. BRAG FINISH. LAVATORY: WALL IWO VITREOUS CHINA, ID' v 17', FRONT OVERFL01, SOAP 001155101. FAUST TOLES a 4'. CENTERS. 40154150 400. AMERICAN MONO 0521.075. AEAICAN STANDARD 0355.012 'U 7540.' FITTINGS: 1 -1/4' X I -I/2' P-117A P. SUPPLIES MD STOPS. CARRIER: FLOOR ROSTER RUTH CONCEALED ARM. 911TH AS APPLICABLE. FACET: LEVER 405 YPE T, 4' MOSS, C.P. METAL 40 5 3/6' 0.0. COWER TIME INLETS, VANWL-0E5155 ANT AERATORS, NO LIFT BO HOE, , MEAL GRID STRAINER, O4A.E FINISH. MILER N -15108 CIPbE PLATO FINISH. SERVICE 9141: FLOOR-4007E0, 24' 0 24', OPAS504* STAINLESS STEEL WE MA HER, WASEE OSP WITH 53.401 VINYL RICO MAIDS, 05. 700 45,800 0 0 H41. 043E ...WET. 00 13/200.101 4ER FAUCET: HOSE MD TYPE N BEMER, DIMMABLE ARKS, INTEGRAL STEPS Ala WALL BWOE, EIICA00 897. ROOF CRAIN: 4ERAL PLOP.. 16' 014E0ER BODY, FLASHING 000P /GAVEL STOP Ala DEW, ALDER DECK CLAP, SW RECEIVER. ALL NTS CF CAST IRON O022TRWTIW. SEE Men.'FPI SIZE. J.R. SIGN 115 404 1010, OVERPLAY DRAIN: GENERAL PURPOSE. 18' DIMETER BODY, FLASHING CLAP /GRAVEL STOP MO DOE. RDERDECX CLAP. SUP RECEIVER, ALL COPWENTS C CAST IRON 006TRUCTIGR. SEE SIMI. FOR SITE. J.R. SMITH 1070-0 FL= DRAIN: CAST -1=1 BODY WITH 400410BLE MUM POLISHED NICKEL DIME TOP. STRAIN. 010401ER 6'. VAlaAL -06.SCREAM. TRAP PRILEA 673150T!.I. PROVIDE WITH P -TRAP, J.R. SMITH 2003-A. FLOOR GRIN: CAST-IRON BODY WITH ADJUSTABLE 50100 70.15HE0 NICKEL BRONZE TOP, 4' DIAMTER FOWL. STRAIN. DIAETER 0', TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. PROVIDE WITH P-TRN, J.R. SMITH 5510F11. FLOW 5114: 8-1/2' SOMME TOP, 6' 0EEP, HEAVY CAST -1M WITH ACI0409I9541 COATING INTERIOR, (NICKEL BRONZE RIM MD SECURER GRATE,) (NICKEL BRONZE RIM 70 1/2 5410,) ALWINW COE BOTTOM SWAIM, PRIMED, J.R. SMITH 3100, (NOTE: VERIFY ELITE REQUIREMENTS WITH KITCEN.AULTANT PLANS) FLOOR SINK: I2 -1/2' 5GWRE TOP, 10' DEEP, HEAVY CA51 -1511 WITH ACID RESISTANT COATING INTERIM, (NIIXEL MONRE RIM AD SECURED ORTE,) (NICKEL BRONZE RIM Ala I/2 GRATE,) ALW1H.W OBE BOTT1 STRAINER, PR12017. J.R. BATH 3130, (NOTE: VERIFY ELITE ROOT RDEMS WITH KITCMH =SULTAN! PLAYS) INTER HEATER: GAS-FIRED, 124,000 BTU INPUT, 097 004 AT 100 7 RISE, DRAIN VALVE, 1 3 P VALVE, 5/80 5ILLOI 00 981101OR TANK RAY-AK MODEL N0. 724-11 -PR HOT WANT RECIRCULATING KW: BELL MD 05ETT 'LITTLE LEO ILR-15 WITH WPM MOT. 1200/I / 1/12 HP MOTOR, I0T INTER RECIRCULATING WW: BELL AND GSSLU 'LITTLE RED' 9LR-15 WITH WOKE my. 120v/1 / 1/12 w LO1W, 415 BIBB, EXTERIOR WALL: ROOOFOD WDEL 865 WITH vAW91 BREAKER. AUTOMATIC DRAINING, ARSE BIBI, RASH ROOT: 0 001 110051. 6150 COME BIBB, 000: ROWFWD MA WITH SCAN BREAKER. GREASE INTERCEPTOR: PRE- EMHICATW 3100 OLLLON CONCRETE CREASE INTERCEPTOR, INSTALLATION SHALL MAPLE WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL WOES, UTILITY VAULT CO. 330-812 -50, AREA F.R DRAIN: CST -1 WIN BODY WITH SEDIMM BESET .R SMUT NO. 2230 =MIB:OT NOZZLE: CAST MODE BODY WITH FLAW£, THEE MOUNTING .ES AT 120 SIE DRAWINGS FOR OZL. UR. SMITH WW1 500171 V PRfl58414. BUILDING ENTRANCE: WATTS 00905 -5. 81607000 PREVENTS, NW: WATTS 55905 -5. 3' 3' 2 2' I -1/2' 1 -1/4' I -1/2' J 500 PAS. SEE OAS. - 2' 2' - - - - - 4 - - 2 2 -I/2' -I/2' I -I/2' 1 -1/4' 1 - 1/2' 1 -1/2' - - - (-I/O' 1 -1/2' - - _ - - 2 - - 1 0/ 3/4' I/O' 1/2' 1/2' I/O' - - - - - 2' - - 3/4' 3/4• - - 5/4• - - - - 1/2' 1/2' 1 /2' 1/2' - - - - 2' 3/4' 3/4• - 3/4' - - - AC-2 ROOFTOP AC UNIT 235 MBH 3/4' AC-3 ROOFTOP AC UNIT 235 MBH 3/4' AC-4 ROOFTOP AC UNIT 75 904 I /O A-7 UGHT FIXTURE 40 BNH (3) 1/2' IH-1 INFRARED HEATER (9) 25 MBH (9) I/2' - MAU-1 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT 400 MBH , MAU-2 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT 400 MB H 1 ' WH-1 WATER HEATER 724 MBH 1 -1 /Y 0 BROILER 20 MBH 1/2' C) SALAMANDER 66 MBH 3/4' C) HOT PLATE 120 MBH 3/4' 82.51,1BH 3/4' 0 FRYERS 366 MBH HEADER 0 RANGE 150 MBH 1 OP ADD-A-UNIT 40 457 I /27 C) OVEN 110 MBH (2) 3/4' TOTAL CONNECTED 000 3483.5 MBH TOTAL CONNECTED LENGTH = 125' - DESIGNED AT STANDARD 214. DELIVERY PRESSURE. NOTES 1 FIXTURE NRN4014, BE SUPP LIED BY OWNER: 5011 DIMENSIONS FOR EXACT CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT S HALL LIED BY OWNER. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL Al DISPOSALS AND HAND SINKS. ROUGH-1N AND CONNECT COMPLETE. 2 PROVIDE SPEEDWAY STOPS AND 5UPPUE5 FOR OMMER-FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ITEMS PROVIDE SHOCK ARRESTOR AND SOLENOID VALVE AT DISPOSERS 3 PREP SINKS ARE INDIRECT WASTE. OTHERS ARE DIRECT WASTE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 4 PROVIDE PRESSURE GAUGE AT ALL ICE MACHINES. WATTS 25AUB-GG. SET AT 25 PSI, 5 AT ALL HAND SINKS (NS) AND RESTR00.1 LAVATORIES PROVIDE 57121.10215 4 -100 TEMPERING VALVE ON HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY SET AT I10F. • g 3 5 . a MS - caar3 0500050 FEN 1 7 199) 405 5M1059IE9 AIR SYSTEM BALANCE CHART ITEM AD-4 ROOMOP AC WIT sowoo LOOPY A 1805 GM WIT NA7-1 RAPE H00p5P AIR WIT SERVING I1.41-2 1107F7UP WILE -up AIR DNB SERVING KITCHEN EFL Era DESCRIPTION LOUSE AC UNIT RAINS 4000 011 WIT ROOFTOP M WIT SERVING INTERIOR DINING MM CN WIT ROOFTOP w INN 49101110 EXTERIOR DINING 5AD 25 3600 ON WIT NG ROOFTOP E 18000P EXHAUST FM SERVING KITCHEN Iwo HOCO ROOF. MAST M WRONG DISNI.ER .21X4 FOUST FM SE 0010) HOOD CEILING EMWST FIN SEINING OBLATE RESTRmI ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN SERVING RESIROOME EXHAUST 6000 am Noo c17,1 M25 CFR 1207 cm 000 CFR 100 EFL 600 ON SUPPLY BIN 36.7710SA•. 1560 CM BIN M.OA OMB 1400 GM BIN 21.440&• IOW COI mix 21.0X OSA• WO CM A500 011 MOO CM TOTAL BUILT. EMMST AIR: 16.525 TRIAL WMILORD lU3EiP 5041 1 - 600 CM • OU1L01N0 I9 FOSITIYE IN 675 ON CI11 0 WIlA JUtj :I5 1998 IyM01EM Howes 5.10 -56 I